Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
580 Pages

advertisement

Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Self-propelled High-Performance

Mower-Conditioner

BiG M 420

(from serial no.: 906966)

Order no.: 150 000 130 04 en

28.02.2017

Table of Contents

Pos: 1 /BA/Konformitätserklärungen/Selbstfahrer/Neu ab 2010/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1287034020468_78.docx @ 464363 @ @ 1

CV0

EC Declaration of Conformity

We

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, D-48480 Spelle hereby declare as manufacturer of the product named below, on our sole responsibility, that the

Machine:

Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner

Type/types: BiG M 420 CV, BiG M 420 CRI to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the relevant provisions of

EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery) and EC Directive 2004/108/EC (EMC)

The signing Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.

Spelle, 01.11.10

Year of manufacture:

Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann

(Managing Director, Design and Development)

Machine No.:

Pos: 2 /BA/Vorwort/Sehr geehrter Kunde @ 0\mod_1195626300326_78.docx @ 905 @ @ 1

Dear customer,

Dear customer,

You have now received the operating instructions for the KRONE product which you have purchased.

These operating instructions contain important information for the proper use and safe operation of the machine.

If these operating instructions should become wholly or partially unusable, you can obtain replacement operating instructions for your machine by stating the number given overleaf.

Pos: 3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2

Pos: 4 /Layout Module /Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 0\mod_1196861555655_78.docx @ 15165 @ 1 @ 1

Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents

1   Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 3  

2   Foreword ............................................................................................................................................... 14  

3   To this Document ................................................................................................................................. 15  

3.1

  Validity .............................................................................................................................................. 15  

3.1.1

  Direction Information ................................................................................................................. 15  

3.2

  Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions ............................................................................ 15  

3.3

  Identification of the hazard warnings ................................................................................................ 15  

4   Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 16  

4.1

  Intended use ..................................................................................................................................... 16  

4.2

  Reasonably foreseeable misuse ...................................................................................................... 17  

4.2.1

  Personnel Qualification and Training ........................................................................................ 18  

4.2.2

  Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................................ 18  

4.2.3

  Safety-conscious work practices ............................................................................................... 18  

4.3

  Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations ............................................................... 19  

4.4

  Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel ............................................................................ 20  

4.5

  Self-propelled working machine ....................................................................................................... 20  

4.6

  Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................... 21  

4.7

  Implements ....................................................................................................................................... 22  

4.8

  Hydraulic system .............................................................................................................................. 22  

4.9

  Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 23  

4.10

  Cooling system ................................................................................................................................. 23  

4.11

  Tyres ................................................................................................................................................ 23  

4.12

  Emergency exit ................................................................................................................................. 23  

4.13

  Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines .......................................................................... 24  

4.14

  Fire preventions ................................................................................................................................ 24  

4.15

  Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 25  

4.16

  Telephone and radio sets ................................................................................................................. 25  

4.16.1

  Wheel chocks ............................................................................................................................ 25  

4.16.2

  Main battery switch ................................................................................................................... 26  

5   Machine Description ............................................................................................................................ 27  

5.1

  Machine overview ............................................................................................................................. 27  

5.2

  Identification Plate ............................................................................................................................ 28  

5.3

  Information Required for Questions and Orders .............................................................................. 28  

5.3.1

  Contact ...................................................................................................................................... 28  

6   Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 29  

6.1

  Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 29  

6.2

  Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine ................................................................ 30  

6.2.1

  Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ............................................................................................. 30  

6.2.2

  Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................ 32  

6.2.3

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................... 34  

6.2.4

  Front mowing unit ...................................................................................................................... 36  

7   Technical Data of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 38  

7.1

  Technical data .................................................................................................................................. 38  

7.1.1

  Technical Data Air Conditioning System................................................................................... 40  

7.1.2

  Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)................................................................................... 40  

7.2

  Technical Data of the Electrical System .......................................................................................... 40  

3

Table of Contents

7.3

  Consumables ................................................................................................................................... 41  

7.4

  Lubricants ......................................................................................................................................... 41  

8   Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... 42  

8.1

  Ladder to driver's cabin .................................................................................................................... 42  

8.2

  Opening the cabin door .................................................................................................................... 43  

8.3

  Operators controls ............................................................................................................................ 44  

8.3.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 44  

8.4

  Air comfort seat ................................................................................................................................ 45  

8.4.1

  Setting the left armrest .............................................................................................................. 47  

8.4.2

  Right armrest ............................................................................................................................. 47  

8.4.3

  Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ............................................................................ 48  

8.5

  Guide's seat...................................................................................................................................... 49  

8.5.1

  Cooler ........................................................................................................................................ 49  

8.5.2

  Emergency Exit ......................................................................................................................... 50  

8.5.3

  OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug) .................................................................................... 50  

8.6

  Steering Column and Foot Pedals ................................................................................................... 51  

8.6.1

  Steering Column Adjustment .................................................................................................... 52  

8.6.2

  Horn .......................................................................................................................................... 53  

8.6.3

  Indicator Switches ..................................................................................................................... 53  

8.6.4

  Full Beam .................................................................................................................................. 54  

8.6.5

  Headlamp Flasher ..................................................................................................................... 54  

8.6.6

  Using the operating brake ......................................................................................................... 55  

8.7

  Switch Group Roof Panel ................................................................................................................. 56  

8.8

  Lighting ............................................................................................................................................. 57  

8.8.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 57  

8.8.2

  Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ..................................................................... 58  

8.8.2.1

  Switching on the indicator .................................................................................................. 58  

8.8.2.2

 

8.8.2.3

 

Brake light .......................................................................................................................... 58

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ........................................................................... 58

8.8.3

  Side light/dipped beam ............................................................................................................. 59  

8.8.3.1

  Switching on the parking light ............................................................................................ 59  

 

 

8.8.3.2

  Switching on the dipped beam ........................................................................................... 59  

8.8.4

  Working floodlights .................................................................................................................... 60  

8.8.4.1

 

8.8.4.2

 

Working floodlights Cab ..................................................................................................... 61  

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................................................................................... 61  

8.8.4.3

 

8.8.4.4

 

Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units" ............................. 62

Working floodlight rear ....................................................................................................... 62

8.8.5

  Allround lights (optional) ........................................................................................................... 63  

8.8.6

  Interior Lighting / Spotlight ........................................................................................................ 64  

 

 

8.8.7

  Additional Spotlight ................................................................................................................... 65  

8.9

  Outside mirrors ................................................................................................................................. 66  

8.9.1

  Left Outside Mirror .................................................................................................................... 66  

8.9.2

  Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ............................................................................ 67  

8.9.2.1

 

8.9.2.2

 

Setting the right outside mirror ........................................................................................... 67

Setting the anti-collision mirror .......................................................................................... 67

8.10

  Inside mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 68  

8.11

  Sun blind .......................................................................................................................................... 68  

 

 

8.12

  Windshield wipers ............................................................................................................................ 69  

8.13

  Washer system – windshield ............................................................................................................ 69  

4

Table of Contents

8.14

  Switch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 70  

8.15

  Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ...................................................................................................... 71  

8.15.1

  Actuating release switches ....................................................................................................... 71  

8.15.2

  Release switch – road/field ....................................................................................................... 72  

8.15.3

  Autopilot release switch / - optional .......................................................................................... 73  

8.15.4

  Release switch - holding brake ................................................................................................. 74  

8.15.5

  Release switch travelling gear .................................................................................................. 75  

8.15.6

  Axle separation key ................................................................................................................... 76  

8.15.7

  Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure ................................................................................................ 77  

8.15.8

  Charge Indicator Lamp ............................................................................................................. 77  

8.15.9

  Pilot Lamp Cooling Water Temperature.................................................................................... 77  

8.15.10

  Ignition lock ............................................................................................................................... 78  

8.15.11

  Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket ................................................................................................... 79  

8.16

  Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) .......................................................................................................... 79  

8.16.1

  Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ...................................................................................... 80  

8.17

  Multi-Function Lever ......................................................................................................................... 81  

8.17.1

  Multi-Function Lever (Continued) .............................................................................................. 83  

8.17.1.1

  Driving ................................................................................................................................ 83  

8.18

  Klimatronik / heating ......................................................................................................................... 84  

8.18.1

  Control and display elements .................................................................................................... 84  

8.18.2

  Operation .................................................................................................................................. 86  

8.18.3

  Switching on the System ........................................................................................................... 86  

8.18.4

  Setting the Desired Cab Temperature ...................................................................................... 86  

8.18.5

  Switch air conditioning On / Off ................................................................................................. 87  

8.18.6

  Switch REHEAT mode On / Off ................................................................................................ 88  

8.18.7

  Manual setting of evaporator fan speed ................................................................................... 89  

8.18.8

  Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit ................................................................. 90  

8.18.9

  Showing Faults in the Display ................................................................................................... 90  

8.19

  Adjustable Fan Nozzles ................................................................................................................... 92  

8.20

  Radio ................................................................................................................................................ 93  

9   Info centre "EasyTouch" ..................................................................................................................... 94  

9.1.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 94  

9.2

  Information Section .......................................................................................................................... 96  

9.2.1

  Status line (I) ............................................................................................................................. 97  

9.2.2

  Motor Data (II) Information Section ........................................................................................... 98  

9.2.3

  Information section of the travelling gear data (III) ................................................................... 99  

9.2.4

  Information section of settings (IV and V) ............................................................................... 100  

9.2.5

  Information Section Drive Information (VI) .............................................................................. 100  

9.3

  Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........................................................................................ 101  

9.3.1

  Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional) .......................................... 101  

9.3.2

  Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional) 103  

9.3.3

  Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“ ................................................................................. 105  

9.3.4

  Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ......................................................... 106  

9.3.4.1

  Switching the counter on or off ........................................................................................ 107  

9.3.4.2

 

9.3.4.3

 

Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter ................................................. 108

Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters)............................................... 109

9.3.5

  Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension" ............................................................................. 110  

9.3.5.1

  From the "Road travel" basic screen ............................................................................... 110  

 

 

5

Table of Contents

9.3.5.2

  From the "Field mode" basic screen ................................................................................ 111  

9.3.6

  Quick access "Machine settings" ............................................................................................ 112  

9.4

  Menu level ...................................................................................................................................... 113  

9.4.1

  Bringing up a Menu Level ....................................................................................................... 117  

9.5

  Main menu 1 "Settings" .................................................................................................................. 118  

9.6

  Menu 1-1 "Parameters" .................................................................................................................. 119  

9.6.1

  Entering parameters................................................................................................................ 120  

9.7

  Menu 1-2 „Machine Setting“ ........................................................................................................... 121  

9.7.1

  Menu 1-3 "Units" ..................................................................................................................... 126  

9.7.2

  Menu 1-4 "Language" ............................................................................................................. 127  

9.7.3

  Menu 1-5 "Display" .................................................................................................................. 128  

9.7.4

  Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" ............................................................................................................. 129  

9.7.5

  Menu 1-5-2 Beeper ................................................................................................................. 130  

9.7.6

  Beeper limited by time ............................................................................................................ 131  

9.7.7

  Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................ 132  

9.7.8

  Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ............................................................................................ 133  

9.7.9

  Menu 1-6 Date/time................................................................................................................. 134  

9.7.10

  Menu 1-9 Owner's address ..................................................................................................... 135  

9.8

  Main Menu 2 Counters ................................................................................................................... 136  

9.8.1

  Machine Data Counter ............................................................................................................ 136  

9.8.1.1

  Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3) .......................................................... 137  

9.8.2

  Switching to Customer DataCounters ..................................................................................... 137  

9.9

  Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 138  

9.9.1

  Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" .................................................................................. 139  

9.10

  Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System ............................................................................ 141  

9.10.1

  Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor .......................................................................................... 142  

9.11

  Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically ................................................................................... 143  

9.11.1

  Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually ................................................................................... 147  

9.12

  Setting the Steering Radius ........................................................................................................... 148  

9.12.1

  Menu 3-5 „Manual Mode“ ........................................................................................................ 149  

9.12.2

  Status display of general sensors (2) ...................................................................................... 152  

9.13

  Main Menu 4 Service ..................................................................................................................... 154  

9.13.1

  Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 155  

9.13.2

  Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics ........................................................................ 158  

9.13.3

  Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension ........................................................................... 159  

9.13.4

  Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation .................................................................... 162  

9.13.5

  Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ............................................................................... 168  

9.13.6

  Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional) ................................................... 176  

9.13.7

  Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional) ............................................................................ 182  

9.13.8

  Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional) ............................................................... 187  

9.13.9

  Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System.................................................................................... 192  

9.13.10

  Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ............................................................................................... 195  

9.13.11

  Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus ............................................................................................................ 206  

9.13.12

  Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ................................................................................................... 207  

9.13.13

  Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ......................................................................................................... 218  

9.13.14

  Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine .................................................................................................... 219  

9.13.15

  Menu 4-1-15 Joystick .............................................................................................................. 222  

9.13.16

  Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console ........................................................................................... 224  

9.13.17

  Menu 4-1-17 Display ............................................................................................................... 227  

6

Table of Contents

9.14

  Menu 4-2 Error list .......................................................................................................................... 228  

9.15

  Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................ 233  

9.16

  Menu 4-4 Information ..................................................................................................................... 234  

9.16.1

  Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ................................................................................................................ 235  

9.16.2

  Menu 4-4-2 Software .............................................................................................................. 236  

9.16.3

  Menu 4-4-3 Machine ............................................................................................................... 238  

9.16.4

  Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages ................................................................................. 239  

9.17

  Menu 5 Basic Screen ..................................................................................................................... 240  

9.17.1

  Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... 241  

9.17.2

  Information message............................................................................................................... 242  

10   Commissioning................................................................................................................................... 243  

10.1

  Fitting the guard cloths ................................................................................................................... 243  

10.2

  Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ............................................................................................... 243  

10.2.1

  Description of Installation ........................................................................................................ 245  

10.2.2

  Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)............................................................................... 246  

10.2.3

  Adjusting the Warning Panel ................................................................................................... 247  

10.3

  Installation of Cutter Blades ........................................................................................................... 247  

10.4

  Checking / Setting the Tyre Pressure ............................................................................................ 248  

11   Start-up ................................................................................................................................................ 249  

11.1

  Check before Start-up .................................................................................................................... 249  

11.2

  Daily checks ................................................................................................................................... 249  

11.2.1

  On the Basic Machine ............................................................................................................. 250  

11.2.2

  On the Mowing Units ............................................................................................................... 250  

12   Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................ 251  

12.1

  Transport / Road Travel ................................................................................................................. 251  

12.2

  Preparation for transport/road travel .............................................................................................. 252  

12.2.1

  Folding Up the Guards ............................................................................................................ 252  

12.2.2

  Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option) ............................ 253  

12.2.3

  Error Message 1414 or 1415 .................................................................................................. 254  

12.2.4

  Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger ..................................................................... 255  

12.2.5

  Release switch – road/field ..................................................................................................... 255  

12.2.6

  Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................ 256  

12.3

  Starting the engine ......................................................................................................................... 257  

12.3.1

  Killing the engine ..................................................................................................................... 259  

12.3.2

  Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ............................................................................................ 259  

12.4

  Starting to Drive .............................................................................................................................. 259  

12.4.1

  Setting the Acceleration Behaviour ......................................................................................... 260  

12.4.2

  General on Driving .................................................................................................................. 260  

12.4.3

  Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic system ............................................................. 261  

12.4.4

  Driving Forwards ..................................................................................................................... 262  

12.4.5

  Reversing ................................................................................................................................ 263  

12.5

  Cruise Control ................................................................................................................................ 264  

12.5.1

  Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode ............................................................................ 264  

12.5.2

  Activating Cruise Control ........................................................................................................ 265  

12.5.3

  Deactivating Cruise Control .................................................................................................... 265  

12.6

  Stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 266  

12.6.1

  Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever ................................................................................... 266  

12.6.2

  Stopping with Foot Brakes ...................................................................................................... 267  

7

Table of Contents

12.7

  Parking Brake ................................................................................................................................. 268  

12.8

  Switching Off the Engine ................................................................................................................ 269  

12.9

  Switch off the machine ................................................................................................................... 269  

12.10

  Towing ............................................................................................................................................ 270  

12.10.1

  Releasing the holding brake manually .................................................................................... 270  

13   Operation – Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 271  

13.1

  Intended use ................................................................................................................................... 271  

13.2

  Reasonably foreseeable misuse .................................................................................................... 271  

13.3

  Operation of Mowing Units ............................................................................................................. 272  

13.4

  Folding Down the Mowing Units ..................................................................................................... 273  

13.4.1

  Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position ....... 274  

13.4.2

  Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position 274  

13.5

  Lowering Mowing Units .................................................................................................................. 275  

13.5.1

  Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position ............................ 275  

13.5.2

  Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working Position275  

13.5.3

  Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position ............................... 276  

13.6

  Mowing Unit Drive .......................................................................................................................... 277  

13.6.1

  Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................... 278  

13.6.2

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 278  

13.6.3

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 279  

13.6.4

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front ........................................................... 280  

13.6.5

  Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................. 281  

13.7

  Lifting the Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 282  

13.7.1

  Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position ................................. 282  

13.7.2

  Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position ... 283  

13.7.3

  Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position .................................... 283  

13.8

  Folding up the Mowing Units .......................................................................................................... 284  

13.8.1

  Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position 285  

13.8.2

  Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to Transport

Position 285  

13.9

  Mowing ........................................................................................................................................... 286  

13.10

  Game animal protection ................................................................................................................. 287  

13.10.1

  Moving the guards into the working position ........................................................................... 288  

13.10.2

  Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ..................................................................................... 288  

13.10.3

  Quick Stop ............................................................................................................................... 289  

13.10.4

  Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)................................................................................. 289  

13.10.5

  Switching Axle Separation On and Off .................................................................................... 290  

13.11

  Removing the Ground Flaps .......................................................................................................... 291  

14   Adjusting the mowing units .............................................................................................................. 292  

14.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 292  

14.2

  Adjusting the cutting height ............................................................................................................ 293  

14.2.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 293  

14.2.2

  Adjusting the Lifting Height ..................................................................................................... 294  

14.2.2.1

  Front mowing unit ............................................................................................................ 294  

14.2.3

  Adjusting the cutting height ..................................................................................................... 295  

14.2.3.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ......................................................................................................... 295  

14.3

  Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............................................................................................. 297  

8

Table of Contents

14.3.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 298  

14.3.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 299  

14.4

  Adjusting the Tedder Speed ........................................................................................................... 300  

14.4.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 300  

14.4.2

  Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 301  

14.5

  Adjusting the conditioner plate ....................................................................................................... 302  

14.6

  Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI) ........................................................... 303  

14.6.1

  Adjusting the roller distance .................................................................................................... 303  

14.6.2

  Adjusting the roller pressure ................................................................................................... 304  

14.7

  Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional) .............................................................. 305  

14.8

  Adjusting the swath width ............................................................................................................... 306  

14.8.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 306  

14.8.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 307  

14.9

  Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units .......................................................... 308  

14.10

  Deflector Plates .............................................................................................................................. 308  

14.10.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 308  

14.11

  Deactivating the axle suspension ................................................................................................... 309  

15   Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................................................................................................. 310  

15.1

  Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ................................... 310  

15.1.1

  Removing the tedder deflector plate ....................................................................................... 311  

15.1.2

  Releasing the tension jacks .................................................................................................... 311  

15.1.3

  Removing the tedder deflector plate ....................................................................................... 312  

15.1.4

  Checking the Tines ................................................................................................................. 313  

15.1.5

  Removing the guard ................................................................................................................ 313  

15.1.6

  Installing the auger-type cross conveyor ................................................................................ 314  

15.1.7

  Locking the tension jacks ........................................................................................................ 315  

15.2

  Tensioning the V-belts ................................................................................................................... 315  

15.2.1

  Installing the guard .................................................................................................................. 316  

15.2.2

  Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics ............................................................................. 316  

15.2.3

  Relaying the Lubrication Lines ................................................................................................ 317  

15.2.4

  Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS .......................... 317  

15.2.5

  Switching on the auger monitoring mode ............................................................................... 318  

15.2.6

  Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit" ...................... 320  

15.3

  Additional Equipment – Mulching Device ....................................................................................... 321  

15.4

  Removing Mowing Units ................................................................................................................ 322  

15.4.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 322  

15.4.2

  Removing of the compensation springs .................................................................................. 323  

15.4.3

  To remove the PTO shaft: ....................................................................................................... 324  

15.4.4

  Remove the Weiste Triangle ................................................................................................... 325  

15.4.5

  Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 326  

15.4.6

  Removing the Side Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 327  

15.4.7

  Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .......................................................................................... 332  

15.4.8

  The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure. .................... 334  

16   Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................ 335  

16.1.1

  Overview of motor ................................................................................................................... 335  

16.2

  Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt ...................................................................................... 335  

16.3

  Maintenance Table – Engine ......................................................................................................... 337  

16.4

  Contamination in the engine compartment .................................................................................... 339  

16.5

  Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air.............................................................. 339  

9

Table of Contents

16.6

  Engine oil level ............................................................................................................................... 340  

16.6.1

  Engine oil and filter replacement ............................................................................................. 340  

16.7

  Fuel filter/water separator .............................................................................................................. 341  

16.7.1

  Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter .................................................................................................. 341  

16.7.2

  Emptying the Water Separator ................................................................................................ 341  

16.8

  Replacing the fuel filter insert ......................................................................................................... 342  

16.8.1

  Replacing the filter in the hand pump ..................................................................................... 343  

16.9

  Replacing Urea Filter Inserts .......................................................................................................... 344  

16.10

  Fuel ................................................................................................................................................ 346  

16.10.1

  Permissible Fuels .................................................................................................................... 346  

16.11

  Tanks .............................................................................................................................................. 347  

16.12

  Tanks of urea solution .................................................................................................................... 348  

16.13

  Venting the fuel system .................................................................................................................. 350  

16.14

  Engine Coolant ............................................................................................................................... 350  

16.15

  Engine coolant – checks and controls............................................................................................ 351  

16.16

  Air filter ........................................................................................................................................... 352  

16.16.1

  Safety cartridge ....................................................................................................................... 353  

17   Maintenance – compressed air system ........................................................................................... 354  

17.1

  Compressed-air reservoir ............................................................................................................... 354  

17.1.1

  Checking the compressed air reservoir .................................................................................. 354  

17.1.2

  Checking the drain valve ......................................................................................................... 355  

17.1.3

  Retighten tensioning belts ....................................................................................................... 355  

17.2

  Replace Air Dryer ........................................................................................................................... 355  

18   Maintenance – Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 356  

18.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 356  

18.1.1

  Test run ................................................................................................................................... 357  

18.2

  Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................... 357  

18.3

  Tool box .......................................................................................................................................... 357  

18.4

  Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ............................................................................................... 358  

18.5

  Tightening Torques ........................................................................................................................ 359  

18.6

  Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ................................................................................... 360  

18.6.1

  Deviating Torque ..................................................................................................................... 360  

18.7

  Opening the Front Guard ............................................................................................................... 361  

18.7.1

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................. 361  

18.7.2

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 362  

18.8

  Cleaning the Tedder Housing ........................................................................................................ 363  

18.9

  Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor .............................................................................. 364  

18.10

  Shear pins on the conditioner ........................................................................................................ 365  

18.11

  Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes ..................................................... 366  

18.11.1

  Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes) ......................................................... 366  

18.12

  Main gearbox .................................................................................................................................. 367  

18.12.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 367  

18.13

  Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 368  

18.13.1

  Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) .................................................................................................. 368  

18.14

  Input gearbox ................................................................................................................................. 369  

18.14.1

  Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) .................................................................................................. 369  

18.15

  Speed gearbox ............................................................................................................................... 370  

18.15.1

  Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 370  

18.16

  Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 371  

10

Table of Contents

18.16.1

  Bottom part .............................................................................................................................. 371  

18.17

  Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ......................................................................................................... 372  

18.18

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 373  

18.18.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 373  

18.18.2

  Aligning the Cutter Bar ............................................................................................................ 373  

18.18.3

  Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 374  

18.18.4

  Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 375  

18.19

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 376  

18.19.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 376  

18.19.2

  Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 376  

18.19.3

  Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 377  

18.20

  Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder .............................................................................. 378  

18.20.1

  Cutter Blades .......................................................................................................................... 378  

18.20.2

  Blade screw connection .......................................................................................................... 379  

18.20.3

  Blade Quick-Fit Device ........................................................................................................... 380  

18.20.4

  Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ............................................................................... 381  

18.20.5

  Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums ....................................................... 382  

18.20.6

  Abrasion Limit ......................................................................................................................... 383  

18.21

  Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .................................................................................................. 384  

18.21.1

  Blade Screw Connection ......................................................................................................... 385  

18.21.2

  Blade Quick-Fit Device ........................................................................................................... 386  

18.22

  Replacing the linings ...................................................................................................................... 387  

18.23

  Rotary hub with shear protection ................................................................................................... 388  

18.23.1

  After Shearing Off ................................................................................................................... 389  

18.23.2

  Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit ................................................................................. 390  

19   Maintenance – Basic Machine ........................................................................................................... 391  

19.1

  Brakes ............................................................................................................................................ 391  

19.2

  Hydraulic system ............................................................................................................................ 392  

19.3

  Maintenance - hydraulic system ..................................................................................................... 395  

19.3.1

  System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics ............................................................. 395  

19.3.2

  Pumps ..................................................................................................................................... 395  

19.3.3

  Main block ............................................................................................................................... 396  

19.3.4

  Over-pressure valves .............................................................................................................. 397  

19.3.5

  Adjustable Throttles ................................................................................................................ 397  

19.4

  Hydraulic oil .................................................................................................................................... 398  

19.5

  Hydraulic oil level ........................................................................................................................... 399  

19.6

  Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ..................................................................................................... 400  

19.7

  High-pressure filter ......................................................................................................................... 401  

19.8

  Transfer gearbox ............................................................................................................................ 402  

19.9

  Air intake and distribution ............................................................................................................... 403  

19.9.1

  Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter .................................................................................... 404  

19.9.2

  Circulation filter ....................................................................................................................... 405  

19.10

  Windscreen washer system ........................................................................................................... 406  

19.11

  Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator ...................................................................... 407  

19.12

  Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side) .................................................................................. 408  

19.13

  Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side) ............................................................................... 410  

19.13.1

  Adjusting the Sensors ............................................................................................................. 412  

19.13.1.1

  Namur sensor d = 12 mm ................................................................................................ 412  

19.13.1.2

  Namur Sensor d = 30 mm ................................................................................................ 412  

11

Table of Contents

19.14

  Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating ....................................................................... 413  

19.15

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 413  

19.15.1

  Air conditioning components ................................................................................................... 413  

19.15.2

  Refrigerant .............................................................................................................................. 414  

19.15.3

  Manometric Switch .................................................................................................................. 414  

19.15.4

  Collector/drier .......................................................................................................................... 415  

19.15.5

  Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity .............................................................. 416  

19.16

  Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment .................................................................. 417  

19.17

  Belt drives ....................................................................................................................................... 418  

19.17.1

  Fan wheel drive ....................................................................................................................... 419  

19.17.2

  Outrigger arms ........................................................................................................................ 420  

19.17.3

  Drive of mowing unit ................................................................................................................ 422  

19.17.4

  Cross Conveyor Drive ............................................................................................................. 423  

19.17.5

  Checking/ tensioning/ replacing belt drive for conditioner ...................................................... 424  

19.18

  Tyres .............................................................................................................................................. 425  

19.19

  Changing the Tyre Size .................................................................................................................. 425  

19.19.1

  Checking and maintaining tyres .............................................................................................. 426  

19.19.2

  Wheel mounting ...................................................................................................................... 427  

19.19.3

  Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger .............................................................. 427  

20   Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................................................................................................... 428  

20.1

  Lubricating the PTO shaft .............................................................................................................. 428  

20.2

  Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox ........................................................................ 428  

20.3

  Lubrication Chart ............................................................................................................................ 429  

21   Maintenance – electrical system ....................................................................................................... 430  

21.1

  Electrical equipment - technical data ............................................................................................. 430  

21.2

  Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 431  

21.2.1

  Main battery switch ................................................................................................................. 432  

21.2.2

  Charging Batteries .................................................................................................................. 433  

21.2.3

  Quick charge ........................................................................................................................... 433  

21.2.4

  Cleaning the battery ................................................................................................................ 433  

21.2.5

  Check battery .......................................................................................................................... 434  

21.2.6

  Check acid level ...................................................................................................................... 434  

21.2.7

  Measuring Acid Density .......................................................................................................... 435  

21.3

  Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ................................................................. 436  

21.4

  Three-phase generator .................................................................................................................. 437  

21.5

  Starter ............................................................................................................................................. 438  

21.6

  Control units and fuses .................................................................................................................. 439  

21.6.1

  Electronic-Diesel-Control (EDC) ............................................................................................. 440  

21.6.2

  Cab relay PCB ........................................................................................................................ 440  

21.6.3

  Console Circuit Board ............................................................................................................. 441  

21.6.4

  Cabin Circuit Board ................................................................................................................. 442  

21.6.5

  Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1) ..................................................................... 443  

22   Maintenance – Central Lubrication................................................................................................... 444  

22.1

  Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 444  

22.2

  Lubricant filling ............................................................................................................................... 448  

22.3

  Fill coupling .................................................................................................................................... 448  

22.4

  Lubricant ......................................................................................................................................... 449  

22.4.1

  Grease types, NLGIClass 2 .................................................................................................... 450  

12

Table of Contents

22.5

  Checking the fill level...................................................................................................................... 451  

22.6

  Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval ................................................................................ 452  

22.7

  Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 452  

23   Placing in Storage .............................................................................................................................. 454  

23.1

  At the End of the Harvest Season .................................................................................................. 454  

23.2

  Engine area .................................................................................................................................... 454  

23.3

  Before the Start of the New Season ............................................................................................... 455  

23.4

  Friction clutch –ByPy ...................................................................................................................... 456  

23.4.1

  Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft ......................................................................... 456  

24   Disposal of the machine .................................................................................................................... 457  

24.1

  Disposal of the machine ................................................................................................................. 457  

25   Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 457  

25.1

  Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 457  

26   Index .................................................................................................................................................... 458  

Pos: 5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

13

Foreword

Pos: 6.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Vorwort @ 0\mod_1195627720123_78.docx @ 982 @ 1 @ 1

2 Foreword

Pos: 6.2 /BA/Vorwort/Selbstfahrer/Verehrter Kunde BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286950176328_78.docx @ 463747 @ @ 1

Dear Customer

On buying the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner BiG M 420 you have selected a quality product from KRONE.

We are grateful for the confidence you have invested in us in buying this machine.

It is important to read the operating instructions very carefully before you start operating the machine so that the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner BiG M 420 may be used to its maximum capacity.

The contents of this manual are laid out in such a way that you should be able to perform any task by following the instructions step by step. It contains extensive notes and information about maintenance, how to use the machine safely, secure working methods, special precautionary measures and available accessories. It is essential, important and useful for the operational safety, reliability and durability of the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner

BiG M 420, that these notes and information are adhered to.

Pos: 6.3 /BA/Vorwort/Selbstfahrer/Weiteren Verlauf Big M @ 0\mod_1195627075279_78.docx @ 963 @ @ 1

Note

Throughout the remainder of these operating instructions, the "Self-Propelled High

Performance Mowing Conditioner "BiG M" will also be referred to as the "machine / vehicle".

Pos: 6.4 /BA/Vorwort/Beachten Sie für Maschine @ 0\mod_1195626904076_78.docx @ 944 @ @ 1

Please note:

The operating instructions are part of your machine.

Only operate this machine after you have been trained to do so and according to these instructions.

It is essential to observe the safety instructions!

It is also necessary to observe the relevant accident prevention regulations and other generally recognised regulations concerning safety, occupational health and road traffic.

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Should you for any reason not be able to use these operating instructions either wholly or partially, you can receive a replacement set of operating instructions for your machine by quoting the number supplied overleaf.

We hope that you will be satisfied with your KRONE machine.

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Spelle

Pos: 7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

14

Pos: 8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Zu diesem Dokument @ 107\mod_1334231929021_78.docx @ 965257 @ 1 @ 1

3

Pos: 9 /BA/Einleitung/Gültigkeit/Selbsfahrer/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286949685156_78.docx @ 463695 @ 1 @ 1

To this Document

To this Document

3.1 Validity

The Operating Instructions apply to all Self-Propelled High Performance Mowing Conditioners

BiG M 420.

Pos: 10 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Richtungsangaben_mit Überschrift 3. Ebene @ 110\mod_1336024650492_78.docx @ 979274 @ 2 @ 1

Direction information in these operating instructions such as front, rear, right and left always applies in direction of travel.

Pos: 11 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Kennzeichnung von Hinweisen in der Betriebsanleitung Einführungstext (2012-07-27 09:59:06) @ 0\mod_1195637804826_78.docx @ 1098 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions

The safety instructions contained in this manual which could result in personal injury if not followed are identified by the general danger sign:

Pos: 12 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Kennzeichnung der Gefahrenhinweise (2012-07-26 15:10:30) @ 28\mod_1250244370070_78.docx @ 274714 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 Identification of the hazard warnings

Danger!

DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Measures for hazard prevention

Warning !

WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.

• Measures for hazard prevention

Caution!

CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Property damage

• Measures for risk prevention.

Pos: 13 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Allgemeine Funktionshinweise (2012-07-26 15:24:39) @ 0\mod_1196869714452_78.docx @ 15185 @ @ 1

General function instructions are indicated as follows:

Note!

Note - Type and source of the note

Effect: Economic advantage of the machine

• Actions to be taken

Instructions which are attached to the machine need to be followed and kept fully legible.

Pos: 14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

15

Safety

Pos: 15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.docx @ 635 @ 2 @ 1

4 Safety

Pos: 16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

4.1 Intended use

Pos: 17 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 18 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.doc x @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

16

Pos: 20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Vernüftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

4.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 21 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Vernünftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung T1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 22 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Auflistung von Fehlanwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 23 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

17

Safety

Pos: 25.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Personalqualifikation und -schulung @ 0\mod_1195639383185_78.docx @ 1136 @ 3 @ 1

4.2.1 Personnel Qualification and Training

The machine may be used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are familiar with it and have been instructed about the dangers connected with it. The operator must define areas of responsibility and monitoring of personnel. Should personnel lack the required knowledge, they must receive the required training and instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents of these operating instructions have been fully understood by personnel.

Pos: 25.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahren bei Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1195639434013_78.docx @ 1155 @ 2 @ 1

Repair work not described in these operating instructions should only be performed by authorised service centres.

4.2.2 Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions

Pos: 25.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheitsbewusstes Arbeiten_Teil1 @ 0\mod_1195639792576_78.docx @ 1174 @ 2 @ 1

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in personal injury and environmental hazards as well as damage to the machine. If the safety instructions are not respected, this could result in the forfeiture of any claims for damages.

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result, for example , in the following hazards:

• Endangering of persons due to not protected working areas.

• Breakdown of important machine functions

• Failure of prescribed methods for repair and maintenance

• Endangering of persons due to mechanical and chemical effects

• Damage to the environment due to leaking hydraulic oil

Pos: 25.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Always observe the safety instructions set out in these operating instructions, all existing accident prevention rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules issued by the operator.

The safety and accident prevention regulations of the responsible professional associations are binding.

The safety instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer should also be observed.

Observe the applicable traffic laws when using public roads.

Be prepared for emergencies. Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within reach. Keep emergency numbers for doctors and fire brigade close to the telephone.

18

Pos: 25.5 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften für Selbstfahrtechnik @ 119\mod_1342170457112_78.docx @ 1071585 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

4.3 Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations

1 Please follow all generally applicable safety and accident prevention regulations in addition to the safety instructions contained in these operating instructions!

2 The attached warning and safety signs provide important information for safe operation. Pay attention to these for your own safety!

3 When using public roads, make sure to observe the applicable traffic regulations!

4 Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment and controls as well as with their functions before you begin working with the machine. It is too late to learn this when you are using the machine for work!

5 The user should wear close fitting clothes. Avoid wearing loose or baggy clothing.

6 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire!

7 Before starting or moving the machine, make certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the machine! (Watch for children!) Make sure that you have a clear view!

8 Couple implements correctly! Attach and secure implements to specified devices only!

9 When attaching or detaching implements, place the supporting devices in the correct positions!

10 Always attach ballast weights properly to the fixing points provided!

11 Observe permitted axle loads, gross weight and transport dimensions!

12 Check and install transport equipment, such as lighting, warning devices and protective equipment!

13 Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, linkage, etc.) for remotely operated devices must be designed in such a way that, in whatever transport and working position, they cannot trigger accidental movements.

14 Ensure that implements are in the prescribed condition for on-road travel and lock them in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions!

15 Never leave the driver's seat when the vehicle is moving!

16 Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in direction when travelling uphill or downhill or across a gradient!

17 Hitched implements and ballast weights affect the driving, steering and braking response of the machine. Make sure that you are able to brake and steer the machine as required!

18 Take into account the extension radius and/or inertia of an implement when turning corners!

19 Start up implements only when all safety devices have been attached and set in the required position!

20 Keep safety equipment in good condition. Replace missing or damaged parts.

21 Keep clear of the working range of the machine at all times!

22 Never operate the hydraulic folding frames if anyone is inside the swivel range!

23 Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulically) can cause crushing and shearing injuries!

24 Do not stand within the turning and swivel range of the implement!

Pos: 25.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften BiG M 400/420/500 Zusatz @ 119\mod_1342170562046_78.docx @ 1071934 @ @ 1

25 Before leaving the mower, lower the front mower onto the ground, firmly step on the parking brake pedal. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key!

26 No one should stand between the mower and the implement unless the vehicle has been secured against rolling by means of the parking brake and/or wheel chocks!

27 Caution: When the front mower P.T.O shaft has been removed, the drive shaft at the front of the machine continues to turn if the engine is running.

Pos: 25.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

19

Safety

Pos: 25.8 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitz / Personenbeförderung @ 45\mod_1276767521968_78.docx @ 408886 @ 2 @ 1

4.4 Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel

1 Only persons who are guiding the driver or directing the machine may be conveyed on the guide's seat

Pos: 25.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Selbstfahrende Arbeitsmaschine @ 120\mod_1343031911873_78.docx @ 1095434 @ 2 @ 1

2 Persons are not permitted to ride as passengers

4.5

Pos: 25.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Self-propelled working machine

1

The warning flashers and warning beacon must be used in accordance with local traffic laws when using public highways.

2

Switch on the lighting so that the vehicle can be easily recognised.

3

The machine must not be taken into operation if the safety equipment is not functioning.

4

Always check the machine for driving and operational safety before use.

5

Hold the hand-grip firmly when climbing in and out of the mower.

6

It is not permitted to transport people on the platform.

7

The road safety switch must be in road position during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic functions - except for the steering and brakes – are deactivated.

8

Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.

9

Implements must be in transport position and locked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for road travel.

10

If the engine is running in an enclosed space, divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient ventilation.

11

When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of batteries and electrical cables.

20

Pos: 25.11 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Autopilot @ 0\mod_1195646567591_78.docx @ 1384 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

4.6 Autopilot

1

Autopilot must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off public and semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and far away from any persons that could be endangered. They must only be used for their intended purpose: - Automatic guide of the machine by GPS (Global Positioning System).

2

Before placing the autopilot in service, check the functionality of safety elements that can be checked and make a visual inspection of all the components.

To do this, the user should proceed as follows:

• Check switching off of the autopilot when the steering wheel is moved and the seat switch engages

• Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of mechanical damages and leaks

3

When autopilot is in operation, there must be on one within 50 m of the machine in any direction.

4

The operator is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while autopilot is in operation.

5

While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the machine immediately if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.

6

After autopilot has been in operation and before leaving the field, autopilot must always be switched off on the autopilot release switch on the console.

7

Manipulating safety-related elements of the autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.

8

The autopilot should only be installed by an authorised service centre.

Pos: 25.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

21

Safety

Pos: 25.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeitsgeräte @ 0\mod_1195643623216_78.docx @ 1270 @ 2 @ 1

4.7 Implements

1 Caution! The flywheel will continue to rotate for some time even after the drive has been disengaged! Keep away from the implement during this time. Do not work on the machine until it has come to a standstill.

2 Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements must be carried out only when the drive is switched off, the engine switched off and the ignition key removed!

Pos: 25.14 /BA/Sicherheit/Hydraulikanlage Mähaufbereiter (BiG M400 / BiG M500) @ 38\mod_1265362557136_78.docx @ 348614 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 25.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 The hydraulic system is pressurised!

2 When connecting hydraulic cylinders and engines, make sure that the hydraulic hoses are connected correctly!

3 When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the mower-conditioner hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic system is depressurised both on the tractor side and on the device side!

4 When functions are connected hydraulically between the mower-conditioner and the accessory equipment, connecting parts should be identified so that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g. raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!

5 Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!

The new hoses must fulfil the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implement!

6 When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury!

7 Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil) can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection!

8 Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and switch off the engine!

22

Pos: 25.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Batterie @ 0\mod_1195646320763_78.docx @ 1308 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

4.9 Battery

1 Maintenance work on the batteries requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

2 Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark sources clear of the battery; Risk of explosion!

3 Never check the charging level of the battery by connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use an acid tester or voltmeter.

4 Do not charge a frozen battery; Risk of explosion ! Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.

5 Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable protective clothing.

Pos: 25.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Kühlsystem @ 0\mod_1195646385154_78.docx @ 1327 @ 2 @ 1

4.10 Cooling system

The heated cooling system is pressurised – Risk of burns ! - For this reason, only remove the radiator cap with the engine switched off and after the engine has been able to cool.

Pos: 25.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

4.11 Tyres

Pos: 25.19 /BA/Sicherheit/Reifen @ 0\mod_1195646435716_78.docx @ 1346 @ @ 1

1

When working on the tyres, make sure that the implement is safely lowered and secured against rolling (wheel chocks).

2

Installing wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and suitable tools!

3

Repair work on the tyres and wheels should be done by specially trained personnel using appropriate installation tools only!

4

Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressures!

5

Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the machine tipping over.

Pos: 25.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Notausstieg @ 0\mod_1195646495279_78.docx @ 1365 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 25.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for being an emergency exit. In case of an emergency the cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this, the right hand side window must be manually unlocked before opening.

23

Safety

Pos: 25.22 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeiten im Bereich von Hochspannungsleitungen @ 11\mod_1223357468516_78.docx @ 145505 @ 2 @ 1

4.13 Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

1

Always take great care when working under or in the vicinity of power transmission lines.

2

Ensure that when in operation or being transported, the machine cannot exceed a total height of approx. 4m.

3

If there is any need to travel under overhead lines, the machine operator must request information on the rated voltage and the minimum height of the overhead lines from the overhead line operator.

4

Always keep the safety distances according to the table.

Rated voltage kV

Safe distance from overhead lines m

To 1

Above 1 to 110

Above 101 to 220

Above 220 to 380

1

2

3

4

Pos: 25.23 /BA/Sicherheit/Brandschutzmaßnahmen @ 0\mod_1195646926716_78.docx @ 1423 @ 3 @ 1

4.14 Fire preventions

Pos: 25.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire! In particular, remove any crop wound around rotating parts.

2 The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard. Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

3 The fire hazard can be reduced by removing accumulated crop from the machine several times a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and checking the machine components for overheating. Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective action. Heed the lubricating instructions.

4 Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.

5 Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine, the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo charger, and remove crop residues.

6 Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.

24

Pos: 25.25 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Wartung Mäher mit Gasspeicher+ Auswechseln von Arbeitswerkzeugen @ 0\mod_1195647075607_78.docx @ 1442 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

4.15 Maintenance

Pos: 25.26 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Telefon und Funkgeräte @ 0\mod_1195647114060_78.docx @ 1461 @ 3 @ 1

1 Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning! - Remove the ignition key!

2 Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly seated and tighten if necessary!

3 When carrying out maintenance work on a raised mowing unit, always use suitable means to secure it against falling.

4 When replacing working tools with cutting edges, use suitable tools and gloves!

5 Oils, greases and filters must be disposed of correctly!

6 Always disconnect the power supply before working on the electrical system!

7 If protective devices and guards are subject to wear, check them regularly and replace them in good time!

8 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and mounted devices, turn the power supply off at main battery switch or disconnect generator cable and battery!

9 Replacement parts must at least comply with the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implements! This is guaranteed by original KRONE spare parts!

10 Only use nitrogen for filling pneumatic accumulators - risk of explosion!

4.16 Telephone and radio sets

Pos: 25.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterlegkeile @ 33\mod_1254202555660_78.docx @ 318451 @ 3 @ 1

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

4.16.1

Pos: 25.28 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Bild @ 80\mod_1315489626538_78.docx @ 706258 @ @ 1

Wheel chocks

1

BM 420 0021_1

Pos: 25.29 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Text @ 80\mod_1315489430312_78.docx @ 706230 @ @ 1

Fig.1

• The machine features 2 wheel chocks

• The wheel chocks (1) are located in direction of travel front left behind the platform

• The wheel chocks must always be carried along

• When parking the machine, always secure it against rolling with both wheel chocks

• Fold the wheel chocks open completely and place them as close as possible to the wheels in that a way that the machine cannot roll away

Pos: 26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

25

Safety

Pos: 27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie-Hauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

4.16.2 Main battery switch

Pos: 28 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung – Motorschaden: Den Batterie-Hauptschalter nicht bei laufendem Motor betätigen @ 143\mod_1358842910718_78.docx @ 1278679 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Engine damage!

• Do not switch off the main battery switch with the engine running.

Pos: 29 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 420 Bild @ 181\mod_1376916948734_78.docx @ 1551316 @ @ 1

1.

2.

27 004 518 1

Fig. 2

1) Main battery switch 0) Electrical power circuit interrupted

I) Electrical power circuit turned on

Pos: 30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Text @ 181\mod_1376922926269_78.docx @ 1552088 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel.

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs.

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

Pos: 31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

26

Pos: 32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Maschinenbeschreibung @ 107\mod_1334231806004_78.docx @ 965201 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 33 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Maschinenübersicht @ 0\mod_1195565731130_78.docx @ 555 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 34 /BA/Maschinenbeschreibung/Maschinenübersicht/Selbstfahrer/Maschinenübersicht BiG M 420 @ 57\mod_1295849441968_78.docx @ 547515 @ @ 1

11

10

9 8 7

Machine Description

12

1 2

Fig.3

1 Lateral mowing unit right

3 Right outrigger arm

3

Pos: 35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

7 Front mowing unit

9 Lateral mowing unit left

11 Left outrigger arm

13 Cab

13

5 6

4

BM 420 0036

2 Operating panel

4 Engine

8 Work hydraulics valves

10 Main battery switch

12 Shut-off valve for front outrigger

27

Machine Description

Pos: 36 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kennzeichnung @ 0\mod_1195564622099_78.docx @ 496 @ 2 @ 1

5.2

Pos: 37 /BA/Einleitung/Kennzeichnung/BiG M/Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1319782902906_78.docx @ 739914 @ @ 1

Identification Plate

1

BM 420 0059

Fig. 4

The machine data are located on a nameplate (1). It is located on the lower right side of the machine on the front of the frame.

Pos: 38 /BA/Einleitung/Kennzeichnung/Angaben für Anfrage und Bestellungen_Fahrzeugident-Nr. @ 0\mod_1195565119708_78.docx @ 515 @ 2 @ 1

5.3 Information Required for Questions and Orders

Pos: 39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Ansprechpartner @ 0\mod_1195569394286_78.docx @ 839 @ 3 @ 1

Type

Year of manufacture

Vehicle ID number

Note

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type designation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture : To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.

Note

Authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensure safety. The use of spare parts, accessories and other devices which are not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will result in the revoking of the liability for damages resulting thereof.

5.3.1 Contact

Pos: 40 /BA/Adressen/Adresse Maschinenfabrik KRONE Spelle @ 0\mod_1195568531083_78.docx @ 734 @ @ 1

Pos: 41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Strasse 10

D-48480 Spelle (Germany)

Telephone: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-339 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-239 (Spare parts - domestic)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359 (Spare parts - export)

Email: [email protected]

28

Pos: 42 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.docx @ 635 @ 3 @ 1

6 Safety

Pos: 43 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Sicherheit Einführung Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1319723128935_78.docx @ 739807 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

6.1 Introduction

Pos: 44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The BiG M 420 Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner is equipped with all the necessary safety devices (protective devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate all potential hazards on this machine as this would impair its full functional capability. Hazard warnings are attached to the machine in the relevant areas to warn against any dangers. The safety instructions are provided in the form of so-called warning pictograms. Important information on the position of these safety signs and what they mean is given below!

29

Safety

Pos: 45 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der Sicherheitsaufkleber an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1195634967326_78.docx @ 1020 @ 1 @ 1

6.2 Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine

Pos: 46 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_1231774361478_78.docx @ 172491 @ 2 @ 1

6.2.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“

Pos: 47 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grundmaschine Front Heck Big M 420 @ 184\mod_1378818875019_78.docx @ 1581143 @ @ 1

3 1 2

30

4

4

BM 420 0054

Fig. 5

1) 2)

Before performing maintenance and repair work, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Order no. 942 289-0 (1x)

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against accidentally rolling away.

Order no. 942 250-0 (1x)

3)

Pos: 48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Keep the stipulated safety distance from power transmission lines.

Order no. 942 293-0 (1x)

4)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order no. 942 196-1 (2x)

Safety

942 196 -1

31

Safety

Pos: 49 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "linke und rechte Maschinenseite" @ 14\mod_1231774462634_78.docx @ 172514 @ 2 @ 1

6.2.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”

Pos: 50 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grundmaschine rechte/links Seite Big M 420 @ 184\mod_1378820342468_78.docx @ 1581381 @ @ 1

3

6

2

1 2 7 3

4

5

6

5

5

32

Fig. 6

5

BM 420 0055_2

1)

Before starting the machine, read and follow the operating instructions and safety instructions.

Order no. 939 471-1 (1x)

3)

2)

Do not stand within the swivel range.

Order no. 939 469-1 (2x)

5)

The accumulator is subject to gas and oil pressure. Disassembly and repair in strict accordance with the instructions in the technical handbook.

Order no. 939 529-0 (4x)

7)

Danger of burns!

Hot surface, keep sufficient distance.

Order no. 942 210-0 (1x)

6)

When making repairs

(welding work), always switch off the engine.

Disconnect the main battery switch and remove both cable plugs from the

PLD control unit on the engine.

Order no. 942 405-0 (2x)

Safety

Passengers are not permitted to ride on ladder steps or platforms.

Order no. 942 291-0 (2x)

4)

Pos: 51 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against unintended rolling.

Order no. 942 250-0 (1x)

33

Safety

Pos: 52 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 2 @ 1

6.2.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 53 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Seitenmähwerke Big M 420_Europa @ 86\mod_1319708993562_78.docx @ 739610 @ @ 1

1

4

4 1

1

5 3 3 5

1

34

5 4

Fig. 7

2 3

3 2 4 5

BM 420 0056

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (4x)

2)

When the engine is in operation, keep your distance.

Order No. 942 197-1 (2x)

STOP

939 410 2

939 572-0

3)

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

Order No. 939 410-2 (4x)

Safety

942 197-1

Pos: 54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (4x)

942 196 -1

5)

Danger due to rotating shaft.

Order No. 939 520-1 (2x)

(with auger - option (4x))

939 520-1

35

Safety

Pos: 55 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 2 @ 1

6.2.4 Front mowing unit

Pos: 56 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 57 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Frontmähwerk Big M 420_Europa @ 87\mod_1320825558361_78.docx @ 747465 @ @ 1

1

1

1

2

Pos: 58 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 8

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (3x)

2)

With hydraulic front guard flap option:

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (2x)

942 196 -1

STOP

939 410 2

939 572-0

2

BM 420 0057_1

942 197-1

36

Pos: 59 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 60 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/CRi/Sicherheitsaufkleber Frontmähwerk(CRI) Big M 420_Europa @ 141\mod_1355826629332_78.docx @ 1254824 @ @ 1

Safety

1

1

1

2

Pos: 61 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 9

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the safety devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order no. 939 576-0 (3x)

2)

For the hydraulic front guard flaps option:

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order no. 942 196-1 (2x)

942 196 -1

STOP

939 410 2

939 572-0 a) b) c)

2

BM420CRi004

942 197-1

37

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Technische Daten der Maschine @ 134\mod_1351154219999_78.docx @ 1195165 @ 1 @ 1

7

Pos: 62.2 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Technische Daten mit 2. Überschrift @ 0\mod_1195566374865_78.docx @ 594 @ 1 @ 1

Technical Data of the Machine

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication. We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Pos: 62.3 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Grundmaße Fahrzeug Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 140\mod_1355220777826_78.docx @ 1246434 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Basic dimensions

Transport width

Transport length

Transport height

3000 mm

8165 mm

4000 mm

10.000 kg - front / 6.000 kg - rear Weight distribution

Pos: 62.4 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Motor MAN BiG M 420 @ 137\mod_1353424868486_78.docx @ 1217166 @ @ 1

Engine

Engine manufacturer

Engine type

Design

Emission level

Power (ECE R120)

Cooling system

Combustion method

MAN

D 2066 LE 121

6 cylinders in row

IIIb (EU)

311 kW (423 HP)

Liquid cooling

Common Rail injection

Engine speed

Starter

Three-phase generator

Pos: 62.5 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Fahrantrieb Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 137\mod_1353481050673_78.docx @ 1217255 @ @ 1

Travelling gear

Type road operation field mode

850 – 1650 rpm

1900 rpm

24 V; 5.5 kW

14 V; 270 A

Pos: 62.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Working speed

Transport speed

Continuous hydraulic drive with rotary piston motors

0 to 20 km/h

0 to 40 km/h

All-wheel Standard

Axle separation Standard

38

Pos: 62.7 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Achsen Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358417808790_78.docx @ 1273931 @ @ 1

Axles

Steering angle

Steering

Suspension front axle

Pos: 62.8 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Bereifung_MAN @ 182\mod_1377753294537_78.docx @ 1564585 @ @ 1

Tyres

Front 750/65 R26 (MEGA X BIB)

Rear 580/70 R26 (XM 27)

Front 750/60 R30 (CARGO X BIB)

Rear 600/60 R30 (CARGO X BIB)

Front 750/65 R26 (MEGA X BIB)

Rear 600/65 R28 (AC 65)

Pos: 62.9 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Radmuttern_Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358420623083_78.docx @ 1274079 @ @ 1

Wheel nuts

Tightening torque

Pos: 62.10 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Abmessungen Mähwerk CV_Caterpillar/MAN @ 137\mod_1353499031570_78.docx @ 1218454 @ @ 1

Mowing units CV design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

Pos: 62.11 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Abmessungen Mähwerk CRI_Caterpillar/MAN @ 140\mod_1355221207089_78.docx @ 1246463 @ @ 1

Mowing units CRI design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Pos: 62.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

Technical Data of the Machine

53°

Rear axle

Hydro-pneumatic

Air pressure

1.9 bar

1.2 bar

1.0 bar

1.0 bar

1.9 bar

1.2 bar

630 Nm

3

9.720 mm

4 per lateral mowing unit

5 per front mowing unit

4 per lateral mowing unit

2 per front mowing unit

V-shaped steel tines

700/1.000 rpm

3

9.000 mm

5 per mowing unit

2 per mowing unit

Rollers

760 rpm

39

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 62.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Technische Daten Klimaanlage @ 136\mod_1352814649537_78.docx @ 1211328 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.1 Technical Data Air Conditioning System

Pos: 62.14 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Klimaanlage 910 m³/h 17,2 Ampere @ 182\mod_1377753515185_78.docx @ 1564614 @ @ 1

Component

Evaporator

Heater

Fan

Voltage

Current consumption

Refrigerant

Performance data

Refrigerating capacity* 5;200 Watt*

Heating capacity 4;000 Watt

910 m

3

12 Volt

/h free blowing

17,2 amperes

R 134a (CFC free)

* measured at +30° Celsius ambient temperature (data rendered by the manufacturer)

Pos: 62.15 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Klimaanlage Kältemitteldatenblatt R 134a (Auszug) @ 0\mod_1197351117948_78.docx @ 17726 @ 2 @ 1

7.1.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)

Refrigerant R 134a:

Chemical designation:

Chemical formula:

Molecular weight:

Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):

Freezing point:

Critical temperature:

Critical pressure:

Density (liquid at +25° Celsius):

Flammability limits

Environmental data

FKW 134a:

ODP - Ozonolysis potential

CLP - Chlorine load potential

HGWP - Greenhouse effect

PCR - Photochemical reactivity

Pos: 62.16 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Motor-Elektrik / Maschinen-Elektrik_MAN @ 181\mod_1376913658287_78.docx @ 1551027 @ 3 @ 1

7.2 Technical Data of the Electrical System

1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane

CH

2

F CF

3

102.0 g/mol

-26.1°C

-101.0°C

-101.1°C

40.60 bar

1.206 kg/m

3 in air - not flammable

ODP = 0

CLP = 0

HGWP = 0.26

PCR = 0.5

Designation

Three-phase generator (on-board electrical system)

Number of batteries

Battery voltage

Pos: 62.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Battery capacity per battery

14 V; 350 A

2 units

12 V

135 Ah

40

Pos: 62.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Betriebsstoffe @ 174\mod_1371620600320_78.docx @ 1490571 @ 2 @ 1

7.3 Consumables

Pos: 62.19 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Betriebsstoffe Fahrzeug BiG M 420 MAN @ 188\mod_1380173674246_78.docx @ 1610678 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Diesel tank

Urea tank

Pos: 62.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schmierstoffe @ 17\mod_1236177314933_78.docx @ 201837 @ 2 @ 1

Engine coolant

7.4 Lubricants

Pos: 62.21 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Schmierstoffe Fahrzeug BiG M 420 MAN @ 147\mod_1360739625542_78.docx @ 1313513 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Hydraulic oil

Transfer gearbox

Engine oil

Pos: 62.22 /Abkürzungen /Mähwerke CV-Ausführung @ 145\mod_1359535035820_78.docx @ 1295126 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CV design)

Pos: 62.23 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Pos: 62.24 /Abkürzungen /Mähwerke CRi-Ausführung @ 145\mod_1359535111951_78.docx @ 1295445 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CRi design)

Pos: 62.25 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

Filling quantity

700 litres

70 litres

60 litres

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Technical Data of the Machine

Refer to the enclosed MAN operation and maintenance manual

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Pos: 63 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Cutter bar

Filling quantity

80 litres

Filtered lubricants

Bio-degradable lubricants

HLP46, HE46

6.0 litres Mobil SHC 630

34 litres

Refer to the enclosed MAN operation and maintenance manual

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

** = lateral mowing units

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

On request

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

On request

41

Cabin

Pos: 64.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Kabine @ 0\mod_1195650476560_78.docx @ 1556 @ 1 @ 1

8 Cabin

Pos: 64.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Aufstiegsleiter zur Fahrerkabine BM 400 (2012-07-26 13:22:20) @ 0\mod_1195647599076_78.docx @ 1499 @ 2 @ 1

8.1 Ladder to driver's cabin

Danger ! - Access to cab

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Do not access or leave (the machine) over ladder during travel.

• It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.

• Always make certain the ladders are clean. Take special care that no grease or other slippery materials accumulates on the ladders.

Pos: 64.3 /BA/Kabine/Aufstiegsleiter/Aufstiegsleiter Big M 420 @ 47\mod_1285667878078_78.docx @ 457056 @ @ 1

• When leaving the cab, always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 64.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 10

• Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab

1

BM 420 0001

42

Pos: 64.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kabinentür öffnen @ 0\mod_1195650425029_78.docx @ 1537 @ 2 @ 1

8.2

Pos: 64.6 /BA/Kabine/Tür Öffnen von innen/außen @ 0\mod_1195651571638_78.docx @ 1633 @ @ 1

Opening the cabin door

Cabin

1

BM 400 0182

Fig. 11

• From the outside:

Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the door.

1

BM 400 0183

Pos: 64.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 12

• From the inside:

Lift the door opening lever (1) and open the door.

43

Cabin

Pos: 64.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bedienungselemente @ 0\mod_1195651806826_78.docx @ 1652 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 64.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.1 Overview

Pos: 64.10 /BA/Kabine/Bedienelemente Übersicht Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320143989012_78.docx @ 741413 @ @ 1

12

1

2

3

Fig.13

2 Steering column

3 Service brake

Pos: 64.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

5 Switch group - roof panel

6 Info centre

9

5 13

10

7

4

11

6

8

BM 420 0035

9 Switch group – air conditioning/heating

10 Interior lighting

12 ISO compartment for radio

13 Side window wiper (right/left)

44

Pos: 64.12.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Luft-Komfort-Sitz @ 78\mod_1314281916697_78.docx @ 696162 @ 2 @ 1

Cabin

8.4 Air comfort seat

Pos: 64.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Kurzzeitige Ablenkung @ 78\mod_1314282284221_78.docx @ 696190 @ @ 1

Danger! - Brief distraction

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The driver’s seat must only be adjusted when the machine is stopped.

Pos: 64.12.3 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Eingeschränkter Bewegungsfreiraum des Mulitfunktionshebels (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314595386879_78.docx @ 696925 @ @ 1

Danger ! – Limited freedom of movement for the multi-function lever

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• After adjusting the seat, the right armrest and the steering column adjustment, check whether the multi-function lever is freely moveable in all directions. Should this not be the case, the setting needs to be readjusted.

Pos: 64.12.4 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Fahrersitz falsch eingestellt (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314351997140_78.docx @ 696784 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• Prior to start-up, adjust the driver`s seat ergonomically and individually according to the driver

Pos: 64.12.5 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARD/Luft-Komfort-Sitz_Bild_Gesamtübersicht BM 420/500 Big X @ 79\mod_1314350456096_78.docx @ 696756 @ @ 1

10

8

1

2

Pos: 64.12.6 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Einführtext @ 78\mod_1314338699867_78.docx @ 696252 @ @ 1

3

6

12 9

4

5

7

BX850939

Fig. 14

The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Pos: 64.12.7 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Gewichtseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314339002000_78.docx @ 696280 @ @ 1

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent health problems, the individual driver’s weight adjustment should be checked and adjusted prior to operation of the machine. The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).

Pos: 64.12.8 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Höheneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314339309445_78.docx @ 696308 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.12.9 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Horizontalfederung @ 78\mod_1314340542270_78.docx @ 696364 @ @ 1

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver’s seat (1) up. Press the lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver’s seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Horizontal suspension

45

Cabin

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back

– the horizontal suspension is switched off.

Pos: 64.12.10 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Längseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314340870689_78.docx @ 696392 @ @ 1

Longitudinal adjustment

• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s seat (1) forward or backward into the requested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, the driver’s seat must not be movable into any other position.

Pos: 64.12.11 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Sitzneigungseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314341157250_78.docx @ 696420 @ @ 1

Seat angle adjustment

• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface by increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.

Pos: 64.12.12 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Sitztiefeneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314342965217_78.docx @ 696448 @ @ 1

Seat depth adjustment

• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the required position by pushing forward and backward.

Pos: 64.12.13 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Kopfstütze @ 78\mod_1314343284989_78.docx @ 696476 @ @ 1

Headrest

Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on the same height, if possible.

• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.

Pos: 64.12.14 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Bandscheibenstütze @ 78\mod_1314343609780_78.docx @ 696504 @ @ 1

Lumbar support

• The height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest can be adapted individually by turning the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.

Pos: 64.12.15 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Rückenlehneneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314344065766_78.docx @ 696532 @ @ 1

Adjustment of the backrest

Pos: 64.12.16 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Schwingungsdämpfer einstellen @ 79\mod_1314596261195_78.docx @ 696981 @ @ 1

• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different position any more.

Set the Vibration Damper

Pos: 64.12.17 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Schwingungsdämpfer falsch eingestellt (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314596183569_78.docx @ 696953 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• The vibration damper must always be set so tightly that the seat cannot drift, also in case of a bad road, and that the pedals are always in contact with the vibration damper.

Pos: 64.12.18 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARD/Schwingungsdämpfer einstellbarer @ 79\mod_1314354261168_78.docx @ 696895 @ @ 1

The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation via the adjustable damper stepless from “soft” to “hard”.

• Pull lever (12) up (seating comfort: soft)

Pos: 64.12.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pull lever (12) down (seating comfort: hard)

46

Pos: 64.12.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Armlehne links @ 78\mod_1314344564181_78.docx @ 696588 @ 3 @ 1

8.4.1 Setting the left armrest

Pos: 64.12.21 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARD/Armlehne links neuer Mutifunktionshebel Bild @ 79\mod_1314353402049_78.docx @ 696867 @ @ 1

8

11

BX850945

Pos: 64.12.22 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne links Beschreibung @ 79\mod_1314345159341_78.docx @ 696616 @ @ 1

Fig. 15

• Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

• Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of the armrest.

Pos: 64.12.23 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Armlehne rechts @ 79\mod_1314345446706_78.docx @ 696644 @ 3 @ 1

• Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten the hexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.

Pos: 64.12.24 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 79\mod_1314352240603_78.docx @ 696811 @ @ 1

Cabin

3

1

2

BX850931

Pos: 64.12.25 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Beschreibung @ 79\mod_1314346051414_78.docx @ 696700 @ @ 1

Fig. 16

The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are one unit.

Setting the right armrest

• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) into the requested height and tighten the clamping screw (2) again.

Pos: 64.12.26 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Beschreibung Zusatz BM 420/500 BigX @ 79\mod_1314353125257_78.docx @ 696839 @ @ 1

• The angle of inclination and the height of the right armrest can be adjusted by activating the lever (3)

Pos: 64.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

47

Cabin

Pos: 64.14 /BA/Kabine/Verbandskasten / Betriebsanleitung Schublade BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272347696858_78.docx @ 375780 @ 3 @ 1

8.4.3 Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions

Pos: 64.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.17

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

48

Pos: 64.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einweisersitz @ 52\mod_1289471929875_78.docx @ 504469 @ 2 @ 1

Cabin

8.5 Guide's seat

Pos: 64.17 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Einweisersitz Achtung (2012-07-26 15:59:04) @ 52\mod_1289472176093_78.docx @ 504495 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.18 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Beifahrersitz Bild BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272431803112_78.docx @ 377335 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Hindrance to driver!

• The guide's seat must only be used while the machine is being guided. Otherwise no persons other than the driver are permitted to remain on the machine or in the driver's cab during operation.

Fig.18

Pos: 64.19 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitzfläche herunterklappen @ 52\mod_1289472477171_78.docx @ 504541 @ @ 1

• Before use fold down the guide's seat surface (1).

Pos: 64.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Kühlbox @ 42\mod_1272436051831_78.docx @ 377418 @ 3 @ 1

8.5.1 Cooler

Pos: 64.21 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Bild BM 420 / 500 @ 42\mod_1272436122175_78.docx @ 377518 @ @ 1

1

2

3

3

1

4

BM 500 0177

Fig.19

Pos: 64.22 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Text @ 42\mod_1272437167768_78.docx @ 377542 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooler (1) is located under the guide's seat (2) in the cab.

The cooler can be connected to the 12-V socket (3) on the right next to the passenger seat with the 12-V plug (4).

49

Cabin

Pos: 64.24 /BA/Kabine/Notausstieg BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272290080084_78.docx @ 375572 @ 2 @ 1

2 b

3 c

1

1

BM 500 0165

Fig.20

In case of an emergency (1), the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.

To do this:

• Swivel the lever (2) forward until it reaches the locking point

• Pull the safety cotter pin (3) and remove it

Pos: 64.25 /BA/Kabine/On-Board- Diagnosestecker (OBD) – Motor MAN @ 83\mod_1317729239127_78.docx @ 730468 @ 3 @ 1

• Open the side window (1) completely

8.5.3 OBD diagnostics plug (On-Board-plug)

2 1

BM 500 0166_1

Pos: 64.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 21

The OBD diagnostics plug (1) is located in the cabin, behind the instructional seat and below the storage surface (2).

50

Pos: 64.27 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäule und Fußpedale BM 500/BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289480764906_78.docx @ 504895 @ 3 @ 1

8.6 Steering Column and Foot Pedals

1

5

2

4

8 3 7

6

10

Cabin

9

Fig.22

1 Button for horn

3 Pilot lamp indicator

6 Full beam indicator light

Pos: 64.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

8 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment

9 Release lever for horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

10 Service brake

BM 500 0132_1

51

Cabin

Pos: 64.29 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäulenverstellung (2012-08-09 15:37:40) @ 52\mod_1289481396328_78.docx @ 505108 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.1 Steering Column Adjustment

Danger ! - Loss of control over the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Adjust the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

• The steering column (1) is held in vertical position by spring pressure. Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the steering wheel with both hands.

1

3

2

BX100300_1

Fig. 23

Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

• Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1), and adjust to the desired position.

After the pedal (2) has been released, the steering column (1) will be locked.

Horizontal steering column adjustment

Pos: 64.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column (1) into the requested position. Lock the release lever (3) again.

52

Pos: 64.31 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Hupe @ 52\mod_1289481326156_78.docx @ 505062 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.2 Horn

1

Pos: 64.32 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Blinklichtschalter @ 52\mod_1289481273359_78.docx @ 505036 @ 3 @ 1

BX100210_1

Fig. 24

• When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is sounded.

1

2

BX100213_1

Fig. 25

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Pos: 64.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Switch (1) forward - right indicator

• Switch (1) backward - left indicator

• Set the switch to neutral position by hand.

The indicator pilot lamp (2) will light up when the indicator has been switched on.

Cabin

53

Cabin

Pos: 64.34 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Fernlicht (2012-08-16 13:57:43) @ 52\mod_1289481203984_78.docx @ 505010 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.4 Full Beam

1

2

Pos: 64.35 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lichthupe @ 52\mod_1289481134765_78.docx @ 504984 @ 3 @ 1

BX100212_1

Fig. 26

Note

Full beam only when dipped beam is turned on.

Turn off full beam when a vehicle is approaching from the opposite direction.

• Switch full beam on - press lever (1) down.

• Switch full beam off - pull lever (1) up.

When full beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2) will be lit.

1

2

BX200040_1

Pos: 64.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 27

• Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.

54

Pos: 64.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Betriebsbremse betätigen @ 49\mod_1286779662750_78.docx @ 463113 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.6

Pos: 64.38 /BA/Kabine/Betriebsbremse betätigen Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 52\mod_1289487058875_78.docx @ 505805 @ @ 1

Using the operating brake

1

BX100111_1

Fig. 28

Pos: 64.39 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Betriebsbremse betätigen Text @ 74\mod_1309242945934_78.docx @ 660390 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger!

– when the operating brake function is limited.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Check the brake function every time before starting to drive.

Cabin

55

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.1 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347266509191_78.docx @ 1160361 @ 2 @ 1

8.7 Switch Group Roof Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11

Fig. 29

Pos: 64.41.2 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Text BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347267004931_78.docx @ 1160395 @ @ 1

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Mirror adjustment (right outside mirror only)

5 Rear work lights

6 Parking light / dipped beam

7 Allround light (optional)

Pos: 64.41.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

10 Windshield wiper

11 Windshield wiper washer system

56

Pos: 64.41.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Beleuchtung @ 0\mod_1195658399935_78.docx @ 1881 @ 2 @ 1

8.8 Lighting

Pos: 64.41.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

8.8.1 Overview

Pos: 64.41.6 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Beleuchtung Übersicht BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285674059968_78.docx @ 457109 @ @ 1

Cabin

6

4 7 6

7 4

2

1 3

9 8

3

8 9

5

12

11 10

Fig.30

1 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

2 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

3 Working floodlights, side lower

4 Working floodlight lower pointing to the front

5 Working floodlight rear

6 Cab roof working floodlight

7 Dipped beam / full beam

8 Front parking light (clearance lamp)

9 Indicators / hazard warning flashers

10 Licence plate lamp

11 a) Brake light b) Indicators / hazard warning flashers

Pos: 64.41.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 c) Tail light / rear parking light (clearance lamp)

12 Allround light (optional)

11

11 a b c

BM 420 0002

57

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht @ 48\mod_1286516373468_78.docx @ 461657 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.2 Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

Pos: 64.41.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Blinker Hinweis Fahrtrichtungswechsel bei Straßenfahrt mit Blinklicht anzeigen. (2012-08-10 12:02:46) @ 48\mod_1286516520484_78.docx @ 461683 @ @ 1

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Pos: 64.41.10 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286519378578_78.docx @ 461839 @ @ 1

12a

12b

10

10

BM 420 0003

Fig.31

Pos: 64.41.11 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker einschalten @ 48\mod_1286517252328_78.docx @ 461735 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.2.1 Switching on the indicator

• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the indicators (10, 12b) will flash on one side (right/left).

Pos: 64.41.12 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bremslicht @ 48\mod_1286517961515_78.docx @ 461761 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.2.2 Brake light

Pos: 64.41.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/U-Z/Warnblinkanlage @ 48\mod_1286518286593_78.docx @ 461813 @ 4 @ 1

When the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (12a) will light up as soon as the operating brake is pressed.

8.8.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher

Pos: 64.41.14 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Warnblinkanlage Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268382748_78.docx @ 1160508 @ @ 1

12b

1

10

BM 420 0004_1

Fig.32

Pos: 64.41.15 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1195658983248_78.docx @ 1921 @ @ 1

The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.

Pos: 64.41.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• When the hazard warning flasher has been switched on, all indicators (10, 12b) will flash at the same time.

58

Pos: 64.41.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Standlicht / Abblendlicht @ 47\mod_1285679225203_78.docx @ 457241 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.3 Side light/dipped beam

Pos: 64.41.18 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268955251_78.docx @ 1160621 @ @ 1

I

II

III

1

Cabin

12c

7

11

9

BM 420 0005_1

Pos: 64.41.19 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Text @ 48\mod_1286520637718_78.docx @ 461971 @ 44 @ 1

Fig.33

The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Parking light

III – Dipped beam

8.8.3.1 Switching on the parking light

8.8.3.2

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

The following lamps will light up when the parking light is switched on:

9 Front parking light

12c Rear parking light

Switching on the dipped beam

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.

When dipped beam is turned on, the following are lit:

9 Front parking light

11 Licence plate lamp

12c Tail light

Note

Pos: 64.41.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The dipped beam can be switched on only when the ignition has been switched on.

59

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Arbeitsscheinwerfer @ 48\mod_1286522984234_78.docx @ 462049 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 64.41.22 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347270164680_78.docx @ 1160765 @ @ 1

Fig. 34

Pos: 64.41.23 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Text BM 420 / 500 @ 130\mod_1347271298137_78.docx @ 1160794 @ @ 1

The rocker switch (1,2,3,4) for the work lights is located in the switch group roof panel.

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Rear work lights

It has 2 settings:

I Off

II On

Pos: 64.41.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Always switch off the working floodlights during road travel!

60

Pos: 64.41.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine @ 48\mod_1286524163921_78.docx @ 462127 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.4.1 Working floodlights Cab

Pos: 64.41.26 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347274714584_78.docx @ 1160823 @ @ 1

1

I

II

Cabin

6

BM 500 0162_1

Fig. 35

Pos: 64.41.27 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Text BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347275354690_78.docx @ 1160936 @ @ 1

The 6 working floodlights (6) on the cab roof can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

When the rocker switch (1) is turned on, the following are lit:

6 Cab roof floodlights

Pos: 64.41.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front @ 48\mod_1286524169140_78.docx @ 462153 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.4.2 Working floodlight Bottom front

Pos: 64.41.29 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347276018374_78.docx @ 1161049 @ @ 1

2

II

I

4 4

BM 420 0008_1

Fig. 36

Pos: 64.41.30 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Text @ 130\mod_1347276310451_78.docx @ 1161079 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.41.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (2) to position II:

When the rocker switch (2) is turned on, the following are lit:

4 Working floodlight front (right and left)

61

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer seitlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links @ 48\mod_1286524157656_78.docx @ 462101 @ 4 @ 1

8.8.4.3 Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units"

Pos: 64.41.33 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347277074891_78.docx @ 1161341 @ @ 1

4

3

I

II

5

6 7

BM 420 0006_1

Fig. 37

Pos: 64.41.34 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/linksText BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347277757715_78.docx @ 1161401 @ @ 1

The two working floodlights (4,5,6,7) can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (3) to position II:

When the rocker switch (3) is turned on, the following are lit:

4 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

5 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

6 Working floodlights lateral right

Pos: 64.41.35 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck @ 48\mod_1286525027906_78.docx @ 462205 @ 4 @ 1

7 Working floodlights lateral left

8.8.4.4 Working floodlight rear

Pos: 64.41.36 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279118287_78.docx @ 1161513 @ @ 1

4

5

I

II

BM 420 0007_1

Fig.38

Pos: 64.41.37 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Text BM 400/420/500 @ 48\mod_1286529514968_78.docx @ 462491 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.41.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (4) to position II:

When the rocker switch (4) is turned on, the following are lit:

5 Working floodlight rear

62

Pos: 64.41.39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Rundumleuchten optional @ 48\mod_1286524188234_78.docx @ 462179 @ 3 @ 1

8.8.5 Allround lights (optional)

Pos: 64.41.40 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279511325_78.docx @ 1161543 @ @ 1

Cabin

13

1

BM 420 0009_1

Fig.39

Pos: 64.41.41 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Text BM 400/420/500 @ 49\mod_1286530440406_78.docx @ 462543 @ @ 1

Option depends on user’s country

In some countries the allround lights must be switched on in road traffic.

Switch on the allround lights (13)

Pos: 64.41.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp in the switch (1) will light up.

63

Cabin

Pos: 64.41.43 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Innen-Raumbeleuchtung / Spotlight BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1271751084243_78.docx @ 372526 @ 3 @ 1

8.8.6 Interior Lighting / Spotlight

1

8

6 6

3

4 7

2 5

BM 500 0146

Fig.40

The interior lighting (1) and spotlight (2) are located on the cab roof.

Overview:

3 = On / Off switch - interior lighting (1)

4 = On / Off switch - spotlight (2)

Note - switch-off delay

After ignition stage II is turned off, interior lighting will stay on for the amount of time set on time relay (5).

The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (5).

To do this:

• Open the cover (7) on the cab roof

• Move switch (6) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table)

S1 S2 (s)

On Off 2.5 14

Pos: 64.41.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Off On 0…2.5

Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the rotary potentiometer (8) of the time relay (5) that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t(s).

64

Pos: 64.41.45 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Innen-Raumbeleuchtung / Zusätzlicher Spotlight BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347002500384_78.docx @ 1159306 @ 3 @ 1

8.8.7 Additional Spotlight

I

II

III

1

Fig. 41

The spotlight is used to illuminate the multi-function lever.

The spotlight (2) is located on the cab roof.

Pos: 64.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The rocker switch (1) for the spotlight has three positions:

I- 30% brightness

II – Off

III – 100% brightness

2

Cabin

BM 420 0089

65

Cabin

Pos: 64.43.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Außenspiegel @ 32\mod_1253519080403_78.docx @ 313745 @ 3 @ 1

8.9 Outside mirrors

Pos: 64.43.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr- Außenspiegel (2012-08-08 15:22:38) @ 32\mod_1253519267091_78.docx @ 313770 @ @ 1

Danger! - Impaired vision

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 64.43.3 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Außenspiegel links BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286776114734_78.docx @ 462847 @ 3 @ 1

• Before starting to drive, adjust the mirror so that the rear driving area is fully visible.

8.9.1 Left Outside Mirror

1

BM 420 0010

Pos: 64.43.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.42

• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.

66

Pos: 64.43.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Rechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286776268859_78.docx @ 462873 @ 4 @ 1

8.9.2 Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror

Pos: 64.43.6 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Rechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347282021728_78.docx @ 1161768 @ @ 1

2

Cabin

3

1

BM 420 0011_1

Pos: 64.43.7 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Außenspiegel rechts @ 49\mod_1286777019984_78.docx @ 462951 @ 4 @ 1

Fig. 43

8.9.2.1 Setting the right outside mirror

The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.

• Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).

Pos: 64.43.8 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Anfahrspiegel einstellen @ 49\mod_1286776763796_78.docx @ 462925 @ 4 @ 1

• Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.

8.9.2.2 Setting the anti-collision mirror

The anti-collision mirror (2) must be adjusted manually.

Pos: 64.43.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Anfahrspiegel Hinweis (2012-08-08 15:31:56) @ 49\mod_1286776577265_78.docx @ 462899 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 64.43.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Set the anti-collision mirror in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

67

Cabin

Pos: 64.43.11 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Innenspiegel @ 0\mod_1195711607577_78.docx @ 2043 @ 4 @ 1

8.10 Inside mirror

BMII-197

Fig. 44:

Adjust the inside mirror manually.

Adjust the inside mirror according to requirements.

Pos: 64.44 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Sonnenblende BM 420 / 500 @ 131\mod_1347281315525_78.docx @ 1161656 @ 2 @ 1

8.11 Sun blind

Fig. 45

Pos: 64.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.

68

Pos: 64.46 /BA/Kabine/Frontscheibenwischer BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347282447153_78.docx @ 1161827 @ 2 @ 1

8.12 Windshield wipers

1

BM 420 0090

Fig. 46

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is located in the roof panel.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Interval

III - Continuous operation

Switching on the windshield wipers

Pos: 64.47 /BA/Kabine/Scheibenwaschanlage – Frontscheibe BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347284689341_78.docx @ 1161926 @ 2 @ 1

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

8.13 Washer system – windshield

1

Pos: 64.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 420 0091

Fig. 47

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.

Switching on the windshield washer system

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

Cabin

69

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.1 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Schalterkonsole BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271762510508_78.docx @ 372627 @ 2 @ 1

8.14 Switch panel

2

3

4

7

5 6

1

BM 500 0147

Fig. 48

1

Panel switches

2

Pilot lamps

3

Ignition lock

4

Cigarette lighter

5

12 V socket

6

CAN diagnostics socket

7

USB connection

Pos: 64.49.2 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.49.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

70

Pos: 64.49.4 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Konsolenschalter und Kontrollleuchten BM 420 @ 85\mod_1319112554926_78.docx @ 737170 @ 2 @ 1

8.15 Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps

Cabin

Fig. 49

1 Road/field release switch

2 Autopilot release switch (optional)

3 Parking brake release switch

4 Traction drive release switch

5 Axle separation key

6 Switch hydraulic auger hood left (optional)

7 Fold up/ fold down front guard flaps switch (front mowing unit optional)

8 Switch hydraulic auger hood right (optional)

9 Indicator lamp engine oil pressure

10 Charge pilot lamp

11 Indicator lamp cooling water temperature

Pos: 64.49.5 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Betätigung Freigabeschalter (2012-08-08 11:37:12) @ 0\mod_1195717535303_78.docx @ 2202 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.1 Actuating release switches

1

1

2

BX 400 0006

Fig. 50:

Pos: 64.49.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Locked release switch

Effect: Release switches cannot be activated.

• To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2) forward and press the release switch.

71

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 2 @ 1

8.15.2 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 64.49.8 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Stellung Freigabeschalter bei Straßenfahrt (2012-08-06 13:27:39) @ 0\mod_1196320338201_78.docx @ 6332 @ @ 1

Danger! - Release switches for road travel not in position (I) "Road travel"

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The road/field release switch must be in position "I" for road travel.

• This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.

Pos: 64.49.9 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld (2012-08-16 09:57:38) @ 0\mod_1195717693209_78.docx @ 2221 @ @ 1

1 II

Pos: 64.49.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

BM 400 0007

Fig. 51

The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from road travel to field operation and vice versa.

I - Road travel

II - Field mode

Note

Depending on the position of the "Road/field" release switch, the "Road travel or field mode" basic screen appears in the Info Centre.

72

Pos: 64.49.11 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Autopilot / -optional (2012-08-16 11:43:16) @ 0\mod_1195717962350_78.docx @ 2240 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional

1 II

I

BM 400 0009

Fig. 52:

Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the autopilot function.

Note - Autopilot is not released

• Autopilot is only available in Field mode with the travelling gear turned on

Pos: 64.49.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The road/field release switch must be active in field operation and the travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

I - Autopilot off

II - Autopilot released

Note - Autopilot is not released

• For further information, please consult the operating instruction "Autopilot Brief

Introduction" included with delivery

Cabin

73

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.13 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Feststellbremse (2012-08-06 14:04:57) @ 0\mod_1195718259850_78.docx @ 2259 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.4 Release switch - holding brake

Pos: 64.49.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 53:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

• The holding brake is applied automatically when the ignition is switched off.

74

Pos: 64.49.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

Cabin

8.15.5 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 64.49.16 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Ungewolltes bewegen der Maschine (2012-08-06 14:44:16) @ 0\mod_1196319463264_78.docx @ 6313 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unintentional movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• No persons may be present in the direct hazardous area of the machine when the travelling gear release switch is actuated!

• Always remove the ignition key before leaving the cabin.

To turn off the machine:

• Activate the parking brake switch; move the travelling gear switch (1) to position off (I).

Pos: 64.49.17 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb (2012-08-16 10:37:06) @ 0\mod_1195720600131_78.docx @ 2278 @ @ 1

1 II

Pos: 64.49.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

BM 400 0010

Fig. 54:

When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated, the travelling gear is released.

I - Travelling gear off

II - Travelling gear on

Note - Mower drives cannot be switched on.

• When the travelling gear is switched off (position II), the mowing unit drive cannot be switched on.

75

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.19 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Taste Achstrennung @ 0\mod_1195722759115_78.docx @ 2297 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.6 Axle separation key

Fig. 55:

Actuating the axle separation key switches axle separation on or off.

Note - Axle separation does not turn on

• Axle separation can only be activated in drive level 1 (field mode).

• When activating the axle separation, the maximum top speed is 14 km/h (instead of 19 km/h).

• If the axle separation is switched when travelling faster than 14 km/h, the electronics prevent the axle separation from being activated. Only after the speed has been reduced to below 14 km/h, are the electronics, the valves, and the axle separation activated.

• Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation switched on

Pos: 64.49.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle separation switched off

76

Pos: 64.49.21 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchten Bild BM 420 @ 49\mod_1287064818000_78.docx @ 464765 @ @ 1

Cabin

1 3

2

BM 420 0014

Fig.56

Pos: 64.49.22 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Kontrollleuchte Motoröldruck (2012-08-06 16:00:06) @ 85\mod_1319112649093_78.docx @ 737198 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.7 Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure

Caution! - The pilot lamp (1) “Engine oil pressure” lights up

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Switch off engine immediately

• Remedy the malfunction

Pos: 64.49.23 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchte Ladekontrollleuchte BM 420/BM500 @ 41\mod_1271763780008_78.docx @ 372751 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.8 Charge Indicator Lamp

The charge indicator lamp (2) will light up if the output voltage of the three-phase generator is not sufficient to charge the batteries.

• Check the cables and connections on the three-phase generator and on the battery.

• Check the V-belt on the three-phase generator.

Pos: 64.49.24 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Kontrollleuchte Kühlwassertemperatur @ 85\mod_1319112731292_78.docx @ 737226 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.9 Pilot Lamp Cooling Water Temperature

Pos: 64.49.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution! - The pilot lamp (3) “Cooling water temperature” lights up

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Switch off engine immediately

• Remedy the malfunction

77

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.26 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zündschloss BM 420/500 @ 147\mod_1361177933788_78.docx @ 1318972 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.10 Ignition lock

1

BM 400 0142

Pos: 64.49.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 57

The ignition lock (1) has four positions:

0 - Off

I - Electric circuit for electronics is switched on

II The ignition is switched on

III -Start position

78

Pos: 64.49.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose @ 42\mod_1272437710878_78.docx @ 377567 @ 3 @ 1

8.15.11 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket

Pos: 64.49.29 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Achtung (2012-08-06 16:37:09) @ 42\mod_1272438967737_78.docx @ 377642 @ @ 1

Caution! - Hot cigarette lighter!

Effect: Burns

• Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle.

• Never hold onto the cigarette lighter (1) when it is pushed in.

Pos: 64.49.30 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Bild BM 420/500 @ 83\mod_1317732783534_78.docx @ 730557 @ @ 1

2

1

3

2

Cabin

BM 500 0178_1

Fig. 58

Pos: 64.49.31 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Text @ 0\mod_1195725058068_78.docx @ 2355 @ @ 1

Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required temperature is reached the insert will come out by itself.

The socket (2) can be used to connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a maximum of

10 amperes. When the engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the specified plug to connect accessory units.

Pos: 64.49.32 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Steckdose 12 V Hinweis BM 420/500 @ 42\mod_1272440213768_78.docx @ 377745 @ @ 1

Note

An additional 12-V socket is located in the driver’s cab on the right next to the passenger seat facing in the direction of travel.

Pos: 64.49.33 /BA/Kabine/Diagnosestecker (ISO-Bus) @ 83\mod_1317733119227_78.docx @ 730585 @ 2 @ 1

8.16 Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus)

Note

Pos: 64.49.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

A diagnostics socket (3) (ISO-Bus) is located additionally in direction of travel right next to the passenger seat.

79

Cabin

Pos: 64.49.35 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271765654040_78.docx @ 372900 @ 2 @ 1

8.16.1 Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection

Fig. 59

• CAN interface (1)

• USB connection (2)

Pos: 64.49.36 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

80

Pos: 64.51.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Multifunktionshebel @ 184\mod_1378997406387_78.docx @ 1587556 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 64.51.2 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Nur im Feldbetrieb @ 184\mod_1378997469830_78.docx @ 1587584 @ @ 1

In field mode only

Pos: 64.51.3 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420/500 NEU Teil 1 Bild @ 184\mod_1378997526285_78.docx @ 1587612 @ @ 1

2

3

1

16

24

10

4

5

25

11

9

15

8

12

6

7

19

20

21

Pos: 64.51.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 60

13 14

17

22

23

18a 18b

Cabin

BM 500 0107

81

Cabin

Pos: 64.51.5 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420 NEU Teil 1 Tabelle @ 184\mod_1378902502789_78.docx @ 1582635 @ @ 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

Switching off all mowing unit drives

Bringing up pre-setting “I” cutting height (option)

Bringing up pre-setting “II” cutting height (option)

Folding down / lowering mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Folding down /lowering mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Lifting front mowing unit (headland position = transport position)

9 Folding up both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lifting all the mowing units

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

10 Folding down both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lowering all the mowing units

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Pos: 64.51.6 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420 NEU Teil 2 @ 184\mod_1378903051767_78.docx @ 1582684 @ @ 1

11 Lower front mower

12 Additional function for keys "4 to 11"

13 Not assigned

14 Not assigned

15 Activation key for Autopilot (optional)

16 Not assigned

17 Additional function: Mowing units – release

18a Not assigned

18b Not assigned

19 Increase engine speed inching until nominal speed is reached

20 Switch from nominal speed to idle speed and vice versa

21 Reduce engine speed inching until idle speed

22 Not assigned

23 Cross switch lever

24 Sideshift right (optional)

25 Sideshift left (optional)

Pos: 64.51.7 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Hinweis die Tasten (5,7 und 8) haben 2 Schaltstufen. @ 41\mod_1271319271175_78.docx @ 369966 @ @ 1

Pos: 64.51.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The (5, 7 and 8) keys have 2 steps.

• When the first step is pressed, the mowing unit is raised stepwise (as long as the key is held down) from working position to headland position.

• Pressing the second step one time lifts the mowing unit automatically from working position to headland position.

82

Pos: 64.51.9 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420/500 Fortsetzung @ 41\mod_1271256276293_78.docx @ 369225 @ 33 @ 1

8.17.1 Multi-Function Lever (Continued)

8.17.1.1 Driving

E F

D G

H

J

K

L

M

15

Cabin

16

A

B

C

BM 500 0108

Pos: 64.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.61

15 Actuation key for travelling gear

16 Selector switch for acceleration ramp

A Acceleration (in forward travel) / Deceleration (in reverse) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

B - Multi-function lever – central position

C - Acceleration (in reverse) / Deceleration (in forward travel) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

D - Deceleration to 0 km/h / Fast reversing with actuation key (15) pressed (in field operation only)

E - Multi-function lever – central position

F - Switch on cruise control / Save current speed for cruise control – press activation key (15) and rotate multi-function lever in direction F

G - Without (17) key pressed, switch off left mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on left mower drive

H - Central position

J - Without (17) key pressed, switch off right mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on right mower drive

K - Without (17) key pressed, switch off front mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on front mower drive

L - Central position

M - Without (17) key pressed, switch off all mower drives / with (17) key pressed, switch on all mower drives

83

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.1 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimatronik / Heizung Übersicht (2012-08-09 09:35:28) @ 0\mod_1195728661475_78.docx @ 2453 @ 34 @ 1

8.18

8.18.1

Klimatronik / heating

Control and display elements

The Klimatronik is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabs. The driver’s work is made easier through clear, intuitive control of all tasks and optimum climate control in the driver’s cab.

Note

If the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automatically performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

Fig. 62

Key function key

1

Key to switch air conditioning on and off

2

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature upward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Up"

3

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature downward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Down"

4

Key to switch the controller on and off

5

Key to switch the evaporator fan speed Manual / Automatic

6

Key to switch REHEAT mode on and off (demoisturising the cab air)

7

8

Covered key to switch the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit

84

LCD function of LCD display

Pos: 64.53.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 63

9

Icon indicates REHEAT mode

10

Icon indicates air conditioning

11

Icon indicates fully automatic mode is turned on

12

Bar indicates fan speed in manual mode

13

Icon indicates manual fan mode

14

4-place seven segment display shows setpoint value or error code

15

Icon indicates unit of measure for temperature (°)

16

Indicates the icon for vehicle cab

Cabin

85

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.3 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anlage einschalten (2012-08-09 09:42:21) @ 0\mod_1195729216365_78.docx @ 2491 @ 33 @ 1

8.18.2 Operation

8.18.3 Switching on the System

Fig. 64

Press the key

Note

After the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self test and the software version is displayed for about 5 seconds.

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 seconds (for example 6 operating hours).

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Pos: 64.53.4 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Einstellen der gewünschten Kabinentemperatur @ 0\mod_1195729761475_78.docx @ 2510 @ 3 @ 1

8.18.4 Setting the Desired Cab Temperature

Fig. 65

The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automatic mode.

Pos: 64.53.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press the value appears in the display. (press key 5 x) key until the desired

86

Pos: 64.53.6 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimabetrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 0\mod_1195730018068_78.docx @ 2529 @ 3 @ 1

8.18.5 Switch air conditioning On / Off

Cabin

Fig. 66

You can switch on the air conditioning with the key.

Air conditioning is now turned on; icon indicates air conditioning.

The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

Pos: 64.53.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the disappears.

key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The icon

87

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.8 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/REHEAT - Betrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 122\mod_1344498639264_78.docx @ 1117192 @ 3 @ 1

8.18.6 Switch REHEAT mode On / Off

Fig. 67

REHEAT mode = (demoisturising the cab air)

Switch on REHEAT mode with the

The display appears like this:

key.

REHEAT mode is now turned on. The icon indicates REHEAT mode.

Note

The compressor is permanently turned on. The evaporator fan speed is raised to 100%. If necessary, the control unit turns the heating on to keep room temperature at the setpoint value.

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.

Pos: 64.53.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the

The

key again turns off REHEAT mode.

icon no longer appears.

88

Pos: 64.53.10 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Manuelles Einstellen der Verdampferlüfterdrehzahl (2012-08-09 09:53:31) @ 0\mod_1195733653506_78.docx @ 2567 @ 3 @ 1

8.18.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speed

Cabin

Fig. 68

Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with the key.

The manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bar display (full bar display = 100%). The AUTO icon no longer appears.

Fan flashes for 5 seconds. During this time the fan speed can be increased with the key or lowered with the key in increments of 10%.

Note

The lowest fan speed that can be set is 30% (three bars are displayed).

Pos: 64.53.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the key twice reactivates AUTO mode. The Auto icon appears ; the

icons are no longer displayed.

and

89

Cabin

Pos: 64.53.12 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Umschalten der Temperaturanzeige in ° Fahrenheit @ 0\mod_1195734049209_78.docx @ 2586 @ 2 @ 1

8.18.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit

8

Fig. 69

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.

Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the

Fahrenheit.

key as well. The display switches to °

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.

Pressing the (8) key and

Pos: 64.53.13 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anzeige von Störungen im Display (2012-08-09 10:00:52) @ 0\mod_1195734281959_78.docx @ 2605 @ 3 @ 1

8.18.9

key again switches the display back to ° Celsius.

Showing Faults in the Display

Error code (F0)´

Fig. 70

Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator ( F0 ).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

90

Error code (FI)

Cabin

Fig 71

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The control is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Pos: 64.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

91

Cabin

Pos: 64.55 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Verstellbare Lüfterdüsen BM 420/500 (2012-08-09 10:14:03) @ 42\mod_1272517641193_78.docx @ 378245 @ 3 @ 1

8.19 Adjustable Fan Nozzles

1

1

1

3

Fig.72

Fan nozzles (1), adjustable

Note

Pos: 64.56 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Set the fan nozzles in such a way that the panes do not mist up.

1

BM 500 0184

92

Pos: 64.57 /BA/Kabine/Radioeinbau (2012-08-09 10:16:20) @ 0\mod_1195735722428_78.docx @ 2644 @ 2 @ 1

8.20 Radio

1

Cabin

Pos: 65 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 400 0215

Fig. 73:

1

ISO compartment for radio

Note

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

93

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Info-Center „EasyTouch“ @ 0\mod_1195737815318_78.docx @ 2663 @ 1 @ 1

9

Pos: 66.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.1.1 Overview

Pos: 66.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Info-Center Easy Touch Übersicht @ 149\mod_1361778360457_78.docx @ 1335125 @ @ 1

I

II

III

V

IV

Fig. 74

• I = Display

• II = Keys

1 to

8

(1 - 8)

• III = Keys to D

D

(A - D)

Pos: 66.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• V = Menu key

BM 420 0159

94

Pos: 66.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Allgemeine Beschreibung der Tasten_Drehpoti_Menütaste @ 0\mod_1195738501881_78.docx @ 2701 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

2

1

Pos: 66.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 75

The Info Centre informs you about the current actions and the current operating condition of the machine. You can use the Info Centre to make settings for the machine and start or stop actions. Its main components are:

Keys 1-8

Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no function.

Keys A-D

The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.

Rotary potentiometer (1)

The rotary potentiometer has two functions:

1

The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change settings and to select the desired menu in the menu level.

2

Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and saves the settings.

Menu key (2)

You can use the key with the rotary potentiometer to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to the basic screen.

1

95

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.7.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Display Beschreibung @ 0\mod_1195739127068_78.docx @ 2740 @ @ 1

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

7 8

V

B C D BM 400 0114

Fig. 76

Display (screen display)

The display is divided up into the following sections:

Status line (I):

• Time, number of errors, status display of mowing units

Information section:

• Engine information (II)

• Travelling gear information (III)

• Settings (IV and V)

Pos: 66.7.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Informationsbereich BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404219424823_78.docx @ 2061256 @ 2 @ 1

• Drive information (VI) (only in Field mode basic screen)

9.2 Information Section

Basic screen road travel Basic screen field mode

100

75

50

25

0

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 66.7.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 77

After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / Field" release switch, the basic screen "Road Travel" or "Field Mode" appears in the display.

96

Pos: 66.7.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile BiG M 500 ÜS/Bild @ 269\mod_1401983199919_78.docx @ 2036980 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.1 Status line (I)

I 15:36 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0102

Fig. 78

Pos: 66.7.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile Text BiG M 420/500 @ 269\mod_1401962457652_78.docx @ 2036442 @ @ 1

Symbol Designation

Error

Error central lubrication system

Description

– At least one error has occurred.

You can find the number of the present errors in front of the symbol.

– For error remedy, refer to operating instructions of central lubrication system.

Pos: 66.7.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile Tabelle BiG M 420 @ 270\mod_1402050620751_78.docx @ 2037801 @ @ 1

Headland Position

Lateral mowing unit left

Front mowing unit Lateral mowing unit right

Drive off drive on Drive off drive on Drive off drive on

Working position

Folded up

Pos: 66.7.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

97

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.7.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten BiG M 420 @ 131\mod_1348468320098_78.docx @ 1165550 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.2 Motor Data (II) Information Section

UPM

II

1080

2

0

100

75

50

25

0

20 40 60 80

110

R

R 70°C

1

B

Fig.79

1080

C D

5 6

7 8

BM 500 0106_1

Road mode: 850 - 1650 rpm

Field mode: 850 - 1900 rpm

0 20 40 60 80 110

Engine capacity as %

Pos: 66.7.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil3 Störleuchten Motorfehler BM420/500 und BiG X @ 115\mod_1339684399818_78.docx @ 1012501 @ @ 1

Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault) Stop immediately!

Inform the KRONE dealer or the KRONE customer service

Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)

Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible

Pos: 66.7.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil3 Störleuchten SCR-System weiß @ 175\mod_1372228621064_78.docx @ 1497035 @ @ 1

Fault indicator lamp white (error in the exhaust aftertreatment system (SCR system))

Please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Pos: 66.7.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil2 BM420/500 @ 131\mod_1348469206154_78.docx @ 1165699 @ @ 1

Cooling water temperature display.

Pos: 66.7.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling water temperature display temperature reaches the critical range.

Fuel gauge (1 diesel / 2 urea solution)

changes to yellow if the cooling water

R

R

Diesel fuel reserve display (appears in the display if the tank contains less than 10 per cent of the diesel fuel)

Urea solution reserve display

(appears in the display if the tank contains less than 20 per cent of the urea solution)

(Flashes if the tank contains less than 10 per cent of the urea solution)

98

Pos: 66.7.13.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III) Bild BM 400 @ 29\mod_1251200813705_78.docx @ 281322 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.3 Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

III

0.0

4

0.0

N km/h

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0116

Fig. 80

Pos: 66.7.13.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Tempomat @ 29\mod_1251199726596_78.docx @ 281172 @ @ 1

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control operation in km/h.

Pos: 66.7.13.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrgeschwindigkeit @ 29\mod_1251199875752_78.docx @ 281197 @ @ 1

Travelling speed

Road mode: 0 - 40 km/h

Pos: 66.7.13.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Beschleunigungsrampe @ 29\mod_1251199880768_78.docx @ 281222 @ @ 1

Acceleration ramp

Cruise control inactive

Field mode: 0 - 19 km/h

1 = Lowest acceleration ramp

Pos: 66.7.13.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrtrichtung @ 29\mod_1251199885768_78.docx @ 281247 @ @ 1

Direction of travel

2 = ... 3 = ... = Highest acceleration ramp

= Forward travel

Pos: 66.7.13.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Antriebsart @ 29\mod_1251199893346_78.docx @ 281272 @ @ 1

Type of drive

= Neutral (stopped) = Reverse travel

Axle sep. active

(only possible in Field mode)

Parking brake is applied

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems.

Pos: 66.7.13.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Bergab - Modus @ 70\mod_1305726024726_78.docx @ 639629 @ @ 1

Downhill mode

Pos: 66.7.13.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Autopilot @ 142\mod_1358153665545_78.docx @ 1266914 @ @ 1

The downhill mode symbol indicates to the driver that the speed of the machine is automatically restricted when travelling downhill.

Autopilot (Optionally Only in Field Mode)

Pos: 66.7.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Autopilot active Autopilot ready Autopilot inactive

99

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.7.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Einstellungen @ 0\mod_1195800021723_78.docx @ 2862 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.4 Information section of settings (IV and V)

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

7 8

V

Fig. 81

(see Chapter "Settings").

Pos: 66.7.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Antriebsdaten BiG M 420 @ 131\mod_1348472047808_78.docx @ 1165776 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.5

B C D BM 400 0114

Information Section Drive Information (VI)

5 6

VI

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0092

Fig. 82

Drive information appears only in the "Field Mode" basic screen.

970 rpm

Speed drive left

1070 rpm

Speed drive front

970 rpm

Speed drive right

970 rpm

Pos: 66.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Speed of left auger Speed of right auger

970 rpm

100

Pos: 66.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Schnellzugrifftasten am Grundbild @ 0\mod_1195803032020_78.docx @ 2907 @ 2 @ 1

9.3.1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen

The quick access keys can be used to perform functions directly from the basic screen or to bring up the appropriate submenu.

Pos: 66.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Bild BiG M 420 @ 132\mod_1348809983004_78.docx @ 1167746 @ 3 @ 1

Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional)

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 83

Pos: 66.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Text BiG M 420/500 @ 57\mod_1296204792046_78.docx @ 549897 @ @ 1

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode".

• Press the key or to display the hydraulically adjustable cutting height.

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" appears.

1.

= saved pre-set values

2. = saved pre-set values

3. = current cutting height values

Pos: 66.9.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

You can use the

A and

B

B keys to save pre-settings for cutting height.

= Save pre-set 1 cutting height

= Save pre-set 2 cutting height

101

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 2/2 BiG M 500 @ 81\mod_1316168422535_78.docx @ 715843 @ @ 1

Activating keys 1-8 sets the angle of the mowing units.

Fig. 84

Inclination Mowing units lateral left

Front mowing unit

Lateral mowing units right

Mowing unit all reduce

Key 5 Key Key Key 7 increase

Key 6 Key Key Key

Note

If all mowing units are selected, the angle of the front mowing unit is set first. Then the lateral mowing units are automatically adjusted to the value of the front mowing unit.

• Press the key

D

to display the basic screen.

Pos: 66.9.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

102

Pos: 66.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T1 BM400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093469796_78.docx @ 477992 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional)

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"

Lateral spring compensation can be used to adjust the ground pressure of the lateral mowing units to local conditions. In order to protect the sward, the load on the lateral mowing units must be relieved so that they do not jump when mowing, yet do not leave any brush marks on the ground.

Note

To set the pressure, lower both lateral mowing units to the ground and set the front axle to working position.

Pos: 66.9.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T2 Bild BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404218575813_78.docx @ 2061136 @ @ 1

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 85

Pos: 66.9.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T3 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093474375_78.docx @ 478018 @ @ 1 the 5 compensation.

5 or 6

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" appears.

(1) = saved values of pre-setting I

(2) = saved values of pre-setting II

(3) = current values of spring compensation

You can use the

A and

B

B keys to save pre-settings (I and II) for hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure).

I = Save pre-setting I

II = Save pre-setting II the

7

key for

Pos: 66.9.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating key for

brings up pre-setting (I).

brings up pre-setting (II).

103

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T4 BM 400/420 @ 274\mod_1404283222140_78.docx @ 2062395 @ @ 1

Note

Different lateral mower weights for mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping

(BSS) Effect: Different group pressure.

With option "Mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping", the weight of the right mowing unit is greater than the weight of the left mowing unit. This is caused by the movement of the drive. Accordingly the compensation pressure must be set about 5 bar higher for the right mowing unit.

Fig. 86:

Activating keys 1-4 increases or reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units.

Pressure Mowing units lateral left Mowing units lateral right reduce Key Key increase

Key

Pos: 66.9.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

High compensation pressure =

Lower compensation pressure =

Key lower ground pressure higher ground pressure

104

Pos: 66.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendaten-Zähler @ 274\mod_1404283801560_78.docx @ 2062594 @ 3 @ 1

9.3.3 Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 87

Appears in the basic screen “Road Operation and Field Mode”

key under the softkey for bringing up the customer counter

Customer data counter

Designation

1

2

3

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

Counter (active counters are highlighted in colour)

Operating hours counter (h)

Working hours counter (h)

Odometer (km)

Surface counter ha Surface in hectares

Øha / h Average surface hectares per hour

Fuel consumption

L/h Current average consumption

Ø L/ha Current average consumption per hectare

4

10

4.1

4.2

Display information of the currently active counter

Display of the activated customer counter (for example Client 1)

Selected surface counter

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

Freely usable numeric input field (for example to assign several different cultivated areas to the customer record)

105

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendatensatz (1) ändern bzw. neuanlegen @ 291\mod_1410761146365_78.docx @ 2297135 @ 3 @ 1

9.3.4 Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one

5 6

1

7 8

2

B C D

BM4000109_2

Fig. 88

A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select the customer record you want to modify; select a free customer record to create a new entry with the and keys.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field.

• You can change the customer record or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

Pos: 66.9.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

106

Pos: 66.9.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Zähler ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 274\mod_1404292575380_78.docx @ 2063551 @ 4 @ 1

9.3.4.1 Switching the counter on or off

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 89 and 6 keys to turn the counter on key brings up the basic screen.

and off .

107

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Nutzfläche eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 274\mod_1404291551680_78.docx @ 2063401 @ 4 @ 1

9.3.4.2 Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter

1

3

Fig. 90

It is possible to assign up to 10 areas to each customer counter. However, it is also possible to select just one area. The counters shown in (3) are assigned to the selected area.

You can either delete individual areas or all areas of a customer counter. When deleting the area, all counters displayed in (3) are reset to zero.

Pos: 66.9.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Nutzfläche für einen Kundensatz zuordnen bzw. auswählen @ 175\mod_1372325259523_78.docx @ 1499449 @ @ 1

Assigning or selecting the area for a customer record

The selection of the right customer record is a prerequisite for this.

• Press or key until the area appears in the input field (1).

Pos: 66.9.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einzelne Nutzflächen eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 175\mod_1372324988934_78.docx @ 1499421 @ @ 1

Deleting single areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press key until the area to be deleted appears in the input field (1). appears.

key under the softkey to delete the area, an information message “Delete?”

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

Note

Pos: 66.9.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Repeat deletion of the counters for each created area, if necessary.

108

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Alle Nutzflächen eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 175\mod_1372324755685_78.docx @ 1499393 @ @ 1

Deleting all areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press or key until the sigma sign ( ) appears in the input field (1).

• To delete all areas, press all areas?” appears.

C key under the softkey , an information message “Delete

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

Pos: 66.9.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Wechseln zu den allgemeinen Zähler (Maschinendaten-Zähler) @ 29\mod_1251278517328_78.docx @ 282578 @ 4 @ 1

9.3.4.3 Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters)

Pos: 66.9.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 the key under the softkey brings up the "Counters and machine data" menu.

For more information see Section "Counters and Machine Data"

109

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Straßenfahrt BM 420 @ 132\mod_1348825382002_78.docx @ 1168901 @ 34 @ 1

9.3.5

9.3.5.1

Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension"

From the "Road travel" basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 66.9.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 91

When travelling on public roads, the front axle must be lowered to reach a transport height of max. 4 m.

key lowers axle suspension with inching.

110

Pos: 66.9.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Bild BM 420 @ 132\mod_1348825737551_78.docx @ 1168930 @ 4 @ 1

9.3.5.2 From the "Field mode" basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 92

Pos: 66.9.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Text BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288095723421_78.docx @ 478122 @ @ 1 the C key brings up the "Hydraulic axle suspension" submenu.

The "Hydraulic axle suspension" menu appears.

• Activating or key for lifting axle suspension. (inching)

• Activating or key to the 5 or 6 key for

approaching mowing position. (inching)

lowering axle suspension. (inching)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

= Sensor alive (axle suspension is located under the working position)

= Sensor not alive (axle suspension is located above the working position) the D key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 66.9.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

111

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.9.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einstellungen Maschine BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404307912456_78.docx @ 2064683 @ 3 @ 1

9.3.6 Quick access "Machine settings"

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 93

Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode" key brings up menu level "Machine setting".

The "Machine settings" menu appears.

Pos: 66.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For more information, see chapter "Machine settings"

112

Pos: 66.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Menüebene @ 80\mod_1315900872940_78.docx @ 708317 @ 2 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüebene Kurzüberblick BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404367907320_78.docx @ 2065265 @ @ 1

Short Overview

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

1

Settings

1-1

Parameter

1-1-1

Work

1-2

Setting Machine

1-3

Units

1-4

Language

1-5

Display

1-5-4

Direction of Rotation

1-5-5

Configuring Status Line

1-6

Date/Time

1-9

Address Owner

1-5-1

Contrast

1-5-2

Beeper

113

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

2

Counter

3

Maintenance

3-1

Calibrating Cutting Height

3-3

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System

3-5

Manual Mode (only accessible for technicians)

4

Service

4-1

Diagnostics

4-1-1

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation Optional

4-1-4

Cutting Height Optional

4-1-5

Swath Hood Optional

4-1-6

Sideshift Optional

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps Optional

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

114

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

4-1-10

Work

4-1-11

CAN Bus

4-1-12

Traction Drive

4-1-13

Electronics

4-1-14

Diesel Engine

4-1-15

Multi-Function Lever

4-1-16

Control Unit Console

4-1-17

Terminal

115

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu

4-2

1

2

: n

4-3

Designation

Error List

Fitter's Section

4-4

Information

4-4-1

Joystick

5

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Display Software Packages

Basic Screen

Pos: 66.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

116

Pos: 66.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüebene aufrufen @ 0\mod_1196058555821_78.docx @ 3161 @ 3 @ 1

9.4.1 Bringing up a Menu Level

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 94

• You can bring up a menu level with the

The display indicates the menu level.

The menu level is divided into five main menus: key on the rotary potentiometer.

= Main menu 1 "Settings"

= Main menu 2 "Counters"

= Main menu 3 "Maintenance"

= Main menu 4 "Service"

= Main menu 5 "Basic screen"

Pos: 66.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can close the menu level that was called with on the rotary potentiometer.

117

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Hauptmenü 1 „Einstellungen“ @ 89\mod_1322031869516_78.docx @ 757694 @ 2 @ 1

9.5 Main menu 1 "Settings"

Pos: 66.16.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 95

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".

The main menu, "Settings", is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

= Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"

= Menu 1-3 "Units"

= Menu 1-4 "Language"

= Menu 1-5 "Display"

= Menu 1-6 "Date/time"

= Menu 1-9 "Owner's address" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

118

Pos: 66.16.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Menü 1-1 Parameter BiG M 400 @ 9\mod_1219816874593_78.docx @ 122840 @ 2 @ 1

9.6 Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0019_1

Fig. 96:

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-1 "Parameters" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the menu level "Parameters".

The "Parameter" menu is divided into two sub-menus:

Pos: 66.16.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= Menu 1-1-10 "Work parameters"

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired menu.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the parameters of the selected menu to be displayed or the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

119

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Eingabe von Parametern @ 41\mod_1271221822261_78.docx @ 368585 @ 3 @ 1

9.6.1 Entering parameters

Fig. 97

Note

As long as data is being read, the current process can be stopped by pressing the key next to the softkey.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit the input field and the value that was entered is applied.

Note

To apply the default setting values, press the 5 key next to the softkey.

• To jump back to the screen that was previously displayed, press the 7 key next to the softkey.

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Note

Pos: 66.16.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

For additional information on the individual parameters, please refer to the parameter list in appendix "Parameter List".

120

Pos: 66.16.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Einstellung Maschine BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404369456555_78.docx @ 2065523 @ 2 @ 1

9.7 Menu 1-2 „Machine Setting“

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 98

Main menu 1 “Settings” is displayed.

• Select menu 1-3 “Machine Setting” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine Setting".

The “Machine Setting” menu is divided into 2 pages:

Pos: 66.16.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 3 @ 51\mod_1288099830734_78.docx @ 478252 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 3:

Pos: 66.16.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Menüerkärung Tasten Einstellung Maschine @ 28\mod_1250603053175_78.docx @ 275901 @ @ 1 the B key to bring up the previous page of the "Machine setting" menu. the C key to bring up the next page of the "Machine setting" menu. the D key brings up the basic screen.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 66.16.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

121

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite1/3) @ 51\mod_1288102051312_78.docx @ 478382 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 1/3)

Pos: 66.16.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1a) BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404371138407_78.docx @ 2065775 @ @ 1

Fig. 99

1) Selection between

CV = tines conditioner and

CRI= roller conditioner

2) Setting for lifting mechanism, front axle on headland

Front axle can only be raised in manual mode.

Semi

The semi-automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected.

Auto

Pos: 66.16.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position,

• as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected or

• as soon as a mowing unit is lowered from the headland position into the operating position. In addition, the automatic lifting mechanism lifts the front axle again as soon as the “Lifting all Mowing Units" function is actuated on the multi-function lever.

122

Pos: 66.16.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Einstellung Federentlastung (3)_Überschnitt einstellen (4) @ 279\mod_1405346789463_78.docx @ 2149975 @ @ 1

CV

50

cm

Semi

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 100

3) Setting spring compensation (optional)

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched on.

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched off.

4) Adjusting the overcut in cm / inch

Pos: 66.16.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Auswahl von Mähwerks- Zusatzausrüstungen (optional) (5) @ 174\mod_1371189296325_78.docx @ 1486835 @ @ 1

5) Selection of mowing unit additional equipment (optional)

Both augers selected

Only right hand auger selected

Only left hand auger selected

No auger selected

Hay hood selected

Pos: 66.16.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe ein-/ausschalten (optional) (6) @ 174\mod_1371190175220_78.docx @ 1486874 @ @ 1

6) Switch hydraulically adjustable cutting height on and off (optional) hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched on. hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched off.

Pos: 66.16.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

123

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite2/3) @ 51\mod_1288101419671_78.docx @ 478330 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.16.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 2/3) BiG M 420 Frontklappen / Hangausgleich @ 132\mod_1349083231605_78.docx @ 1169526 @ @ 1

Fig. 101

Setting the Hydraulic Front Flaps (Optional)

Symbol Designation

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched on

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched off

Pos: 66.16.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Setting the Sideshift (optional)

Symbol Designation

Sideshift switched on

Sideshift switched off

124

Pos: 66.16.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite3/3) @ 51\mod_1288102821890_78.docx @ 478434 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.16.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Bild Fahrhebel NEU @ 274\mod_1404372998415_78.docx @ 2066114 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

10 9

BM 500 0130

Fig.102

Pos: 66.16.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 3/3) Text BM 420/500 Zeit Wegsteuerung @ 51\mod_1288100911312_78.docx @ 478304 @ @ 1

1) Setting time / distance control

The following descriptions refer to function (9,10) "Raise/lower all mowing units" on the multifunction lever.

Time control (determines the delay time of lifting or lowering the lateral mowing units to the front mowing unit)

Distance control (determines the distance still to be covered before the lateral mowing units are raised or lowered to the front mowing unit).

2) Input field: Delay time to raise lateral mowing units.

3) Input field: Delay time to lower lateral mowing units.

4) Input field: Distance to be covered before lifting lateral mowing units.

Pos: 66.16.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

5) Input field: Distance to be covered before lowering lateral mowing units.

125

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-3 „Einheiten“ @ 0\mod_1197532786335_78.docx @ 24301 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.1 Menu 1-3 "Units"

Fig. 103

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-3 "Units" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the selected measuring units. The currently set measuring unit is highlighted in colour.

= Anglo-American units active

= English/American units active

= Metric (SI) units

Pos: 66.16.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= Metric (SI) units inactive

Setting the measuring units:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

126

Pos: 66.16.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-4 „Sprache“ @ 275\mod_1404374634904_78.docx @ 2066266 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.2 Menu 1-4 "Language"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 104

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-4 "Language" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the language selection.

Set language

(1) = currently set language

(2)= shows the selected language

• You can select the language you want with the rotary potentiometer.

• To confirm the selection, press the rotary potentiometer. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Note

Pos: 66.16.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again)

127

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5 „Display“ @ 89\mod_1322042220039_78.docx @ 758191 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.3 Menu 1-5 "Display"

5 6

7 8

Pos: 66.16.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

B C D

BM4000225_1

Fig. 105

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-5 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 1-5 "Display".

The "Display" menu is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

= Menu 1-5-2 "Beeper"

= Menu 1-5-4 "Direction of Rotation"

= Menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

128

Pos: 66.16.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-1 „Kontrast“ @ 9\mod_1219844730062_78.docx @ 124157 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 106

You can adjust the brightness of the display in the "Contrast" Diagnostics menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Contrast" setting appears.

= Day design

= Night design

The value after the symbols /

Setting and saving the brightness

indicates the set brightness value.

Pos: 66.16.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The higher the value after the / symbols the greater the brightness of the display.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to make the desired selection. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or reduces the value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

129

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper @ 89\mod_1322042675069_78.docx @ 758419 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.5 Menu 1-5-2 Beeper

Pic. 107

The acoustic signal (beeper) for alarm messages, information messages and for pressing a key can be activated and deactivated in this menu. For alarm messages and information messages the duration of the tone can be set additionally.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-2 "Beeper" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display indicates the beeper settings.

= Alarm Message

= Key pressed

Beeper function

= Information message

Pos: 66.16.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= Beeper inactive = Beeper active

= Beeper limited by time

Activate / deactivate beeper

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired function

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

130

Pos: 66.16.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper zeitlich begrenzen @ 41\mod_1271228361090_78.docx @ 368764 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.6 Beeper limited by time

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 108

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting (

• Press the rotary potentiometer (a new input field appears).

).

• Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to a new input field. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

Pos: 66.16.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

131

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-4 Drehrichtung @ 89\mod_1322043577709_78.docx @ 758566 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation

Fig. 109

The direction of rotation of the rotary potentiometer for scrolling can be changed in this menu.

The rotary potentiometer is set in the factory so that turning it to the left scrolls down and turning it to the right scrolls up (as indicated by the blue arrow) (1).

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-4 "Direction of rotation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows a list for which the direction of rotation can be changed for the rotary potentiometer.

• Activating or parameter list

key to change the direction of rotation for the

• Activating or key to change the direction of rotation for input fields. the 5 or 6 key to change the direction of rotation for menus.

Note

The blue arrow (1) indicates the direction of rotation for the rotary potentiometer to scroll down. the B key under the softkey brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 66.16.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• To apply the default setting values, press the key under the softkey.

132

Pos: 66.16.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-5 Statuszeile konfigurieren @ 89\mod_1322043912248_78.docx @ 758654 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.8 Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Mä rz

24

Montag

Fig. 110

The first field (1) of the status display for the basic screens "Road travel/Field mode“ can be adjusted individually in this menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The selection options of the displays (2) for the first field (1) of the status line are shown.

Possible displays (2):

= Time

März

24

Montag

= Time and date

= Diesel fuel consumption per hour

/

= Hectares per hour

/

= Diesel fuel consumption per hectare

/

To change the display for the status line:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired display. The display is highlighted in colour.

• To accept the selected display, press the rotary potentiometer

The display that was just selected now appears in the basic screens

Pos: 66.16.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key under the softkey opens the basic screen.

133

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.16.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-6 „Datum/Uhrzeit“ @ 89\mod_1322060573514_78.docx @ 759970 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.9 Menu 1-6 Date/time

Pos: 66.16.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 111

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-6 "Date/time" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the date and the time.

To set date/time

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• Set the desired date/time with the rotary potentiometer.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection field.

134

Pos: 66.16.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-9 „Adresse Lohnunternehmer“ @ 89\mod_1322128074780_78.docx @ 761468 @ 3 @ 1

9.7.10 Menu 1-9 Owner's address

März

24

Montag

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 112

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-9 "Owner's address" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows the owner's address.

Note

A maximum of 30 characters can be entered in the input field. The information is used each time a print job is sent to the CAN printer. If a line contains no characters (including no spaces), that line will not be considered for printing.

To set the address:

1 2

Fig. 113

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field

• You can change the text or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back softkey opens the basic screen

Pos: 66.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

135

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.18.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 „Zähler“ @ 275\mod_1404379598824_78.docx @ 2066800 @ 23 @ 1

9.8 Main Menu 2 Counters

Fig. 114

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters.

Counter level (sets)

9.8.1

Pos: 66.18.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= total counter (cannot be deleted)

= counter level 1 (can be deleted)

= counter level 2 (can be deleted)

= counter level 3 (can be deleted)

Machine Data Counter

Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)

= operating hour counter (h)

= working hours counter (h)

= surface counter (ha)

= odometer (both road and field mode)

= fuel consumption (l)

136

Pos: 66.18.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 Löschen der Maschinendatenzähler @ 275\mod_1404386973100_78.docx @ 2067159 @ 43 @ 1

9.8.1.1 Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 115

Machine data for counter levels (sets) 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters. deleted. the key for or the key to select the counter level (1) to be key under the softkey deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.) key under the

Switching to Customer DataCounters softkey brings up the basic screen

9.8.2

Pos: 66.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 brings up the "Customer data counter" menu.

For more information, see Section "Customer Data Counters"

137

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3/Hauptmenü 3 „Wartung“ BiG M 420 @ 275\mod_1404390479600_78.docx @ 2067500 @ 2 @ 1

9.9 Main Menu 3 Maintenance

The “Maintenance” main menu is divided into three menus:

3-1

Main Menu 3 Maintenance

Designation

Bringing up “Calibrating Cutting Height”

3-3

Bringing up “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System”

3-5

Bringing up Manual Mode (only accessible for technicians)

Fig. 116

Pos: 66.20.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 3 “Maintenance”

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer

138

Pos: 66.20.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe“ @ 28\mod_1250833598028_78.docx @ 277855 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"

Pos: 66.20.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schwenken der Mähwerke @ 28\mod_1250833011700_78.docx @ 277801 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

Pos: 66.20.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehenes zuschalten von Antrieben @ 28\mod_1250833758403_78.docx @ 277880 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Unexpected switching on of drives

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Observe the following instructions very precisely!

Pos: 66.20.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe“ BiG M 420 @ 132\mod_1349329326587_78.docx @ 1170854 @ @ 1

The sensors have been pre-adjusted to record cutting height in the factory. Heavy demand and the setting of components may cause an offset in the cutting pattern of the right / left and front mowing unit. If this happens, the sensors must be recalibrated.

• Perform calibration on an even and solid surface.

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch.

• You can use the C "Hydraulic Axle Suspension" key to move from the basic screen to mowing position (refer to chapter entitled “Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”).

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Pos: 66.20.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung alle Mähwerke auf 0° einstellen“ Bild @ 28\mod_1250668612774_78.docx @ 276409 @ @ 1

Adjust all mowing units to 0°.

3-1

5 6

7 8

BM 500 0008

Fig. 117

Pos: 66.20.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe" Menü aufrufen Text @ 28\mod_1250669698133_78.docx @ 276434 @ @ 1

To do this:

B C D

Pos: 66.20.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the cutting height setting.

139

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 Alle Mähwerke auf 0° einstellen ausrichten @ 46\mod_1283317596765_78.docx @ 448365 @ @ 1

Aligning the Mowing Units

Fig. 118

Front mowing unit:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

1 or

2 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit right:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

3 or

4 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit left:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

5 or

6

6 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

1 2

• Loosen the angle of rotation sensors on the right and left mowing unit and set them in the oblong hole until a value (1) of about 2900 mV to 3100 mV appears in the display

(calibration screen).

• Screw the angle of rotation sensors tightly into place.

Save sensor value (2) for inclination 0°

• Turn the rotary potentiometer to jump to the appropriate input field (2) (the input field is highlighted in colour).

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• When you press the rotary potentiometer again, the value (1) for inclination 0° is applied in the input field (2).

Pos: 66.20.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The sensor for the front mowing unit is not adjustable. However, the value must be accepted at this point.

140

Pos: 66.20.12.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/ISOBUS Lenksystem kalibrieren @ 275\mod_1404397033672_78.docx @ 2067739 @ 2 @ 1

9.10

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System

WARNING! –

Risk of injury due to the spontaneous movement of parts (e. g. steering axle)

• No persons may remain in the danger zone.

After replacing sensor system and actuator, the ISOBUS steering system must be recalibrated.

The following order must be adhered to for calibrating:

• Calibrate steering angle

• Calibrate steering (valves) (automatically or manually)

• Enter the steering radius

The calibrated values are checked for plausibility. The error message appears next to the calibrated value if a value is outside the valid range. The value cannot be saved.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up the main menus with menu key.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 66.20.12.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenksystem Bild @ 142\mod_1358321317872_78.docx @ 1272443 @ @ 1

850

4

1

182 305

2

520

3

Fig. 119

Pos: 66.20.12.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenksystem Menüerklärung: Lenkwinkelsensor kalibrieren @ 142\mod_1358321797351_78.docx @ 1272472 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos. Meaning

Steering angle sensor (The value of the selected steering angle sensor is displayed)

1 Steering angle left

2 Straight-ahead driving

3 Steering angle right

4 Engine speed

Pos: 66.20.12.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

141

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkwinkelsensor kalibrieren @ 275\mod_1404727549231_78.docx @ 2071559 @ 3 @ 1

9.10.1 Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor

Calibrating Steering Angle Left

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 215-300 for left turn.

The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is smaller than 215.

If the value is larger than 300, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is correctly assembled.

The steering angle sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum left position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Left” with the rotary potentiometer to save the actual value, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Straight-Ahead Driving

When driving straight-ahead, the value for the straight-ahead driving steering angle sensor must be 320 - 420. The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is not within the range

320 - 420.

• Steer the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position to move the steering axle to the centre position.

• Select the input field “Straight-Ahead Driving” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Right

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 450 - 650 for right turn.

If the value is larger than 650, the steering angle sensor must be readjusted.

If the value is smaller than 450, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is installed in a correct way.

The steering sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum right position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Right” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Pos: 66.20.12.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Calibration must be restarted if the steering angle sensor is readjusted during the calibration process.

142

Pos: 66.20.12.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung (Ventile)automatisch kalibrieren ÜS @ 134\mod_1351058496302_78.docx @ 1193325 @ 2 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.11 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically

Pos: 66.20.12.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/WARNUNG- Verletzungsgefahr durch Bewegung der Lenkachse @ 134\mod_1351058403021_78.docx @ 1193297 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury due to the movement of the steering axle

The valves are automatically actuated when starting the calibration. The steering axle moves accordingly.

• No persons may remain in the danger zone (steering axle).

Pos: 66.20.12.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Einführtext @ 134\mod_1351058338610_78.docx @ 1193269 @ @ 1

The valve currents are recorded by the system and saved during the automatic calibration. The process may take a few minutes. When starting the calibration, the steering is first controlled completely to the right. Then the system increases the valve current for the left valve until the system detects that a rotary movement takes place on the steering axle. Consequently, this current value will be saved as new minimum current. This process is repeated for the right valve.

The calibration will be interrupted as soon as the steering wheel is moved or the driver leaves the seat.

Pos: 66.20.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Bild @ 142\mod_1358322634268_78.docx @ 1272541 @ @ 1

3

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

1900

940 mA

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

1

Fehler-Nr.

2

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

4

Pos: 66.20.12.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 120

143

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Menüerklärung @ 134\mod_1351058120734_78.docx @ 1193213 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos. Meaning

1 Status of the calibration:

Valve Y52 “Steering Left” is calibrated.

Valve Y51 “Steering Right” is calibrated.

STOP

Calibration has been successful and values are saved.

The calibration process has been stopped.

2

An error has occurred.

Error number with symbol .

3

Calibration not running.

Calibration running.

4

Pos: 66.20.12.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Vorgang @ 175\mod_1372312811058_78.docx @ 1498534 @ @ 1

STOP

Stop the calibration process.

Bring up the previous page.

850

4

1900

1

182 305

2

520

3

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

Fig. 121 Calibrating ISOBUS steering system Calibrating steering

A prerequisite for calibrating the valves is that the steering angle sensor has been set and calibrated correctly before.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up main menus with menu key .

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Calibrating Steering” menu.

144

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

Info centre "EasyTouch"

3

1900

940 mA

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

1

Fehler-Nr.

2

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

4

Fig. 122

Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone of the steering axle.

• Press key for softkey“ “ to start calibration.

• Press key for

STOP

to finish calibration process.

• Press key for to bring up the previous view.

Pos: 66.20.12.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

After the calibration is complete, the symbol appears for approx. 3 seconds.

145

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Fehlerliste Text @ 134\mod_1351057864536_78.docx @ 1193157 @ @ 1

If an error occurs during calibration, the calibration process will be interrupted and the corresponding error will be displayed.

Calibrating Steering Error List Automatically

Pos: 66.20.12.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Fehlerliste Tabelle @ 134\mod_1351056606429_78.docx @ 1193129 @ @ 1

No.

Symbol

Meaning Cause / remedy

1

2

3

4

5

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is smaller than the calibrated value “Steering completely left”.

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is bigger than the calibrated value “Steering completely right”.

Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

The valve Y52 “Steering left” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become smaller. However, the sensor value has become bigger.

The valve Y51 “Steering right” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become bigger. However, the sensor value has become smaller.

Although the valve Y52

“Steering left” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The left-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the right.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The right-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the left.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

6 Although the valve Y51

“Steering Right” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

• Hydraulic valve Y52 “Steering Left” incorrect.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Hydraulic valve Y51 “Steering right” defective.

146

Info centre "EasyTouch"

No.

Symbol

7 and 9

8 and 10

11

Meaning

Cable break Y52 valve steering left

Cable break Y51 valve steering right

Pressure has been detected on the pressure sensor B46

“Pressure steering”.

Cause / remedy

• Cable break to the valve Y52 “Steering left”

• Valve coil Y52 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Cable break to the valve Y51 “Steering right”.

• Valve coil Y51 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Steering intervention on the steering wheel.

• Pressure sensor B46 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

Pos: 66.20.12.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung manuell kalibrieren @ 134\mod_1351056504714_78.docx @ 1193101 @ 3 @ 1

9.11.1 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually

Steering Valve on Left

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Current Value Valve Left” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the left valve is updated.

Steering Valve on Right

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Steering Valve on Right” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

Pos: 66.20.12.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the right valve is updated.

147

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.12.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkradius einstellen @ 275\mod_1404450847730_78.docx @ 2068125 @ 2 @ 1

9.12 Setting the Steering Radius

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

1 2

Fig. 123

After the steering angle sensor and the valves for the steering have been calibrated, the steering radius must be determined and entered.

Pos: 66.20.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Setting the Steering Radius” menu.

• Turn the steering wheel to the left up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

To save the current value, select the rotary potentiometer (1), the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

• Turn the steering wheel to the right up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

• To save the current value, select the input field (2) with the rotary potentiometer, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

ISOBUS steering system is now calibrated.

148

Pos: 66.20.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Menü 3-5 „Handbetrieb“ @ 132\mod_1349333816049_78.docx @ 1170912 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

9.12.1 Menu 3-5 „Manual Mode“

Pos: 66.20.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.20.16 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Handbetrieb Schwenken der Mähwerke @ 29\mod_1251188626799_78.docx @ 280962 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

• Carelessness when you use manual mode can cause damage to the machine (watch out for possible collisions when swivelling the mowing units in and out).

Pos: 66.20.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-5 „Handbetrieb“ BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349332153525_78.docx @ 1170883 @ @ 1

BM 400 0119_2

Fig. 124

If the multifunction lever or the sensor system is defective, the mowing units can be adjusted inching via manual mode.

Inching means that there is no float position when lowering the mowing units.

Moreover, this menu item allows you to set the cutting heights of the mowing units.

• Press menu key to bring up “Manual Mode” menu.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-5 “Manual Mode” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows Manual Mode.

Pos: 66.20.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Manual mode is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Manual mode “Lifting/Lowering Mowing Units”

Page 2: Manual mode “Setting Cutting Height”

149

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.20.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-8/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251107696463_78.docx @ 279672 @ @ 1

• Press the key C to open the next page of the menu.

• Press the key B to open the previous page of the menu.

• Press the key

D

to display the basic screen.

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.20.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.20.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

150

Pos: 66.20.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Symbolerklärung @ 0\mod_1197552930351_78.docx @ 26011 @ @ 1

Explanation of symbols:

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 125

= raise front mowing unit inching with the

= lower front mowing unit inching with the key. key.

= fold down left mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= fold down right mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= lower left mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

5

= lower right mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

6

= raise left mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

7

= raise right mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

151

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.20.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197556508007_78.docx @ 26092 @ 3 @ 1

9.12.2 Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 66.20.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Sensor B14_15_48_49 @ 9\mod_1219909987241_78.docx @ 124321 @ @ 1

Fig. 126

= Sensor B15 position mowing unit left

= Sensor B14 position mowing unit right

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Pos: 66.20.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 66.20.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Aufrufen Grundbild/Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197556942913_78.docx @ 26130 @ @ 1 the

D key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 66.20.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

152

Pos: 66.20.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe (Seite 2/2) @ 132\mod_1349339037229_78.docx @ 1171145 @ @ 1

Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting Height (Page 2/2)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1

Fig. 127

Activating keys 1-6 sets the inclination of the mowing units.

Inclination Mowing unit lateral left

Front mowing unit Mowing unit lateral right

Reduce

key 5 key key

Increase

Pos: 66.20.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-8/Sensorübersicht @ 29\mod_1251119423573_78.docx @ 280119 @ @ 1

Sensor overview:

Pos: 66.20.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Sensor B 41/42/43 Tabelle @ 132\mod_1349339370125_78.docx @ 1171170 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B43

B42

B41

Pos: 66.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

key 6 key

Sensor not OK red Description

key

Cutting height front mowing unit

Cutting height lateral mowing unit right

Cutting height lateral mowing unit left

153

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Hauptmenü 4 Service @ 0\mod_1197557899632_78.docx @ 26358 @ 2 @ 1

9.13 Main Menu 4 Service

Pos: 66.22.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 128

• You can bring up a menu level with the key o n the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 4 "Service" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4 "Service".

The main menu "Service" is divided up into four menus:

= Menu 4-1 "Diagnostics"

= Menu 4-2 "Error list"

= Menü 4-3 "Fitter's section (password-protected")

= Menu 4-4 "Information" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

154

Pos: 66.22.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 „Diagnose“ aufrufen BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380176295599_78.docx @ 1610707 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.1 Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 129

• Press menu key to bring up “Diagnostics” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Service” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4-1 “Diagnostics”.

Pos: 66.22.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 „Diagnose“ Menüs BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372326765399_78.docx @ 1499477 @ @ 1

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

5 Designation

4-1-1

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation

4-1-4

Cutting Height

4-1-5

Swath Hood

4-1-6

Sideshift

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

4-1-10

Work

4-1-11

CAN Bus

4-1-12

Traction Drive

155

Info centre "EasyTouch"

4-1-13

Electronics

4-1-14

Diesel Engine

4-1-15

Multi-Function Lever

4-1-16

Control Unit Console

4-1-17

Terminal

Pos: 66.22.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

156

Pos: 66.22.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige nicht erfüllter Freigabebedingungen für die Diagnose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349344753454_78.docx @ 1171277 @ @ 1

Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0120

Fig. 130

Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been met but which must be met to be able to perform diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in each case.

Symbol Meaning

Pos: 66.22.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1900

RPM

Diesel engine speed not at 1900 rpm

Diesel engine has not been started

GO

Diesel engine is not off

S TOP

Speed of vehicle is not correct

V > 0

Turn axle separation release switch on or off

Turn the autopilot release switch on or off

Turn the travelling gear release switch on or off

Turn road/field release switch on or off

Turn release switch for parking brake on or off

Seat switch (driver's seat is unoccupied)

Open or close door

157

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige möglicher Störungen für die Diagnose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349345223062_78.docx @ 1171306 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.2 Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0121

Fig. 131

The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).

Error CAN* to engine control

BEK

Error CAN* to CUC (control unit console)

DIOM

Error CAN* to DIOM

Error CAN* to joystick

KMC1

Error CAN* to KMC1 (KMC = Krone-machine controller)

SD

Error CAN* to SD (Smartdrive)

Pos: 66.22.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Error CAN* to joystick

*) CAN = Controler-Area-Network

158

Pos: 66.22.10.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1-1 „Diagnose Achsfederung“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283323788093_78.docx @ 448535 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.3 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 132

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-1 "Diagnostics of axle suspension" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Axle suspension diagnostics appears.

The "Axle suspension" diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.10.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.10.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.10.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

159

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.10.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Sensor B20 Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1197610185837_78.docx @ 26645 @ @ 1

Sensor Test (page 1/2)

Fig. 133

Status display of general sensors (2)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

Pos: 66.22.10.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 66.22.10.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/2) @ 0\mod_1197610625431_78.docx @ 26684 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/2)

Pos: 66.22.10.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.10.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.10.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.10.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.10.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

160

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.10.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Aktorentest Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611281618_78.docx @ 26741 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the “Axle suspension” function.

1

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0041

B C D

Fig. 134

(1) Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.10.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.10.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Tabelle Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611724790_78.docx @ 26779 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to axle suspension.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y15 Lifting axle suspension

Y16 Lowering axle suspension

5 6

Pos: 66.22.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

161

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Menü 4-1-3 „Diagnose Federendtlastung" @ 46\mod_1283325482906_78.docx @ 448591 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.4 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

Fig. 135

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-3 "Diagnostics of spring compensation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Spring compensation diagnostics appears.

The "Spring compensation" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.12.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.12.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.12.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

162

Pos: 66.22.12.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Sensortest Federentlastung (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197617848837_78.docx @ 28267 @ @ 1

Sensor test spring compensation (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 136:

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the spring compensation function.

Sensor Sensor OK

B44

B45 green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

Spring compensation left

Spring compensation right

163

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.12.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.12.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.12.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.12.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

164

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618876212_78.docx @ 28305 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

Fig. 137

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.12.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.12.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.12.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.12.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.12.19 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.12.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.12.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.12.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

166

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.12.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197621399243_78.docx @ 28384 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

1 2

5 6

7 8

B C D

Fig. 138

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.12.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.12.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Tabelle Aktoren Federentlastung @ 0\mod_1197620752884_78.docx @ 28364 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to spring compensation.

Valve Icon Description

BM 400 0045

Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y31 Spring compensation right

Y42 Spring compensation left

Pos: 66.22.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

167

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283328540437_78.docx @ 448674 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.5 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height

4-1-4

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0052_1

Fig. 139

Pos: 66.22.14.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251361156886_78.docx @ 284896 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-4 "Diagnostics of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Cutting height diagnostics appears.

The "Cutting height" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 66.22.14.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.14.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.14.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

168

Pos: 66.22.14.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Sensortest Schnitthöhe (2) (Seite 1/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283329291171_78.docx @ 448702 @ @ 1

Sensor test cutting height (2) (page 1/4)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 140

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the cutting height.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B43 Cutting height – front mowing unit

B42

B41

Cutting height – right lateral mowing unit

Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit

169

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

170

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (2/4) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404459439391_78.docx @ 2068237 @ @ 1

1

2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0047_2

Fig. 141

Pos: 66.22.14.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.14.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.14.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

171

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.22 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

172

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (3/4) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404719079435_78.docx @ 2070475 @ @ 1

2

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0048_2

Fig. 142

Pos: 66.22.14.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.14.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 3/4 @ 46\mod_1283340572046_78.docx @ 449425 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y35 Cutting height right 1

Y36 Cutting height right 2

Y37 Cutting height – front mowing unit 1

5 6

Pos: 66.22.14.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y38 Cutting height – front mowing unit 2

7

173

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 66.22.14.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.14.34 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.14.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.14.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.14.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

174

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.14.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 66.22.14.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283341098734_78.docx @ 449481 @ @ 1

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0049_1

Fig. 143

Pos: 66.22.14.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.14.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.14.42 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 4/4 @ 46\mod_1283341654625_78.docx @ 449507 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y39 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 1

Y34 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 2

Pos: 66.22.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

175

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283344002875_78.docx @ 449562 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.6 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional)

Fig. 144

Pos: 66.22.16.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251376875502_78.docx @ 287117 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-5 "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics for the hydraulic auger hood appears.

The "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.16.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.16.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.16.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

176

Pos: 66.22.16.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Sensortest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (2) (Seite 1/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197628159400_78.docx @ 28695 @ @ 1

Sensor test - hydraulic auger hoods (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 145

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the hydraulic auger hoods function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S2

Hydraulic auger hoods left

S5

Hydraulic auger hoods right

177

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.16.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.16.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.16.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.16.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.16.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

178

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 66.22.16.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhaube (2/3) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404736479856_78.docx @ 2072267 @ @ 1

1

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0055_1

Fig. 146

Pos: 66.22.16.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.16.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.16.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.16.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

179

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.16.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.16.22 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.16.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.16.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.16.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

180

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.16.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 66.22.16.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.16.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251379241424_78.docx @ 289052 @ @ 1

1 2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0056

Fig. 147

Pos: 66.22.16.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.16.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Tabelle Aktoren hydraulische Schneckenhauben BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197631161806_78.docx @ 28755 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the hydraulic auger hood.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y32 Auger hoods right

Y33 Auger hoods left

3

Pos: 66.22.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

181

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Menü 4-1-6 Diagnose Hangausgleich @ 46\mod_1283347867062_78.docx @ 449617 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.7 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional)

Fig. 148

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics sideshift" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Sideshift diagnostics appears.

The "Sideshift" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.18.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.18.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.18.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

182

Pos: 66.22.18.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Sensortest Hangausgleich (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 81\mod_1316093658099_78.docx @ 714718 @ @ 1

Sensor Test – Sideshift (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 149

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the sideshift function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S73

Pos: 66.22.18.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.18.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Sideshift (Only on BiG M 400)

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.18.8 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.18.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.18.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.18.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

183

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (2/3) @ 279\mod_1405414790716_78.docx @ 2151370 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Sideshift” function.

1

5 6 2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0059_1

Fig. 150

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.18.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.18.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.18.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

184

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.18.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.18.18 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.18.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.18.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.18.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

185

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.18.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197632459321_78.docx @ 28856 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Sideshift" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0060

Fig. 151

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.18.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.18.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Tabelle Aktoren Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197873505393_78.docx @ 29515 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the sideshift.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y28 Sideshift left

Y29 Sideshift right

Pos: 66.22.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

186

Pos: 66.22.20.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Menü 4-1-7 Diagnose Frontschutzklappen @ 46\mod_1283348927000_78.docx @ 449807 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.8 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

CAN

Pic. 152

The "Diagnostics" main menu 4 is called.

• Select menu 4-1-7 “Diagnostics front guard flaps" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

Front guard flaps diagnostics appears.

The diagnostics menu “Front guard flaps” is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.20.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.20.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.20.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

187

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Sensortest Frontschutzklappen (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 46\mod_1283348928359_78.docx @ 449833 @ @ 1

Sensor test front guard flaps (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 153

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the front guard flaps.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S8 Front guard flaps

Pos: 66.22.20.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 66.22.20.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.20.8 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.20.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.20.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.20.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

188

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (2/3) @ 280\mod_1405424928677_78.docx @ 2152487 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6 2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0262_1

Fig. 154

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 66.22.20.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.20.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 66.22.20.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

189

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 66.22.20.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.20.18 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.20.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.20.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.20.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

190

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.20.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348925843_78.docx @ 449781 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0263

Fig. 155

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.20.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.20.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348929593_78.docx @ 449859 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the front guard flaps.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y43 Front guard flaps 1

Y44 Front guard flaps 2

Pos: 66.22.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

191

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.22.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Menü 4-1-9 ISOBUS Lenksystem @ 175\mod_1372314591267_78.docx @ 1498563 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.9 Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System

Pos: 66.22.22.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ Bild BM 400 @ 132\mod_1349353845372_78.docx @ 1171516 @ @ 1

1

Fig. 156

Pos: 66.22.22.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 „ISOBUS Lenksystem“ Text @ 175\mod_1372315598436_78.docx @ 1498592 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up “ISOBUS Steering System” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1-9 “ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

ISOBUS steering system diagnostics is displayed.

Pos: 66.22.22.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 ist in 2 Seiten aufgeteilt @ 175\mod_1372316264344_78.docx @ 1498621 @ @ 1

The “ISOBUS Steering System” diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages

Page 1: Display diagnostics values

Page 2: Actuator test

Pos: 66.22.22.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 2 @ 132\mod_1349360133802_78.docx @ 1171748 @ @ 1

Menu Control of Pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.22.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.22.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.22.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

192

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.22.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.22.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.22.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 66.22.22.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „Autopilot“ @ 175\mod_1372317573293_78.docx @ 1498650 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been installed on the machine for the

“ISOBUS Steering System” function.

Pos: 66.22.22.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Aktorentest Autopilot Bild BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404740901639_78.docx @ 2073394 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0097_1

Fig. 157

Pos: 66.22.22.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.22.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.22.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

193

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.22.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Tabelle Aktoren Autopilot BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372317907399_78.docx @ 1498679 @ @ 1

Note

The displayed status displays are valid for all actuators that refer to the ISOBUS steering system.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y54

Lock valve steering rear left

Y53

Lock valve steering rear right

Y52

Steering rear left

5 6

Y51

Steering rear right

7 8

Pos: 66.22.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

194

Pos: 66.22.24.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Menü 4-1-10 Diagnose Arbeit BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316094827000_78.docx @ 714803 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 158

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics work" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Work diagnostics appears.

The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into 6 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Sensor Test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Page 5: Actuator test

Page 6: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 6

Pos: 66.22.24.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.24.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.24.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

195

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 1/6) BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316095969365_78.docx @ 714888 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 1/6)

Fig. 159

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the work function.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B10

B33

Pos: 66.22.24.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) ( Seite 1) Zusatz Sensoren B57/B58 @ 81\mod_1316151350061_78.docx @ 715096 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Suction return air filter

Hydraulic tank filling level

Description

B57

B58

Pressure filter steering hydraulics

Pressure filter work hydraulics

Pos: 66.22.24.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

196

Pos: 66.22.24.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 2/6) @ 9\mod_1219915289585_78.docx @ 124432 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 2/6)

2 2

5 6

7

BM 400 0063_1

8

B C

Fig. 160

Sensor designation:

D

= Sensor B11 speed – front mowing unit

= Sensor B12 speed – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B13 speed – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B14 position – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B15 position – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B28 speed – right auger

= Sensor B29 speed – left auger

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Pos: 66.22.24.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Überschrift Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197884083518_78.docx @ 29633 @ @ 1

Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 66.22.24.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 66.22.24.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

197

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884281565_78.docx @ 29671 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

198

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884924049_78.docx @ 29747 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0064

Fig. 161

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197885546643_78.docx @ 29807 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y22 Lateral mowing unit right lift

Y23 Lateral mowing unit right lower

5 6

Y27 Lateral mowing unit right fold down

7

Pos: 66.22.24.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

199

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197884308393_78.docx @ 29690 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.25 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

200

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885483846_78.docx @ 29787 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0065

Fig. 162

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885035893_78.docx @ 29767 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y24 Lateral mowing unit left lift

1

Y25 Lateral mowing unit left lower

Y26 Lateral mowing unit left fold down

5 6

Pos: 66.22.24.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

201

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197884337908_78.docx @ 29709 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 5/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.36 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.39 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

202

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886146908_78.docx @ 29827 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0066

Fig. 163

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.42 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886205518_78.docx @ 29847 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y20 Lifting front mowing unit

1

Y21 Lowering front mowing unit

Pos: 66.22.24.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

203

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 6/6) @ 0\mod_1197884374705_78.docx @ 29728 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 6/6)

Pos: 66.22.24.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.24.47 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.24.48 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.24.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.24.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

204

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.24.51 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404743326483_78.docx @ 2074740 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0017_1

Fig. 164

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 66.22.24.52 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.24.53 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 66.22.24.54 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288160770328_78.docx @ 478547 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y8 Front mowing unit drive

Y9 Side mowing unit drive, right

Y10 Side mowing unit drive, left

5 6

Pos: 66.22.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

205

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-11/Menü 4-1-11 „CAN-Bus“ BM 420 @ 292\mod_1410932672804_78.docx @ 2298995 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus

CAN

MFR

CAN

Smart

Drive

DIOM

ISOBUS

KMC1

BM 420 0045_2

Fig. 165

Main menu 4 “Diagnostics” is called.

• Select menu 4-1-11 “CAN BUS” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

CAN bus diagnostics is displayed.

CAN Bus participant:

Active Inactive or disconnected from CAN bus

Designation

Joystick

Control unit console (CUC)

SmartDrive

DIOM

Terminal

MFR MFR

KMC1 (KRONE Machine

Controller)

MFR (engine control)

ISOBUS ECU

(ECU = Electronic Control Unit)

Pos: 66.22.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAN = Controller Area Network

• Pressing menu key takes you back one menu level.

206

Pos: 66.22.28.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Überschrift @ 81\mod_1316154190621_78.docx @ 715190 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear

Pos: 66.22.28.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316157923503_78.docx @ 715359 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 166

Pos: 66.22.28.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Menü aufrufen @ 81\mod_1316154489538_78.docx @ 715218 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-12 "Drive" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Drive diagnostics appears.

The "Travelling Gear" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 66.22.28.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.28.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu. the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.28.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

207

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251718644413_78.docx @ 295583 @ @ 1

Travelling gear switch (1) (page 1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 167

Pos: 66.22.28.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1197893098455_78.docx @ 30395 @ @ 1

= Road/Field release switch not activated

= Road/Field release switch activated

= Release switch travelling gear not activated.

= Travelling gear release switch activated

= Parking brake release switch not activated.

= Parking brake release switch activated

= Key axle separation not activated.

= Key axle separation activated

Pos: 66.22.28.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

208

Pos: 66.22.28.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251720587648_78.docx @ 295633 @ @ 1

Travelling gear (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 168

Pos: 66.22.28.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) BM 400/ BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271236251527_78.docx @ 368967 @ @ 1

• Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is the current travel speed.

= Forward travel

= Neutral (stopped)

= Reverse travel

=

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat operation in km/h.

=

Cruise control inactive

Type of drive

=

Axle separation active (only possible in Field mode)

=

Parking brake is applied

=

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems..

Pos: 66.22.28.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D 025 Downhill mode

209

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251716592773_78.docx @ 295533 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (3) (page1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 169

Pos: 66.22.28.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest dient zum Testen der Sensoren Fahrantrieb @ 60\mod_1297929188908_78.docx @ 562388 @ @ 1

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the travelling gear function.

Pos: 66.22.28.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_1) Tabellen BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316160005940_78.docx @ 715444 @ @ 1

Sensor Description Sensor

OK gree n

Sensor not OK red

Sensor unknown transparent

B5 Flush valve temperature

B7 High pressure

B22 Braking pressure

B25 Brake tank pressure

B38 Pivoting angle pump front axle

B39 Pivoting angle pump, rear axle

Pos: 66.22.28.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_1) Tabellen Zusatz B56 @ 81\mod_1316160896568_78.docx @ 715474 @ @ 1

B56 Wheel motor return (pressure)

Pos: 66.22.28.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_2 B40/K43) Tabellen BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928941508_78.docx @ 562304 @ @ 1

Sensor Switch activated green

Switch not activated yellow

Switch unknown transparent

Description

B40 Brake pedal switch

Travelling gear switch K43

Pos: 66.22.28.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_3 D017) Tabellen BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928866436_78.docx @ 562217 @ @ 1

D 017

POWER inactive

POWER

Description

Power limitation

Pos: 66.22.28.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

210

Pos: 66.22.28.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (4) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251721794976_78.docx @ 295683 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (4) (page1/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 170

Pos: 66.22.28.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Beschreibung der Zeile (4) @ 41\mod_1271234519480_78.docx @ 368865 @ @ 1

D018 = SD transmiss. Status (1 OK) (2 not OK)

D019 = drive level (1= drive level 1) (2=drive level 2)

D023 = Safety signal ( OK) ( not OK)

Pos: 66.22.28.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D700 = Saf. IO Toggle analogue val. to digital

211

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.29 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

212

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197900763705_78.docx @ 31005 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

5 6

7 8

B

BM 400 0069

Fig. 171

Pos: 66.22.28.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901026377_78.docx @ 31025 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Valve Icon

C D

Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y5 Axle separation

Y6 1/2 absorption volume front axle

Pos: 66.22.28.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y7 1/2 absorption volume rear axle

5 6

213

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.39 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

214

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 66.22.28.44 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283430681187_78.docx @ 450341 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0070_1

Fig. 172

Pos: 66.22.28.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 66.22.28.47 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (3/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901795565_78.docx @ 31095 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Brake light reversing lights

Y45

Stop valve front axle

5 6

Y46

Stop valve rear axle

7

Pos: 66.22.28.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

215

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 66.22.28.50 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 66.22.28.51 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Aktortest (2014-10-16 08:40:53) @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.docx @ 455729 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 66.22.28.52 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 66.22.28.53 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 66.22.28.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

216

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.28.55 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 66.22.28.56 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 Bild @ 46\mod_1283433331343_78.docx @ 450396 @ @ 1

Fig. 173

Pos: 66.22.28.57 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 66.22.28.58 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 66.22.28.59 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283435088921_78.docx @ 450448 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y1 Front axle backward

Y2 Front axle forward

Y3 Rear axle backward

5 6

Y4 Rear axle forward

7

Pos: 66.22.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

217

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.30.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251724003570_78.docx @ 295789 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.13 Menu 4-1-13 Electronics

Fig. 174

Pos: 66.22.30.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Text @ 0\mod_1197903920096_78.docx @ 31372 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-13 "Electronics" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Electronics diagnostics appears.

Pos: 66.22.30.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 66.22.30.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Bild Seite 1 und 2 BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251722625366_78.docx @ 295708 @ @ 1

Fig. 175

Pos: 66.22.30.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Text blättern @ 0\mod_1197904126361_78.docx @ 31410 @ @ 1

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that lie within a valid range.

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that do not lie within a valid range.

• To scroll forward, use the

Pos: 66.22.30.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 key. To scroll backward, use the

B key.

Pos: 66.22.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

218

Pos: 66.22.32.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 420 Bild @ 51\mod_1288164875390_78.docx @ 478655 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig.176

Pos: 66.22.32.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 400/420/500 Text @ 30\mod_1251727027851_78.docx @ 296193 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Diesel engine diagnostics" appears.

Pos: 66.22.32.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 1/3) BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781350349_78.docx @ 296265 @ @ 1

Diesel engine page 1

= Engine speed

= Engine cooling water temperature

= Engine oil pressure

= Cooling water level

Pos: 66.22.32.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 3 @ 30\mod_1251782549208_78.docx @ 296311 @ @ 1

Menu control of pages 1 to 3

Pos: 66.22.32.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menüsteuerung (1/2) BM 400/420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781668115_78.docx @ 296290 @ @ 1

• Activating key for

• Activating key for the C key for the B

B

key for

causes the next maintenance interval to be displayed.

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed. causes the next page to be displayed. causes the previous page to be displayed.

Pos: 66.22.32.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

219

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.32.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 2u3) Bild BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404805518221_78.docx @ 2076555 @ @ 1

Diesel Engine Pages 2 and 3

D210

69 °C

B36

D208 l/h

D209

P

2.10

bar

B34

2764 mV

60 %

D203 Auslastung (Drehzahl)

70 %

D202 Auslastung (Vollast)

16 %

5

7

6

8

V

13.20

bar

13,35 V

B C D

BM 420 0019_2

Fig. 177

Page 2

Pos: 66.22.32.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Symbolerklärung BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251784530161_78.docx @ 296365 @ @ 1

Page 3

= Current fuel consumption

= Charge air temperature

P

Pos: 66.22.32.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Motorauslastung @ 51\mod_1288171090031_78.docx @ 478802 @ @ 1

= Charge air pressure

• Engine capacity, speed

• Maximum engine capacity

Pos: 66.22.32.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Sensoren B34 B36 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288178194437_78.docx @ 478829 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B34

B36

Pos: 66.22.32.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 3 Symbolerklärung @ 30\mod_1251787777771_78.docx @ 296525 @ @ 1

Sensor not OK red

B

= Fuel pressure

V = Electrical voltage

Pos: 66.22.32.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 3 Symbolerklärung T2 BM 420/500 @ 60\mod_1297924686229_78.docx @ 562090 @ @ 1

= Exhaust temperature

C

1

2

19 °C

1.01

bar

1

D

606 °C

70 %

55 °C

5 6

7 8

BM 420 0020_1

Description

Diesel tank fuel level

Air intake

Pos: 66.22.32.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Harnstofflösung AdBlue @ 41\mod_1271238591840_78.docx @ 369019 @ @ 1

Urea solution

Pos: 66.22.32.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Filling level

Temperature

220

Pos: 66.22.32.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü Dieselmotor Wartungsintervall @ 30\mod_1251790172458_78.docx @ 296638 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig.178

Pos: 66.22.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating key for causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed.

221

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (1/2) Fendt @ 41\mod_1271397831477_78.docx @ 371180 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.15 Menu 4-1-15 Joystick

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 500 136

Fig.179

The key functions of the joystick can be checked in the Joystick Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when the joystick is activated in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-15 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick Diagnostics" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.22.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

222

Pos: 66.22.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (2/2) FENDT @ 41\mod_1271397833149_78.docx @ 371205 @ @ 1

Menu control:

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6 5 6

B C D

7 8

BM 500 136

B C D

7 8

BM 500 137

Fig.180

• Pressing key under the menu. the C key under the

softkey brings up the "Work" menu.

softkey to bring up the next page of the "Joystick"

Pos: 66.22.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 menu. the C key under the softkey to bring up the previous page of the "Joystick"

A representation of the joystick appears in the display. If a function is activated on the joystick, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated

Broken cable

Short circuit

223

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.38.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316163227118_78.docx @ 715615 @ 3 @ 1

9.13.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console

4-1-16

1

5 6 5 6

2

7 8 7 8

B C D

BM 400 0081 B C D

BM 420 0047

Fig. 181

Pos: 66.22.38.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197963604168_78.docx @ 31756 @ @ 1

Both the release switches and the keys on the console can be checked for their functionality in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu when the release switches or keys are activated.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Control unit console diagnostics appears.

Pos: 66.22.38.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 66.22.38.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 66.22.38.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

224

Pos: 66.22.38.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 Bedienkonsole Freigabeschalter (2/2) BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316163758992_78.docx @ 715673 @ @ 1

1

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0047

Pic. 182

Release switch (1) activated inactive Release switch

Road/field

Autopilot

Parking brake

Foot pedal

Traction drive

Axle separation

Swath hood

Seat switch

Door switch

Front guard flaps (optional)

Pos: 66.22.38.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Anzeige der Spannungen Konsole @ 30\mod_1251791240708_78.docx @ 296666 @ @ 1

Display of voltages (2)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 1)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 2)

Pos: 66.22.38.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Display (voltage – electronics)

Display (fixed voltage regulator)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

225

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.38.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Diagnose Sitzschalter @ 60\mod_1298014175977_78.docx @ 563611 @ @ 1

Diagnostics seat switch

Pos: 66.22.38.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Bedieneinheit Konsole Seite 2 Bild BigM 420 @ 277\mod_1404827971515_78.docx @ 2079543 @ @ 1

KMC1

Smart

Drive mV

1736 mV

1870

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0113_1

Fig. 183

Pos: 66.22.38.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Mögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter @ 132\mod_1349418754035_78.docx @ 1172189 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the activated key

Switch not activated

Switch activated

Cable break

Short circuit

Pos: 66.22.38.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Mögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter Diagnose Sitzschalter zeitverzögert @ 277\mod_1404896265122_78.docx @ 2080335 @ @ 1

Seat switch time delay

Pos: 66.22.39 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

226

Pos: 66.22.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-17 /Menü 4-1-17 „Display“ @ 0\mod_1197973595090_78.docx @ 31795 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

The "Display" diagnostics menu is used to check key functions , the rotary potentiometer and the key next to the rotary potentiometer.

Fig. 184

Note

When bringing up the "Display" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when keys are activated in the "Display" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-17 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Display diagnostics" appears.

A representation of the display appears in the display. If a function is activated on the display, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 66.22.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

227

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.42.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menü 4-2 „Fehlerliste“ @ 31\mod_1251804579052_78.docx @ 298124 @ 2 @ 1

9.14 Menu 4-2 Error list

Fig. 185

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Error list" appears.

= Current error

= Fault storage

= Current error, diesel engine

= Error storage, diesel engine

Current errors

The display shows the fault list with the current faults. The time, status, error number and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Durch Drücken der Taste 7 bzw. 8 für Softkey die allgemeinen Infomeldungen aufrufen. @ 31\mod_1251798076490_78.docx @ 297679 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.42.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key 7 or for softkey

228

Pos: 66.22.42.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher @ 31\mod_1251804762302_78.docx @ 298179 @ @ 1

Error Storage

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 186

• To display error storage, activate the B key under the softkey.

Error storage is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.

=

=

Pos: 66.22.42.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

=

Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

Activating the 6 key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

Activating the key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

229

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.42.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/aktuelle Fehler Dieselmotor @ 278\mod_1404910087187_78.docx @ 2082333 @ @ 1

Current diesel engine errors

1

B C D

Fig. 187

• To display current errors of the diesel engine, press the C key under the

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0089_1 softkey.

The display shows the error list with the current errors of the diesel engine. Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.

Pos: 66.22.42.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

230

Pos: 66.22.42.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher Dieselmotor @ 278\mod_1404973176571_78.docx @ 2083358 @ @ 1

Diesel engine error storage

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 188

Pos: 66.22.42.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• To display diesel engine error storage, activate the softkey.

D key under the

The display shows error storage for the diesel engine (in chronological order). Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

Status

1 = Error set

2 = Error deleted

• You can use the 7 key down to the end of the list and the key to scroll up.

• To display current errors, use the A key under the softkey.

231

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.42.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Infomeldungen Allgemein/Service Bild @ 31\mod_1251805475755_78.docx @ 298888 @ @ 1

Fig. 189

General information messages

Pos: 66.22.42.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Allgemeinen-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251808882552_78.docx @ 298912 @ @ 1

Service information messages

General information messages

The general information message is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

Status:

C = Error has come

G = Error has gone

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 66.22.42.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Service-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251809979693_78.docx @ 299120 @ @ 1

Service information messages

Service information messages are arranged chronologically. The date, time, error number and designation are shown.

Pos: 66.22.42.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

Activating the key allows you to scroll up. =

=

=

Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

Activating the

6

key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

=

Pos: 66.22.42.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Blätern über die Tasten A bis D @ 31\mod_1251809467021_78.docx @ 298956 @ @ 1

Activating the key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

• Activating the key brings up the basic screen

• By pressing the key B you get back to menu “Error list”

the next page “Service information message” will be displayed

the previous page “General information message” will be displayed

Pos: 66.22.42.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1

Pos: 66.22.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

232

Pos: 66.22.44 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-3/Menü 4-3 „Serviceebene“ @ 0\mod_1197981326387_78.docx @ 32370 @ 2 @ 1

9.15 Menu 4-3 "Service level"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 190

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the Krone service staff. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

233

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4 „Information“ @ 175\mod_1372233541022_78.docx @ 1497183 @ 2 @ 1

9.16 Menu 4-4 Information

The “Information” main menu is divided into up to 4 menus, depending on how the machine is equipped:

4-4-1

Main Menu 4 Information

Designation

Joystick

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Released Software packages

5 6

7 8

B C D

BX500127_1

Fig. 191

Pos: 66.22.46.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 4 “Information”.

• Select “Information” main menu with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

234

Pos: 66.22.46.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-1 „Joystick“ Fendt @ 41\mod_1271398876524_78.docx @ 371280 @ 3 @ 1

9.16.1 Menu 4-4-1 Joystick

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.192

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-1 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick information" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

235

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Bild BM 400 @ 278\mod_1404993740275_78.docx @ 2084754 @ 3 @ 1

9.16.2 Menu 4-4-2 Software

Fig. 193

Pos: 66.22.46.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Text BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251872307697_78.docx @ 299807 @ @ 1

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-2 "Software" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

"Software information" appears. The display shows the software versions of the various controllers.

Pos: 66.22.46.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 1 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251867821525_78.docx @ 299652 @ @ 1

Page 1

= Terminal

Note

If the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbers appear in red.

= SmartDrive

Pos: 66.22.46.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= KMC1

Note

If the KMC1 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers appear in red.

B key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the second page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer

236

Pos: 66.22.46.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 Seite (1/2/3/4) Bild BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372234964494_78.docx @ 1497335 @ @ 1

Smart

Drive

KMC1

Userware:

Resource:

Firmware:

Bootloader

150200235-13

150200235-13

1.61.11

103

A44669D

Parameter 150200464-0

Jan 26 2007

09:29:56

150200236-13

1 2 3 4

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1 2

B

3

C

4

D

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0094

MFR

ISOBUS

150200029-14

EDC 2051

5 6

1 2 3 4 7 8 1 2

B

3

C

4

D BM 400 0096

Fig. 194

Pos: 66.22.46.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 2 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868059010_78.docx @ 299677 @ @ 1

Page 2

= Joystick

= CU

C key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 66.22.46.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 3 MFR/EDC/ISOBUS BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372236337372_78.docx @ 1497480 @ @ 1

Page 3

MFR

= MFR (engine control)

= ISOBUS ECU (ECU = Electronic Control Unit)

EDC

= EDC (Electronic Diesel Control)

• The fourth page is displayed by activating the potentiometer.

Pos: 66.22.46.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 4 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868464775_78.docx @ 299727 @ @ 1

Page 4

D key or by turning on the rotary

= DIOM

Pos: 66.22.46.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the first page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 66.22.46.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

237

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.22.46.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-3 Maschine @ 0\mod_1197985621606_78.docx @ 32485 @ 3 @ 1

9.16.3 Menu 4-4-3 Machine

Pos: 66.22.46.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 195

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-3 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Machine information" appears. The display shows machine information.

238

Pos: 66.22.46.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-8 Anzeige Software-Pakete @ 278\mod_1404998031601_78.docx @ 2084946 @ 3 @ 1

9.16.4 Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

Pos: 66.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

B C D

Fig. 196

Main menu "Information" is called.

• Select menu 4-4-8 “Display Software Packages” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The “Display Software Packages” is shown.

The display shows the software packages of the machine.

Status displays:

BM 420 0117_1

Software is released

Software is not released

239

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Menü 5 „Grundbild“ BM 420 @ 279\mod_1405004140595_78.docx @ 2085877 @ 2 @ 1

9.17 Menu 5 Basic Screen

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 66.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 197

The main menu is active.

• Select menu 5 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The “Basic Screen” is shown.

240

Pos: 66.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268635505910_78.docx @ 360426 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 66.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Fehlermeldung @ 39\mod_1268635725222_78.docx @ 360450 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0113_1

B C D

Fig. 198

If an error occurs on the machine, the error message appears in the display. The error message and the fault code are displayed.

• The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

• The acoustic signal can be turned off with the

B key under the softkey .

Note

Pos: 66.28 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

For a list of error messages, error description and possible cause of error and remedy of error, see Appendix A – Error Messages.

Pos: 66.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

241

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 66.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Infomeldung @ 0\mod_1197986377200_78.docx @ 32543 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 67 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 199

If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an action, the information message will be displayed in the information section of settings (IV). The information message and the information code are displayed.

Acknowledging the information message

The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

242

Pos: 68.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Erstinbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196314201498_78.docx @ 5855 @ 2 @ 1

10.2 Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units

Pos: 68.6 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 181\mod_1376923483450_78.docx @ 1552117 @ @ 1

1.

Commissioning

10 Commissioning

Pos: 68.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Fehlende Schutztücher @ 0\mod_1196314289764_78.docx @ 5874 @ @ 1

Danger! - Missing guard cloths

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Pos: 68.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schutztücher montieren @ 35\mod_1257494335719_78.docx @ 329260 @ 2 @ 1

• The machine may be taken into operation only after all the safety devices have been installed.

10.1 Fitting the guard cloths

Pos: 68.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Schutztücher montieren @ 0\mod_1196314517108_78.docx @ 5913 @ @ 1

Pos: 68.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Seitliche Mähwerke abklappen @ 0\mod_1196407512074_78.docx @ 7929 @ 2 @ 1

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the guard cloths.

2.

27 004 518 1

Fig. 200

1) Main battery switch 3) Traction drive release switch

2) Parking brake release switch

Pos: 68.7 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 68.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

243

Commissioning

Pos: 68.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Absenken des Mähwerks in Arbeitsstellung BiGM400 @ 0\mod_1196315401623_78.docx @ 5993 @ @ 1

Danger! - Lowering mowing unit into working position

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.

Pos: 68.10 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Mähwerke absenken BM 420 Bild @ 49\mod_1287043334531_78.docx @ 464528 @ @ 1

4

6

12

BM 420 0013

Fig. 201

Pos: 68.11 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 68.12 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Mähwerke absenken BM 420_Caterpillar/MAN Text @ 143\mod_1358846761095_78.docx @ 1278854 @ @ 1

Right lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 6) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (6) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

Left lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 4) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (4) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 68.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

244

Pos: 68.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Montagebeschreibung @ 0\mod_1196317382342_78.docx @ 6137 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.1 Description of Installation

Pos: 68.15 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 68.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Darstellung Schutztuchmontage Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196317641342_78.docx @ 6175 @ 3 @ 1

3

Commissioning

3

1

Fig. 202

1

Side guard cloths

2

Front guard cloths

3

Mowing Unit

2

1 1

2 1

BM 400 0195

245

Commissioning

10.2.2

Fig. 203:

Fit the guard cloths (1) to the mowing unit (5) using the enclosed strip (2), washer (3) and bolt

(4).

Note

The hem of the guard cloths should always face the inside.

Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)

Pos: 68.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Abb. 204

258 622

150

150 232 163

BMII-329_1

246

Pos: 68.18 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Warntafeln einstellen @ 0\mod_1196318422373_78.docx @ 6236 @ 2 @ 1

10.2.3 Adjusting the Warning Panel

Commissioning

1

2

3

BM 400 0148

Fig. 205

• Before transporting the vehicle on public roads, make sure that the rear warning signs (1) are fitted to the outside.

• Mount the rear reflectors (2) on the lamp support (3).

Note

Pos: 68.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318620905_78.docx @ 6255 @ 3 @ 1

The rear reflectors are on the left side of the machine in the storage compartment with the hardware required to mount them.

10.3 Installation of Cutter Blades

Pos: 68.20 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 68.21 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Einbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318744030_78.docx @ 6274 @ @ 1

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the cutter blades.

See chapter on initial start-up "Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units".

To install cutter blades:

See the chapter on maintenance of mowing units "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Blade

Screw Connection" and "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Quick Blade Release"

Pos: 68.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

247

Commissioning

Pos: 68.23 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifenluftdruck prüfen / einstellen @ 181\mod_1377003713882_78.docx @ 1553241 @ 2 @ 1

10.4 Checking / Setting the Tyre Pressure

Pos: 68.24 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Reifenluftdruck/Reifenluftdruck prüfen / einstellen BM 420 @ 181\mod_1377000810830_78.docx @ 1553183 @ @ 1

The air pressure in the tyres is increased ex works to prevent so called base plates on the machine.

• Measure the tyre pressure with instrument.

If the tyre pressure is higher than the values in the table of technical data:

• Set the tyre pressure with the instrument according to the table, refer to chapter “Technical

Data of the Machine”.

Pos: 69 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

248

Pos: 70.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327075811_78.docx @ 6375 @ 3 @ 1

11 Start-up

Pos: 70.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Prüfungen vor Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327145451_78.docx @ 6394 @ 2 @ 1

Start-up

11.1 Check before Start-up

Pos: 70.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellarbeiten Selbsfahrer @ 0\mod_1196327276045_78.docx @ 6432 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill!

• Switching off the engine

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back

Pos: 70.4 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/Tägliche Prüfungen @ 0\mod_1196327023811_78.docx @ 6451 @ 3 @ 1

• Remove the ignition key.

• Switch off the main battery switch.

11.2 Daily checks

To perform daily tests, the lateral mowing units and the front mowing unit must be in working position.

Note - Daily checks

Pos: 70.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Effect: Ensures the safety of the machine and extends the machine’s service life

Regular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantly extend the machine’s service life.

249

Start-up

Pos: 70.6 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An der Grundmaschine @ 91\mod_1326187209992_78.docx @ 777317 @ 2 @ 1

11.2.1 On the Basic Machine

• Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly

• Check the protective equipment and replace it, if necessary

• Check the fuel level

• Check the urea level

• Make certain screws are in place and tight

• Clean engine compartment and intake sieve

• Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks

• Check the tyre pressure

• Pilot lamp test

• Test of light function

• Check the brakes for functionality

• Check the oil level on

• Engine

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

Pos: 70.7 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An den Mähwerken BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378823722425_78.docx @ 1581410 @ 3 @ 1

"Maintenance of Basic Machine" and "Maintenance – Engine".

11.2.2 On the Mowing Units

Pos: 71 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

• Make certain screws are in place and tight.

• Check safety devices and guard cloths for wear and damage and replace, if necessary.

Checking oil level on:

• Main gearbox lateral mower

• Angular gear/front mower

• Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)

• Shifting gear/front mower (CV)

• Angular gear/front mower (CRI)

• Gearbox for upper roller drive (CRI)

• Cutter bar/front mower (CV / CRI)

• Cutter bar/lateral mower

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

“Maintenance - Mowing Units”

250

Pos: 72.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Fahren und Transport @ 0\mod_1196330049217_78.docx @ 6553 @ 1 @ 1

12

Pos: 72.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Transport Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330270405_78.docx @ 6572 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

Driving and Transport

12.1 Transport / Road Travel

Pos: 72.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Zum Transport müssen die Mähwerke hochgeklappt sein. @ 0\mod_1196330402389_78.docx @ 6591 @ @ 1

The mowing units must be folded up for transport.

Pos: 72.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Fahren und Transport/Gefahr Straßenfahrt,Mitfahren,Fahrverhalten BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196330503498_78.docx @ 6611 @ @ 1

Danger! - Road travel, passengers and handling

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

The following conditions must be met for road travel:

• The mowing units must be in transport position.

• Move the side guards of the front mowing unit right and left to transport position.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position I (road travel).

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position II (travelling gear on).

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations must be adhered to (lighting, identification).

• To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines the total height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).

• When driving on public roads, lower the front axle to achieve a transport height of max. 4 m.

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

Pos: 72.5 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis Um den Antrieb der Maschine zu schützen, steht 5 Sekunden nach dem @ 181\mod_1376988666990_78.docx @ 1552865 @ @ 1

Note

To protect the drive of the machine, the work hydraulics is not available five seconds after the diesel engine has been started.

Pos: 72.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

251

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.7 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorbereitung für die Transport- /Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330928139_78.docx @ 6630 @ 3 @ 1

12.2 Preparation for transport/road travel

• Fold up the guards on the mowing units.

• Lower the hydraulic axle suspension. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic

Axle Suspension".)

• Fold up the mowing units. (See chapter "Operation – Mowing Units" (Transport Position).)

• Move the front mowing unit to centre position. (with sideshift option)

• Make certain the lock has engaged.

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position (I) (road travel).

Pos: 72.8 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Schutze hochklappen @ 0\mod_1196331136248_78.docx @ 6733 @ 3 @ 1

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position (II) (travelling gear on).

12.2.1 Folding Up the Guards

Caution! - Effect: Damage to the machine

Check every time before transport to make certain the outer side guards (2) of the lateral mowing units right/left have automatically folded up into transport position.

If they have not, repeat the process for folding up the lateral mowing units. It may be necessary to move the outer side guards into transport position manually before the lateral mowing units are folded up.

2

2

1

1

BM 400 0196

Fig. 206

Pos: 72.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Always move the side guard (1) of the front mowing unit from the right and left sides to the transport position before road travel.

252

Pos: 72.10 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Frontmähwerk in Mittelstellung bringen BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286974134093_78.docx @ 464223 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.2

Driving and Transport

Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option)

24

25

BM 420 0012

Fig.207

Activate the (24,25) keys on the multi-function lever to move the front mowing unit to central position.

Pos: 72.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The front mower is in central position as soon as the arrow (1) is aligned to the centre of the top link (2).

253

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Fehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 @ 185\mod_1379514238841_78.docx @ 1597203 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.3 Error Message 1414 or 1415

Pos: 72.13 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Warnung Fehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 mißachtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 72.14 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0147_3

Pos: 72.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 208

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

254

Pos: 72.16 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Absperrhahn am Frontausleger sperren @ 0\mod_1196333122498_78.docx @ 6832 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

Driving and Transport

B

1

A

BMII-285

Fig. 209:

Pos: 72.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 3 @ 1

• Set the shut-off valve (1) on the front to the closed position (position B). The shut-off valve is located under the front guard.

12.2.5 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 72.18 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333385858_78.docx @ 6851 @ @ 1

1 II

I

Pos: 72.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 210

• Set the road safety switch to "Road travel" position. (Position I)

BM 400 0007

255

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

12.2.6 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 72.21 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333615201_78.docx @ 6870 @ @ 1

1 II

I

BM 400 0010

Pos: 72.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 211

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position (II) (travelling gear on).

256

Pos: 72.23 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motor anlassen @ 0\mod_1196338713030_78.docx @ 6889 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

12.3 Starting the engine

Pos: 72.24 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen. (2012-08-15 08:36:40) @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.docx @ 6915 @ @ 1

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

• Activate the horn.

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Pos: 72.25 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 181\mod_1376923483450_78.docx @ 1552117 @ @ 1

1.

2.

27 004 518 1

Fig. 212

1) Main battery switch

2) Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 72.26 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 72.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

257

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.28 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Motor anlassen MAN @ 123\mod_1345016421408_78.docx @ 1126693 @ @ 1

BMII-187

Pos: 72.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 213

• Turn the ignition key to “III” position.

If the engine does not start within 20 seconds:

• Release the ignition key and turn the ignition key to “0” position.

• Repeat the starting process after 2 minutes.

If the engine starts:

• Release the ignition key and check the “engine failure” indicator lamp.

If the engine failure indicator lamp goes out:

• Allow the engine to run at idle speed until the cooling water temperature display rises.

If the “engine failure” indicator lamp does not go out:

• Switch off the engine and remove the fault.

258

Pos: 72.30 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Abwürgen des Motors (2012-08-10 11:02:16) @ 0\mod_1196345072451_78.docx @ 7033 @ 2 @ 1

12.3.1 Killing the engine

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.31 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Starten mit einer Hilfsbatterie @ 0\mod_1196345290139_78.docx @ 7052 @ 3 @ 1

Caution! - Killing the engine

Effect: Damage to the machine

• If an engine at operating heat stalls, immediately restart the engine to avoid an excessive heat accumulation at functionally important parts. Allow the engine to run at idle speed for approx. 1 to 2 minutes before finally turning it off.

12.3.2 Starting with an Auxiliary Battery

Pos: 72.32 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Batteriegase sind hochexplosiv Version 2 (2012-08-15 11:14:52) @ 0\mod_1196345356733_78.docx @ 7071 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery gases are highly explosive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.

Pos: 72.33 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/kalte Jahreszeit @ 0\mod_1196345438248_78.docx @ 7090 @ @ 1

• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

The machine can be started with an additional 12-V battery in the cold season. The auxiliary battery must be connected in parallel with the machine batteries.

Pos: 72.34.1 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Anfahren (2012-08-15 11:44:06) @ 0\mod_1196345912842_78.docx @ 7109 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Starting to Drive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 72.34.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

259

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Beschleunigungsverhalten einstellen Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271309857175_78.docx @ 369255 @ 3 @ 1

12.4.1 Setting the Acceleration Behaviour

Fig.214

Four different acceleration stages can be selected while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).

With constant operation of the multi-function lever (1) in a direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage IV.

Pos: 72.34.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Allgemeines zum Fahren @ 8\mod_1219066297300_78.docx @ 109057 @ 3 @ 1

• Move the selector switch (2) to the desired acceleration stage.

12.4.2 General on Driving

Pos: 72.34.5 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren Hecklenkung BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320312716900_78.docx @ 744545 @ @ 1

BM 420 068

Fig. 215:

Observe the following instructions when driving:

• Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering

• The machine handles differently in level I and II

• In the case of an error message in the Info centre immediately stop and remove the error. If you cannot rectify the fault inform the customer service or your KRONE dealer

Pos: 72.34.6 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren Notlenkkräfte @ 87\mod_1320313253096_78.docx @ 744601 @ @ 1

Emergency steering forces

Pos: 72.34.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

260

Pos: 72.34.8 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Überhitzen des Hydrostatsystems vermeiden @ 0\mod_1196347119983_78.docx @ 7271 @ 3 @ 1

Driving and Transport

12.4.3 Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic system

If the hydrostatic system is overheated, an acoustic warning signal occurs and an optical warning symbol appears on the display. Switch off the engine and establish cause of overheating.

Then improve the effectiveness of the hydrostatic travelling gear by selecting a lower speed, which will reduce the oil temperature.

Pos: 72.34.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

When the travelling gear has been killed, never wait longer than 5 seconds to reset the driving lever to “neutral”; subsequently select a lower speed.

The drive moment which acts on the drive wheels depends on the oil pressure in the hydrostatic drive system. If the pressure requirement becomes higher than the pressure in the hydrostatic system, the pressure relief valve will open and the self-propelled high performance mower-conditioner will reduce speed or not move.

As soon as the required drive moment decreases (this is achieved by selecting a lower speed), the self-propelled high performance mower-conditioner will drive on again.

261

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.10 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorwärtsfahren Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271311435596_78.docx @ 369305 @ 3 @ 1

Fig.216

Starting forwards from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the machine starts to move forwards and accelerates.

• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

Pos: 72.34.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear while travelling, the machine decelerates; it is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.

262

Pos: 72.34.12 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Rückwärtsfahren Fahrhebel NEU (2012-08-24 10:10:00) @ 41\mod_1271312002784_78.docx @ 369355 @ 2 @ 1

12.4.5 Reversing

Driving and Transport

Fig.217

Starting in reverse from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear; the machine starts to move in reverse and accelerates.

• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

• If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until it comes to a stop by friction.

Note

Pos: 72.34.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.

263

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.14 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Tempomat Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312183893_78.docx @ 369410 @ 2333 @ 1

12.5.1

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When the cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed stored for the cruise control mode.

Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode

The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field) the machine is currently in. One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.

Fig.218

• Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the middle position.

The momentary travelling speed is stored.

The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.

264

12.5.2 Activating Cruise Control

Driving and Transport

Fig.219

• While driving, move the multi-function lever (2) to the right without the activation key. The saved speed is reached and the

Centre display.

Deactivating Cruise Control

icon for cruise control becomes active in the Info

12.5.3

Pos: 72.34.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, operating the operating brake and switching off the travelling gear.

If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display switches to the value that is saved for the currently selected operating mode (field or road speed).

265

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.16 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anhalten Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312895643_78.docx @ 369460 @ 33 @ 1

12.6 Stopping

The machine can be brought to a stop either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.

12.6.1 Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever

Fig.220

Stopping from forward travel:

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Note - Alternative

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the left during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Stopping from reverse travel:

Pos: 72.34.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.221

If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during reverse travel, the machine decelerates.

It is braked until is comes to a stop.

266

Pos: 72.34.18 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Anhalten mit Fußbremsen (2012-08-15 13:21:18) @ 0\mod_1196350380076_78.docx @ 7512 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.2 Stopping with Foot Brakes

Driving and Transport

Danger!

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly

BM 400 0228

Fig. 222:

Brake the machine slightly:

• Depress the foot brake slightly

• When you release the brake pedal, the machine accelerates and returns to its original driving speed.

Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):

Pos: 72.34.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the foot brake forcefully downwards.The machine immedialety comes to a complete stop.

267

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Feststellbremse @ 6\mod_1214898864996_78.docx @ 96776 @ 2 @ 1

12.7

Pos: 72.34.21 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse @ 0\mod_1196350787826_78.docx @ 7531 @ @ 1

Parking Brake

Danger! - Leaving the Cab

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Before leaving the cab, always apply the parking brake.

• Release the parking brake each time before starting to drive.

Fig. 223:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

Pos: 72.34.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I - Parking brake released

II - Parking brake engaged

268

Pos: 72.34.23 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Motor abstellen Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1357814095362_78.docx @ 1263522 @ 2 @ 1

12.8 Switching Off the Engine

Driving and Transport

Note

To protect the engine from overheating after operation under load, the engine must run for at least three minutes in lower idle before the engine is switched off.

Fig. 224

• Bring the machine to a complete stop.

• Let the engine run at lower idle for three minutes to cool off the engine.

• Turn the ignition key (1) to “0” position.

• Activate the parking brake release switch in “II” position (engaged).

• Activate the traction drive release switch in “I” position (off).

Pos: 72.34.24 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Maschine abstellen (2012-08-13 10:28:52) @ 0\mod_1196352108780_78.docx @ 7590 @ 3 @ 1

12.9 Switch off the machine

Danger! - Leaving the machine

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Move the mowing units into transport position.

• Move the "Road/Field" release switch to the road position.

• Apply the holding brake.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key.

• If necessary, fit wheel chocks in place.

Pos: 72.34.25 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Maschine abstellen Hinweis Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361357251980_78.docx @ 1326005 @ @ 1

Note

Close the shut-off valve on the fuel pre-filter to prevent that diesel flows into the engine when parking the machine on slopes.

Pos: 72.34.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

269

Driving and Transport

Pos: 72.34.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abschleppen der Maschine @ 35\mod_1256130365838_78.docx @ 326611 @ 3 @ 1

12.10 Towing

Pos: 72.34.28 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Abschleppen (2012-08-13 11:06:10) @ 0\mod_1196352293795_78.docx @ 7609 @ @ 1

Caution!

Only move machine out of the danger zone. Never tow over longer distances.

Pos: 72.34.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Feststellbremse manuell lösen @ 0\mod_1196352596201_78.docx @ 7628 @ 3 @ 1

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure for releasing the parking brake, then the parking brake must be released manually.

12.10.1 Releasing the holding brake manually

Pos: 72.34.30 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Pos: 72.34.31 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Unterlegkeile anbringen @ 0\mod_1196352858998_78.docx @ 7647 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Fitting wheel chocks

• Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front axle).

• Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the machine cannot roll away.

• Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and place then close up against the drive wheels.

Pos: 72.34.32 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse lösen Bild BM 420 @ 58\mod_1297059948584_78.docx @ 554750 @ @ 1

2 2

1

BM 420 0039

Fig.225

Pos: 72.34.33 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Feststellbremse lösen (2012-08-13 11:56:33) @ 0\mod_1196353036858_78.docx @ 7666 @ @ 1

The spring (1) must be set on a block to release the parking brake.

To do this:

• Loosen the nuts (2)

• Set the spring (1) to block.

• Tighten the nuts (2) and counter.

Note - Towing

• Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard warning flasher) and brake lights function.

• Switch the road/field release switch into the road travel position.

• Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.

Pos: 73 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

270

Pos: 74.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Bedienung Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196403531183_78.docx @ 7808 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13 Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.2.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

13.1 Intended use

Pos: 74.2.2 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 74.2.3 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.docx @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 74.2.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Vernüftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

13.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 74.2.5 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Vernünftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung T1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 74.2.6 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Auflistung von Fehlanwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 74.2.7 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.3 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 74.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

271

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bedienung der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404785480_78.docx @ 7850 @ 2 @ 1

13.3 Operation of Mowing Units

Pos: 74.6 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.7 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung Quetschgefahr durch Zeitverzögertes Heben / senken von Bauteilen @ 184\mod_1378886868212_78.docx @ 1582523 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Crushing hazard due to a time delayed lifting / lowering of parts.

In the first five seconds after starting the diesel engine, the work hydraulics is still not available. The function for lifting / lowering is executed with a time delay to activate the function within this period.

• There must be no persons in the crushing zone .

• Before starting the diesel engine, make certain there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine .

Pos: 74.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Bedienung der Mähwerke Bild BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271766652336_78.docx @ 372975 @ @ 1

3 1

2

BM 500 0151

Pos: 74.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Bedienung der Mähwerke Text @ 0\mod_1196406980386_78.docx @ 7910 @ @ 1

Fig.226

Operation of mowing units is divided into three areas.

The operating panel contains switches that are needed to operate the mowing units. (for example "Road/Field" release switch)

The multi-function lever combines all functions needed to operate the mowing units. (this includes lifting, lowering, folding up, switching to working position, transport position or headland position and turning on the mowing unit drives)

Pos: 74.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

All settings/specifications for automatic sequences are stored in the Info Centre. (for example time/path control, overcut, automatic cleaning time)

For further information, please refer to the Chapter "Info Centre".

272

Pos: 74.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke abklappen @ 31\mod_1252577545091_78.docx @ 306348 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13.4 Folding Down the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.13 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 181\mod_1376923483450_78.docx @ 1552117 @ @ 1

1.

2.

27 004 518 1

Fig. 227

1) Main battery switch 3) Traction drive release switch

2) Parking brake release switch

Pos: 74.14 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 74.15 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Um das Frontmähwerk anzuheben bzw. abzusenken muss der Absperrhahn am Frontausleger geöffnet sein. @ 185\mod_1379577347672_78.docx @ 1598041 @ @ 1

The shut-off valve on the front outrigger must be opened to lift or lower the front mowing unit.

Pos: 74.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 74.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

273

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.18.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378965588422_78.docx @ 1583436 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.1 Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.18.2 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Transport- in die Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378975780492_78.docx @ 1586544 @ @ 1

Fig. 228

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (4).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (6).

Pos: 74.18.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378976607099_78.docx @ 1586573 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.2 Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position

Pos: 74.18.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Gleichzeitig von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378964225850_78.docx @ 1583408 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 229

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (10).

274

Pos: 74.20.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke absenken @ 184\mod_1378976759848_78.docx @ 1586601 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13.5 Lowering Mowing Units

Pos: 74.20.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.20.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk von Transport- / in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378977108393_78.docx @ 1586659 @ 3 @ 1

13.5.1 Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 74.20.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk in Arbeitsstellung absenken BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378903895858_78.docx @ 1582742 @ @ 1

Fig. 230

• Press the key (11) briefly.

The front mowing unit is in float position.

Pos: 74.20.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978650013_78.docx @ 1586715 @ 3 @ 1

13.5.2 Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working

Position

Pos: 74.20.6 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978862252_78.docx @ 1586744 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.20.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 231

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (4) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (6) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

275

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.20.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978192744_78.docx @ 1586687 @ 3 @ 1

13.5.3 Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 74.20.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in die Arbeitsstellung senken BM 400/500 @ 184\mod_1378979949854_78.docx @ 1586773 @ @ 1

Fig. 232

• Press the key (10) briefly.

All mowing units are in float position.

To this end, the lateral mowing units are lowered according to the set mode (time / distance control) into working position.

Pos: 74.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The mowing units are lowered in the following order.

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay)

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting of the Machine”

276

Pos: 74.22.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196415953651_78.docx @ 8154 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13.6 Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 74.22.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.22.3 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_MAN @ 181\mod_1376923483450_78.docx @ 1552117 @ @ 1

1.

2.

27 004 518 1

Fig. 233

1) Main battery switch 3) Traction drive release switch

2) Parking brake release switch

Pos: 74.22.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 74.22.5 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Vorraussetzungen Teil 2_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416105979_78.docx @ 8173 @ @ 1

• Move the mowing units at least to the headland position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch (4) to position (II) "Travelling gear on".

Pos: 74.22.6 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Hinweis Mähen_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416325666_78.docx @ 8192 @ @ 1

Note - Mowing

Pos: 74.22.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To be able to switch on the mowing unit drives, the mowing units must be in at least the headland position or lower.

277

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.22.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Mähwerksantriebe ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 151\mod_1362490438725_78.docx @ 1350655 @ 3 @ 1

13.6.1 Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives

Note

The cross switch lever is used to switch on or switch off the mowing unit drives.

Always actuate the cross switch lever beyond the second resistor when switching on and switching off.

To switch on the mowing unit drives, press key (17) additionally and hold it down. Only return the cross switch back to central position when the mowing unit drives are started.

Pos: 74.22.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb links ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362650623161_78.docx @ 1355181 @ 3 @ 1

13.6.2 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 74.22.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 234

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor until the left mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor to switch off the left mowing unit drive.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

278

Pos: 74.22.11 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb rechts ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651402841_78.docx @ 1355387 @ 3 @ 1

13.6.3 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.22.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 235

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor until the right mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor to switch off the right mowing unit drive.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

279

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.22.13 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb front ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651275097_78.docx @ 1355358 @ 3 @ 1

13.6.4 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front

Pos: 74.22.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 236

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor until the mowing unit drive front switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor to switch off the mowing unit drive front.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

280

Pos: 74.22.15 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerksantriebe ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651081570_78.docx @ 1355270 @ 2 @ 1

13.6.5 Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 237

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) back (M) beyond the second resistor until all mowing unit drives are switched on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after all mowing unit drives are switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the rear (M) beyond the second resistor to switch off all mowing unit drives.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

Note - Switch off all mowing unit drives

Pos: 74.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key (1) on the multi-function lever also switches off all mowing unit drives.

281

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.24.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke anheben @ 184\mod_1378980436932_78.docx @ 1586831 @ 3 @ 1

13.7 Lifting the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.24.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 74.24.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994644037_78.docx @ 1587527 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.1 Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378904181676_78.docx @ 1582801 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.24.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 238

Inching

• Press the key (8) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (8) briefly into the second gear and release it.

282

Pos: 74.24.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378984035421_78.docx @ 1587008 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13.7.2 Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben Big M 500 @ 184\mod_1378985126507_78.docx @ 1587124 @ @ 1

Fig. 239

Lateral mowing unit left

Inching

• Press the key (5) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (5) briefly to the second gear and release it.

Lateral mowing unit right

Inching

• Press the key (7) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (7) briefly to the second gear and release it.

Pos: 74.24.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle Mähwerke von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994442717_78.docx @ 1587434 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.3 Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 74.24.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke gleichzeitig von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378965937846_78.docx @ 1583494 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 240

• Press the key (9) briefly.

All mowing units are lifted to the headland position according to the set mode (time / distance control).

Lift the mowing units in the following order:

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay).

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting Machine”.

283

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.26.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke anklappen @ 31\mod_1252561666154_78.docx @ 305965 @ 3 @ 1

13.8 Folding up the Mowing Units

Pos: 74.26.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.docx @ 8665 @ @ 1

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

• After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 74.26.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Warnung Fehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 mißachtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 74.26.4 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0147_3

Fig. 241

Pos: 74.26.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

284

Pos: 74.26.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende - in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378984034421_78.docx @ 1586979 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

13.8.1 Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position

Pos: 74.26.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung anklappen Bild @ 41\mod_1271326036815_78.docx @ 370665 @ @ 1

Fig.242

Pos: 74.26.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378990006653_78.docx @ 1587409 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (5).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (7).

Pos: 74.26.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378984036264_78.docx @ 1587037 @ 3 @ 1

13.8.2 Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to

Transport Position

Pos: 74.26.10 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378965937127_78.docx @ 1583465 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 243

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

• Press the key (12) and hold it.

• Press the key (9).

285

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähen @ 0\mod_1196426120010_78.docx @ 8839 @ 2 @ 1

13.9 Mowing

Pos: 74.29 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unerwartete Bewegung fortschleudern von Steinen @ 0\mod_1196425801338_78.docx @ 8820 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected motion of cutting tools or mowing units and forcibly ejected stones during operation.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The mowing units are suitable for and intended for cutting crops growing on the ground!

• To prevent any of the mowing units from overloading, when operating a single mowing unit do not drive faster than you would if you were operating all mowing units simultaneously.

• The mowing units are not suitable for mowing embankments!

• The support skids must rest on the ground before start-up and during work!

• Always check the protective devices for damage before the machine is used. Replace damaged protective devices immediately.

• Move the protective devices into their protective positions.

• Do not use the machine until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone of the mowing units.

Pos: 74.30 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs @ 0\mod_1196426193026_78.docx @ 8858 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Work on the cutter blades or their fastenings must only be performed with the drive stopped and the cutting discs and drums stopped.

• Switch off the mowing unit drives

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until the cutting discs and/or drums have come to a complete stop

• Remove the ignition key!

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Support the lifted mower bed! Never step under suspended loads!

• Safe operation is only guaranteed if the blades have been fitted according to the instructions!

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Pos: 74.31 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Hinweis abschalten der Schwimmstellung während des Mähens @ 49\mod_1287055607937_78.docx @ 464739 @ @ 1

Pos: 74.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note!

During mowing the mowing units are in “float position” so they can adapt to the ground contours during mowing process. If the machine is switched off when the mowing units are in working position, the float position will be deactivated. When starting again in working position the float position will stay deactivated. Only after the key for the function “lower all mowers” is shortly actuated, the mowing units will be in float position again (alternately the float position can be individually activated with the accordant key for each mowing unit).

286

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.33 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 74.34 /BA/Bedienung /Wildschutz Selbstfahrer @ 46\mod_1283864895734_78.docx @ 451321 @ 3 @ 1

13.10 Game animal protection

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0266

Pic. 244

After the first switching on of the mowing unit drive an information picture with the correct mowing performance appears temporarily on the display.

When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes it away.

A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.

In doing so, you drive directly into the centre of the parcel without mowing the boundary area and mow anticlockwise from “inside to outside”. Therefore the animal can leave the field in compliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.

Pos: 74.35 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Voraussetzung zum Mähen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427018838_78.docx @ 8878 @ @ 1

Precondition for mowing:

• Open the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• Starting the engine

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the mowing units to the working position.

• The guard cloths must be in the working position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position II (on).

• Switch on the mowing unit drives.

• Move the "Parking brake" release switch to position I (released).

• Increase rpms to working speed.

• Drive into the crop.

• The travel speed during mowing is determined by usage conditions (soil conditions, height, density and nature of the crop)

Pos: 74.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Reverse travel in Field mode!

The disc mowers are designed to travel forwards. If the road safety switch is in field position, the mowing units are automatically lifted out when the machine is reversed.

287

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Schutze in Arbeitsstellung bringen @ 35\mod_1258461422738_78.docx @ 335195 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.1 Moving the guards into the working position

Pos: 74.38 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schutze in Arbeitsposition bringen BM 400 @ 83\mod_1317286459496_78.docx @ 728207 @ @ 1

2

1

1

BM 400 0197_1

Fig. 245

• Switch off the engine. Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling

• Check the guard cloths (1,3) regularly

• Replace worn or damaged guard cloths

• The guard cloth (3) must be tightened each time before using the mower so that it cannot be caught by the conditioner auger

Note

The protective equipment on the mowing units, e.g. cloths and hoods, protects against flying stones and similar objects and also prevents access to dangerous parts.

Fold down the side plates (1) before operation and secure with the rotary tops (2).

Pos: 74.39 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Mähen mit einzelnen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196428174510_78.docx @ 8956 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.2 Mowing with Individual Mowing Units

Pos: 74.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The following options are available for mowing remaining pieces.

• Lift the mowing units that are no longer required for mowing into headland position. To do this, activate the appropriate keys on the multi-function lever.

• The front mowing unit alone can be used to mow small parcels of crop or narrow sections in open fields. The lateral mowing units then remain in transport position.

288

Pos: 74.41 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schnellstopp Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329582862_78.docx @ 370790 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig.246

Activating quick stop

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving.

The machine decelerates to a complete stop.

Pos: 74.42 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schneller Fahrtrichtungswechsel (Schnellreversierung) Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329848065_78.docx @ 370815 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.4 Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)

Fig.247

Activating fast reversing

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the middle position.

The machine decelerates down to standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to approx.

70% of the previous travelling speed.

Pos: 74.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Fast reversing is possible only in the field mode.

289

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 74.44 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Achstrennung ein- /ausschalten @ 0\mod_1196428626854_78.docx @ 9055 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.5 Switching Axle Separation On and Off

Switch on axle separation to prevent the wheels from spinning on slippery surfaces. Axle separation is only available in Field mode.

Prerequisites for activating the axle separation:

• Road/field release switch must be in the field mode position

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

• Travel speed must be less than 14 km/h.

Fig. 248:

Switching on the axle separation

Actuate the axle separation button (1) – axle separation is switched on

The symbol (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info centre.

Switching off the axle separation

• Actuate the axle separation button (1) again.

Pos: 74.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info Centre.

290

Pos: 74.46 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Bodenklappen abbauen @ 186\mod_1379937412099_78.docx @ 1604291 @ 2 @ 1

13.11 Removing the Ground Flaps

For cross conveyor design

2

1

1

1

Operation – Mowing Units

2

Pos: 75 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 249

To prevent blockages in the conveyor channel on stony grounds, the ground flaps can be removed.

Detaching

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Loosen the screw connections (2).

• Open the ground flap and detach it to the top.

Keep the removed ground flaps for a later reinstallation in a secure place.

Attaching

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Hook in the ground flap.

• Close the ground flaps and tighten the screw connections (2).

291

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einstellungen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196660315463_78.docx @ 9095 @ 2 @ 1

14

Pos: 76.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

14.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 76.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs_3 @ 0\mod_1196660613260_78.docx @ 9153 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!

• After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

Pos: 76.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

292

Pos: 76.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196660879619_78.docx @ 9191 @ 3 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

14.2 Adjusting the cutting height

Pos: 76.5.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Allgemein Schnitthöhe Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196661001853_78.docx @ 9210 @ @ 1

The cutting height can be adjusted to different soil conditions. Each of the mowing units is adjusted individually for height.

Before making settings for cutting height, the hydraulic axle suspension must be in the mowing position. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Pos: 76.5.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 4 @ 1

Note - Good cutting pattern

For a good cutting pattern, adjust the cutting height to the same height on all mowing units

14.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.5.4 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe am Frontmähwerk Bild @ 0\mod_1196661320135_78.docx @ 9250 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0175

Fig. 250:

Pos: 76.5.5 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe größer_geringer @ 0\mod_1196661562478_78.docx @ 9269 @ @ 1

The cutting height is adjusted via the top link (1).

To do this:

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Rotate the top suspension arm (1)

Pos: 76.5.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Top suspension arm longer = smaller cutting height

Top suspension arm shorter = bigger cutting height

293

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.5.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Aushubhöhe einstellen @ 0\mod_1196675396916_78.docx @ 10668 @ 4 @ 1

14.2.2

Pos: 76.5.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196674467494_78.docx @ 10628 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Lifting Height

14.2.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.5.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Aushubhöhe des Frontmähwerks einstellen @ 0\mod_1196661830291_78.docx @ 9309 @ @ 1

Pos.1

Pos.2

Pos.3

BM 400 0176

Fig. 251:

The front mowing unit can be suspended in several positions by means of the ‘Weiste’ triangle.

This causes the front mower to lift up to a higher or lower position.

• In the upper position (1), the front mower lifts to a higher position

• At mid position (2) the mower is in the normal position

Pos: 76.5.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• In the lower position (3), the front mower lifts to a lower position

By linking the upper rod into the lower positions (2, 3) on the ‘Weiste’ triangle, it is possible to obtain a smaller adjustment to the front mower inclination. This keeps the cutting height constant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land

294

Pos: 76.5.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196674202135_78.docx @ 10608 @ 3 @ 1

14.2.3

Pos: 76.5.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675520994_78.docx @ 10687 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the cutting height

14.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.5.13 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Einstellung der Schnitthöhe am Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196664319228_78.docx @ 10095 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 252

• Lower the lateral mowing unit into working position.

• Remove the linch pin (1).

• Put the locking clip (2) to one side.

• Set the direction of rotation for the setting ratchet (4) on the lever (3).

Lengthen threaded spindle = smaller cutting height

Shorten threaded spindle = bigger cutting height

• Twist the threaded spindle (3), until the locking clip (2) can be inserted.

Pos: 76.5.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Secure the locking clip (2) with the linch pin (1).

295

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.5.15 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Wasserwaage @ 0\mod_1196664592103_78.docx @ 10114 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 253

Display

(for example)

+6°

+3°

+0°

-3°

Theoretically

Cutting height approx. 11 cm approx. 8 cm approx. 6 cm about 4 cm

To suit usage conditions

High cut field forage moist dry ground

Field forage

Dry conditions

Normal conditions

-5° approx. 3 cm

Increasing

Low cut entails risk of damage to sward

You can set and read off the cutting height you require using the spirit level.

• Unscrew the wing screw (1).

• Set indicator (2) to the required angle on the angle scale (3).

• Tighten the wing screw.

• Change the mower setting on the setting ratchet until the bubble (4) is in the centre.

Note

One revolution on the top suspension arm sleeves of the lateral mowing units (12 ratchet movements) corresponds to about 4 revolutions on the top suspension arm sleeve of the front mowing unit.

Additional adjusting skids should be fitted.

296

Pos: 76.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellung der Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196666659447_78.docx @ 10133 @ 2 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

14.3 Adjusting the Compensation Springs

Pos: 76.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern nur in Transportstellung Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196666898416_78.docx @ 10171 @ @ 1

DANFER! – Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs should be adjusted only while the front mower is in the transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 76.7.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/EasyCut/Bodendruck/Bodendruck allgemeiner Text alle EC @ 0\mod_1196667271181_78.docx @ 10190 @ @ 1

The ground pressure for the cutter bar is adjusted to local conditions by means of the compensation springs. In order to protect the sward the load on the mowing spar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

Pos: 76.7.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

297

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.7.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.7.6 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Entlastungsfedern am Frontmähwerk BM 420 @ 87\mod_1320318060758_78.docx @ 744886 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.7.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 254

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre Chapter entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

• With the sideshift option, the front mowing unit must be in the central position (see Chapter entitled Driving and Transport “Move the mowing unit to the central position”).

• The front mowing unit must be put into the transport position before you adjust the adjusting piece (1)

• Unscrew linch pin (3)

• Unhook the spring assemblies (2)

• Insert the adjustment piece (1) into the required hole

• Insert the spring assemblies (2) and secure with linch pin (3)

• The spring assemblies (2) are fitted on the side of the mower into the fourth hole (6) from the top

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the upper position (4), this means there is less spring tension, and thus, increased ground pressure

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the lower position (5), this means there is greater spring tension, and thus, reduced ground pressure

298

Pos: 76.7.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.7.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Entlastungsfedern an den seitlichen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196667911275_78.docx @ 10228 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 255:

The load on the lateral mowing units is compensated by means of the four tension springs (1) on the left and right outriggers. The ground pressure can be adjusted by reinstalling the bolts

(2).

• Lift the lateral mowing units over the headland position, so that the compensation springs are not under tension.

• Support the lateral mowing unit

• Pull out the bolts (2) after you have removed the linch pin.

• If the bolts are moved further to the left: lower ground pressure

• If the bolts are moved further to the right: the ground pressure is increased

• Insert the bolts (2) and secure with the linch pin.

Pos: 76.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

When driving on the road fit the maximum spring compensation bolts at level 3 (centre hole)

299

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellung der Zetterdrehzahl @ 0\mod_1196668564463_78.docx @ 10266 @ 3 @ 1

14.4 Adjusting the Tedder Speed

Pos: 76.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellungen an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1196668628056_78.docx @ 10285 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Danger! - Settings on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill! Remove the ignition key!

14.4.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.12 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/An den seitlichen Mähwerken BiG M 420 @ 86\mod_1320144952819_78.docx @ 741497 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 256

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Normal operation 700 rpm.

Maximum operation: 1000 rpm.

• Unscrew the screw (2) on the actuating lever (1).

• Turn the actuating lever 180 degrees.

• Fasten the actuating lever with the screw (2).

To synchronise the gear wheels while the change is being made, loosen the screws (3), open the flap (4) and turn the drive shaft using a suitable tool.

300

Pos: 76.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 2 @ 1

14.4.2 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 76.15 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl Bild Big M 420/500 @ 88\mod_1321523259351_78.docx @ 754238 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

1000

700

BM 420 0076

Fig. 257

Pos: 76.16 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl einstellen 700/1000 @ 0\mod_1196670462416_78.docx @ 10380 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the speed gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Minimum speed: 700 rpm.

Maximum speed: 1000 rpm.

• Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

• Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees. (in doing so turn the mower drum (3) so that the complete actuating lever can be turned.

• Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

301

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.18.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen des Aufbereitungsblechs @ 0\mod_1196670615681_78.docx @ 10399 @ 3 @ 1

14.5 Adjusting the conditioner plate

Pos: 76.18.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsblech Bild (BiG M CV)_1 @ 186\mod_1379926689284_78.docx @ 1601595 @ @ 1

(BiG M CV)

Fig. 258

Pos: 76.18.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsbleches Text EasyCut @ 3\mod_1204713282555_78.docx @ 72125 @ @ 1

The conditioning of the mowed crop can be influenced by adjusting the conditioning plate through the crank (1). The adjustment depends on the desired degree of conditioning of the crop.

+: Degree of conditioning is increased

-: Degree of conditioning is decreased

Pos: 76.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Always check the tedder for damaged tines before the machine is used:

Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

302

Pos: 76.20 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Rollen-Conditioners @ 0\mod_1196673043650_78.docx @ 10513 @ 2 @ 1

14.6

Adjusting the mowing units

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI)

CRI-0-001

Fig. 259

General

The roller conditioner is supplied for use with leguminous vegetation or other leaf crops.

The conditioning intensity is adjusted by the setting spindle (1). The setting spindle (1) is used to change the distance or contact pressure of the rollers. The minimum distance (x) between the rollers must always be at least 4 mm.

Pos: 76.21 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Einstellen des Rollenabstandes @ 0\mod_1196673207822_78.docx @ 10532 @ 3 @ 1

14.6.1 Adjusting the roller distance

2 1 3

4

BMII-372

Pos: 76.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 260:

• Loosen the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

• Turn the adjusting nut (2) on the threaded spindle with a hex key (W/F 46).

Clockwise rotation: Roller distance is reduced.

Anticlockwise rotation: Roller distance is increased.

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

303

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.23 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Einstellen des Rollendruckes Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196673373025_78.docx @ 10551 @ 2 @ 1

14.6.2 Adjusting the roller pressure

2

1

BM 400 0154

Pos: 76.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 261

• Loosen the locknut (2) with a hex key (W/F 41).

• Turn the spindle on the screw head (1) with a hex key (W/F 55).

Clockwise rotation: Greater insertion force

Anticlockwise rotation: Less insertion force

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 41).

Note - Optimising crop flow

• Dimension "a" must be within the range 60 - 75 mm. If the distance is set to less than 60 mm, the upper roller will not be able to swing out far enough, which will impede crop flow.

• Reset the roller distance each time you make an adjustment.

304

Pos: 76.25 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Abstreiferblech am Querförderer optional (BM 500) @ 0\mod_1196673648681_78.docx @ 10570 @ 2 @ 1

14.7 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional)

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 262

The scraper (1) on the cross conveyor (right and left) are used to scrape off crop and prevent the cross conveyor from becoming clogged.

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm must be maintained.

To adjust the scraper:

• Loosen the screw (1)

• Push the scraper into the oblong hole until a dimension of X= 0-2 mm is reached.

• Tighten the screw (1) again.

305

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen Schwadbreite @ 0\mod_1196673972744_78.docx @ 10589 @ 3 @ 1

14.8 Adjusting the swath width

Pos: 76.28 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Allgemeiner Text @ 0\mod_1196676313885_78.docx @ 10726 @ @ 1

Pos: 76.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 263:

The swath width is adjusted by means of the swath plates at the rear of the disc mowers.

14.8.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76.30 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Achtung: Falsch eingestellte Schwadbleche @ 186\mod_1379930719612_78.docx @ 1602505 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

With the sideshift version, incorrectly set swath plates may damage the front wheels of the machine.

• With the sideshift version, the swath plates must always be moved to the position which is marked by the label.

Pos: 76.31 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676466135_78.docx @ 10745 @ @ 1

Set the swath width so that the mower track is kept free.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Swath width setting: with the swath grouping option (BSS), the swath width of the front mowing unit must be set as narrow as possible. This ensures that there is enough free space available to hold the crop of the lateral mowing units.

Pos: 76.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

306

Pos: 76.33 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

14.8.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 76.34 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676735025_78.docx @ 10764 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 264:

Adjust the swath width.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Pos: 76.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Set more free space for overcut.

The narrower the swath width setting on the outer swath boards (2) of the lateral mowing units, the more free space for overcut is achieved.

307

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 76.36 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Querlenker an den Seitenmähwerken @ 0\mod_1196677014275_78.docx @ 10783 @ 2 @ 1

14.9 Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units

Caution!

If the cutting height is 0° the distance dimension "a" between the side plate (4) and the outrigger (5) must not exceed 60 mm CV/100 mm CRI.

3

1 a

Pos: 76.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Leitbleche @ 0\mod_1196677535025_78.docx @ 10802 @ 2 @ 1

2

4 5

BM 400 0155

Fig. 265

The lateral mowing units (3) are aligned by means of the track control arm (1)

• Loosen the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1).

• Adjust the track control arm (1) until the dimension a between the lateral mowing unit (4) and the outrigger (5) is set to 60 mm.

• Tighten the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1)

Pos: 76.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 2 @ 1

14.10.1

Pos: 76.39 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Leitbleche Frontmähwerk BM 400/420 @ 0\mod_1196677613072_78.docx @ 10821 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

1

3

4

2

Pos: 76.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 400 0156

Fig. 266

Deflector plates are located on the front mowing unit (3) in the swath former area (2); these are fitted to the housing with fastening screws (1).

• If the swathing is uneven examine the deflector plates (4) for deformation, and straighten them if necessary.

308

Pos: 76.41 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Deaktivieren der Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1196677719369_78.docx @ 10840 @ 2 @ 1

14.11 Deactivating the axle suspension

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 267:

The BiG M front axle has a hydro-pneumatic suspension. If axle suspension is active, the two ball valves (1) and (2) are open, as illustrated in the figure.

Pos: 77 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 268:

The front axle suspension can be deactivated.

• To deactivate the front axle suspension, shut the ball valve (1) for the left hydraulic cylinder and the ball valve (2) for the right hydraulic cylinder .

Note - Lowering / lifting the front axle

The front axle can be moved both with activated and deactivated axle suspension.

309

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sonderausstattung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196678406869_78.docx @ 10859 @ 1 @ 1

15 Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Umbau der Einheit Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196679637806_78.docx @ 10918 @ 3 @ 1

15.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor

Pos: 78.1.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Es können Antriebselemente in Bewegung geraten @ 0\mod_1196679836822_78.docx @ 10937 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine, or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Pos: 78.1.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 78.1.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196678706338_78.docx @ 10879 @ @ 1

Pos: 78.1.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The following description shows the installation of the auger-type cross conveyor on the right hand mower side. The installation on the left-hand mower side has to be carried out in an analogous way.

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the "tedder deflector plate" can optionally be converted to an "auger-type cross conveyor" or vice versa.

The process for converting the "tedder deflector plate" to an auger-type cross conveyor is described below.

Prerequisite:

• Lower all lateral mowing units (1) on to a firm subsoil.

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

310

Pos: 78.1.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech abbauen @ 0\mod_1196684286525_78.docx @ 10996 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.1 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Danger! - Detaching

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Fig. 269:

Installing the retaining chains

• Attach the retaining chains (2) to the ring bolts (3) and (4) of the tedder deflector plate (1).

Pos: 78.1.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Spannschlösser lösen @ 0\mod_1196684641931_78.docx @ 11036 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks

3

1

3

4

2

5

BM 400 0216

Fig. 270

Release the tension jacks (1) and (2) located at the outer side of the mower (3).

Release the inner tension jacks (3) and (4) of the mowing unit (3).

Pos: 78.1.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech entfernen @ 0\mod_1196686072900_78.docx @ 11055 @ 3 @ 1

311

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

15.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Fig. 271

• Slightly raise the tedder deflector plate (1) and remove it sideways from the mowing unit (2).

Pos: 78.1.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Removed tedder deflector plate

Store the tedder deflector plate (1) in a secure and dry place.

312

Pos: 78.1.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zinken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686894088_78.docx @ 11074 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.4 Checking the Tines

Pos: 78.1.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Achtung - gebrochene Zinken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.docx @ 10437 @ @ 1

Caution! - Damaged or missing tines

Effect: Damages to the machine.

• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.

• Straighten any bent tines.

• Replace any broken tines.

Pos: 78.1.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zinken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686959166_78.docx @ 11093 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 272:

Check the V-shaped tines (1) and the retaining bolts (2) of the mowing unit (3) for damage.

Pos: 78.1.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Schutzblech demontieren @ 0\mod_1196688190822_78.docx @ 11112 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.5 Removing the guard

Pos: 78.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 273:

• Remove the hexagon head cap screws (1).

• Remove the guard (2) and store it in a secure place.

313

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.3.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenquerförderer anbauen @ 0\mod_1196689156088_78.docx @ 11169 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.6 Installing the auger-type cross conveyor

Danger! - Attaching / detaching

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

3 1

1

5

2

4

BM 400 0157

Fig. 274

Installing the retaining chains

• Attach the retaining chains (1) to the ring bolts (2) and (3) of the auger-type cross conveyor

(4).

• Slowly lower the auger-type cross conveyor (4) onto the mowing unit (5).

Abb. 275

• Be sure to lower the auger-type cross conveyor into the guide pins (1) and (2).

Note

Pos: 78.3.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The surfaces (3) and (4) have to be flat against either side of the mowing unit.

314

Pos: 78.3.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Spannschlösser schließen @ 0\mod_1196689498291_78.docx @ 11209 @ 3 @ 1

15.1.7 Locking the tension jacks

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 276

• Lock the tension jacks (1) and (2) located on the inner side of the mowing unit (3).

• Also lock the outer tension jacks (4) and (5).

Note

Pos: 78.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690438916_78.docx @ 11228 @ 3 @ 1

Be sure the tension jacks (1) and (2) are under tension when locked; retighten as required.

15.2

Pos: 78.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690564916_78.docx @ 11266 @ @ 1

Tensioning the V-belts

1

3

4

2

Pos: 78.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schutzblech montieren @ 0\mod_1196690733244_78.docx @ 11285 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 277

• Use the mounting lever (1) to raise the idler pulley (2).

• Place the V-belt (3) on to the pulley (4).

• Lower the idler pulley (2) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (1).

Use the mounting lever (1) supplied in the on-board tool box.

With the V-belt under tension, dimension X has to be equal to approx. 80 mm.

BM 400 0159

315

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

15.2.1 Installing the guard

Fig. 278

Pos: 78.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Drehzahlsensor anschließen @ 186\mod_1379935617862_78.docx @ 1603133 @ 3 @ 1

• Install the guard (1) on to the mowing unit (3) using the hexagon head cap screws (2).

15.2.2 Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics

Pos: 78.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 279

• Connect speed sensor cable (1) with speed sensor cable (2) of the auger-type cross conveyor.

• Insert the hydraulic plug of the auger-type cross conveyor into the hydraulic bushing of the lateral mowing unit.

316

Pos: 78.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schmierleitungen umlegen @ 0\mod_1196695905681_78.docx @ 11909 @ 3 @ 1

15.2.3 Relaying the Lubrication Lines

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 280

When the machine is converted from a "Tedder deflector plate unit" to an "Auger-type cross conveyor", the lubrication lines must be relaid as described below.

• Loosen lubrication line (1) at the T-screw connection (2).

• Loosen the sealing screw (3) on the lubricating point connection.

• Unto the lubrication connection (1) to the auger bearing (BSS).

• Install the sealing screw (2) on the T-screw connection

Pos: 78.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Montageanleitung der Pralltücher für Big M 400 mit BSS @ 0\mod_1196746211375_78.docx @ 11935 @ 3 @ 1

15.2.4 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS

5

2 4

2

6

3

1

BM 400 0160

Pos: 78.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 281

Placing bulge bags on the right and left auger hoods reduces the amount of dirt in the cooling air.

Installation instructions:

• Screw bulge bags securely onto the auger hoods (1). (Install coach bolts from below.)

• Pull the rod (2) through the eyes of the bulge bag (3)

• Insert the rod (2) from behind into the hole on the frame (4). Insert the rod (2) into the hole on the mowing unit support from above in front (5) and secure it with the spring cotter pin

(6).

317

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.12.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Schneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 0\mod_1196746530468_78.docx @ 11954 @ 3 @ 1

15.2.5 Switching on the auger monitoring mode

Pos: 78.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen. (2012-08-15 08:36:40) @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.docx @ 6915 @ @ 1

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

• Activate the horn.

Pos: 78.12.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Ensure sufficient ventilation.

318

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.12.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 46\mod_1283839613843_78.docx @ 451083 @ @ 1

In order to start the auger monitoring mode, it has to be activated in the info centre. Please proceed as follows:

• Set ignition key to position I or II.

• Wait for the self test to run down.

Note

After the ignition has been switched on, the start screen "Road Driving or Field Operation" will appear on the display.

CV

50 cm

Semi

Fig. 282

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 1 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 78.12.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Select main menu 1-2

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine setting". the D key brings up the basic screen.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

319

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.12.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Einstellung: Schneckenüberwachung @ 0\mod_1196749161203_78.docx @ 12416 @ @ 1

5) Setting: Auger monitoring

Both augers on

Right auger on

Left auger on

Both augers off

Pos: 78.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Schneckenquerförderer auf "Einheit Zetterprallblech" @ 0\mod_1196749796562_78.docx @ 12435 @ 3 @ 1

15.2.6 Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit"

The conversion process is in the in reverse order.

Danger! – Stones are hurled up during operation

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After the auger-type cross conveyor has been removed, the tedder deflector plates must bereinstalled! (See chapter "Installing the Auger-Type Cross Conveyor".)

(but in the opposite order) Otherwise license to operator becomes void

Fig. 283

Pos: 78.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.docx @ 168398 @ @ 1

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Pos: 78.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

320

Pos: 78.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Zusatzausrüstung- Mulchgerät @ 0\mod_1196750242750_78.docx @ 12454 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

15.3 Additional Equipment – Mulching Device

Mulching devices can be used as additional equipment. For further information, please ask the mulching device dealer

Address:

Van Wamel BV

Energieweg 1

NL-6658 AE Beneden-Leeuwen

Pos: 78.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Only attachment and detachment of mowing units is described below.

For information on operation, service, attaching, and detaching mulching devices, please consult the mulching device manufacturer.

321

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abbau der Mäheinheiten @ 0\mod_1196750875734_78.docx @ 12492 @ 3 @ 1

15.4 Removing Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 78.18.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

15.4.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 78.18.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Vorraussetzung am Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196751006250_78.docx @ 12530 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met in advance on the BiG M:

• The front mowing unit is in transport position

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

• Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off)

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode)

• Close the shut-off valve for the front outrigger

Pos: 78.18.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau Schutztuch @ 0\mod_1196751259531_78.docx @ 12549 @ @ 1

Removing the Guard Cloth

Pos: 78.18.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 284

• Detach the guard cloth (1) with the expander band (2)

322

Pos: 78.18.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/D/Demontage der Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751819984_78.docx @ 12594 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

15.4.2 Removing of the compensation springs

Pos: 78.18.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 78.18.7.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Demontage Entlastungsfedern BM 420 @ 86\mod_1319617657714_78.docx @ 739404 @ @ 1

2 2 3

3 1

1

Fig. 285

Note

Detach the compensation spring (1) only in transport position.

To do this:

• Release the cotter pin (2)

• Detach the compensation springs (1) and set down the front mowing unit

Pos: 78.18.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

With hydraulic front guard flap option:

• Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (3) and put them down on front mowing unit

BM 420 0053

323

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau der Gelenkwelle: @ 0\mod_1196752140328_78.docx @ 12651 @ 3 @ 1

15.4.3 To remove the PTO shaft:

Fig. 286

• Open the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Detach the support chain (1)

• Remove the screw (2) from the PTO shaft

• Pull the PTO shaft (3) off the front mower

• Connect the PTO shaft (3) with support chain (1) to the "Weiste" triangle (4).

Pos: 78.18.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Schmierleitung am Verteiler trennen @ 149\mod_1361518645841_78.docx @ 1332151 @ @ 1

Fig. 287

• Disconnect the lubrication line (1) to the distributor (2).

Pos: 78.18.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If the pressure on the lubrication lines is too high, loosen a lubrication point first to reduce the pressure. Do not close the line (1)! (Grease under high pressure)

324

Pos: 78.18.12 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau des Weistedreiecks BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320145370002_78.docx @ 741555 @ 3 @ 1

15.4.4 Remove the Weiste Triangle

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 288

• Raise the front lifting gear slightly inching with the (8) key (first gear) on the multi-function lever

This will relieve the locking bolts (1) on the Weiste triangle.

• Dismount the locking bolt (1) and remove it

• Adjust the top suspension arm (2) until it is free of tension

CAUTION! - Do not lower the front mowing unit too far

Effect: Damage to the machine

In the following work step, make certain not to lower the front lifting gear too far. Doing so will damage the front mowing unit.

• You can use the (11) key on the multi-function lever to lower the front lifting gear until the front lifting gear is under the Weiste triangle

• Press the (8) key on the multi-function lever briefly (up to the first gear) to stop the lowering process

325

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Caution! - The front lifting gear is raised in reverse travel.

Effect: Damage to the machine

The (Road/Field) release switch must be in "Road Travel" position.

Fig. 289

Switch the (Road/Field) release switch into "Road Travel" position.

Note

This prevents the front lifting gear from automatically being raised during reverse travel.

Move the machine in reverse in Road mode.

Pos: 78.18.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Anbau des Frontmähwerks BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289230198187_78.docx @ 502516 @ 3 @ 1

15.4.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit

2 1

BMII-313

Fig.290

The front mowing unit is attached in the reverse order.

Pos: 78.18.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The lifting gear can be raised by inching operation (first step) with the (8) key on the multifunction lever.

Connect the cardan shaft (1) high on the Weiste triangle (2) to avoid a collision with the front mower plate

326

Pos: 78.18.15.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196757669828_78.docx @ 12767 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

15.4.6 Removing the Side Mowing Unit

Pos: 78.18.15.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.18.15.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 186\mod_1379945215196_78.docx @ 1605173 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following prerequisites must be met:

– The traction drive release switch must be in position I, switched off.

– The road/field release switch must be in position II, field mode.

• The hydraulic axle suspension must be in mowing position, refer to chapter Info Centre

“Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”.

Pos: 78.18.15.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 2 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758043531_78.docx @ 12805 @ @ 1

Step 2: for standard equipment:

Fig. 291

Set spring compensation to minimum.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing units out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Move the socket pin (1) to pos. I and secure it with a linch pin.

Pos: 78.18.15.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.

327

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.15.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 3 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 46\mod_1283840472171_78.docx @ 451109 @ @ 1

Step 3:

Fig. 292

With hydraulic spring compensation design (optional):

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position. compensation. or

6

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring the keys and the key reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units to

"zero bar".

• Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Pos: 78.18.15.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 4 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758874468_78.docx @ 12843 @ @ 1

Step 4:

Fig. 293

• Insert the clamping plate (1) (Item No. 233 505 0) from above into the right and left spring assemblies (2)

Note

Pos: 78.18.15.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Both clamping plates on the right and left sides are also required for dismantling just one mowing unit to make the outrigger arm free of tension.

328

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.15.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 78.18.15.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 5 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196759083031_78.docx @ 12862 @ @ 1

Step 5:

Fig. 294

The spring assembly can be fitted to the outrigger arm instead of clamping plates.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing unit (1) out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (2) and remove the fastening bolt (2).

• Use a suitable and reliable tool to secure the spring assemblies.

Pos: 78.18.15.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The weight of a spring assembly is about 100 kg.

329

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.18.15.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.18.15.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T1 @ 186\mod_1379943341269_78.docx @ 1605055 @ @ 1

Step 6:

Fig. 295

The mowing unit must be in the working position to be removed.

• Move the opposite mower unit into headland position and support it there.

• Connect the retaining chains (1) on the mowing unit (2).

Pos: 78.18.15.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T2 @ 186\mod_1379941554180_78.docx @ 1604958 @ @ 1

5 4 1 V

III

II

I

2

IV 6 IV

3

BM 400 0168

Fig. 296

• Detach the spring (1), only for the right lateral mowing unit.

Detaching the top link (2)

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the lower attachment bolts (3) and remove the attachment bolt with disc.

• Remove the cube plug (I).

• Remove the lubrication line (II and (III).

• Expose all lines (lubrication lines; electrical lines; hydraulic lines) in the universal joint mount area. To do this, cut the relevant cable ties.

For cross conveyor design

• Disconnect the plug connection (V), speed sensor auger.

• Remove the hydraulic plug (V) from the hydraulic bushing.

Detaching the top link (4)

• Screw out fastening screws (5) and press the top link off the bolts.

Pos: 78.18.15.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw out fastening screw (6).

330

Pos: 78.18.15.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T3 @ 186\mod_1379939898882_78.docx @ 1604759 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 297

• Align the double joint (2). To do this, turn the mowing unit manually on the outer blade drum until the attachment bolt (1) of the double joint is positioned vertically.

• Raise the mowing unit slightly with lifting equipment until the bolts of the universal joint mount have come out of the universal joint bracket.

• Move the mowing unit back to guide the double joint down from the shaft.

• Move the mowing unit away from the machine with lifting equipment and set it down securely.

Pos: 78.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution! - Lift the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Never raise the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

331

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.20.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196760080906_78.docx @ 12900 @ 3 @ 1

15.4.7 Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 78.20.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 78.20.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung (2013-09-23 16:06:56) @ 0\mod_1196757867390_78.docx @ 12786 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:

Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapter entitled

"Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

Pos: 78.20.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Pos: 78.20.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

332

Pos: 78.20.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 2 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196763875859_78.docx @ 13000 @ @ 1

Step2:

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.20.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 298

• Remove the belt guard (1) on the outrigger arm

• Connect the mowing unit to the retaining chains and guide up to the outrigger arm

• Align the universal joint bracket (2) of the mowing unit to the universal joint mount (3) of the outrigger arm.

333

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 78.20.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 3 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196764155312_78.docx @ 13019 @ @ 1

Step 3:

Caution! - Attaching the double joint

Effect: Elevated danger of crushing hands

• Make certain when guiding in the double joint that the lifting equipment is not adjusted or moved. Only the technician is permitted to move the mowing unit manually on the front guard tube.

Fig. 299

• Align the double joint (2) until the attachment bolts (1) of the double joint are positioned vertically.

• Guide the double joint onto the drive PTO shaft

Note

To make it possible to lock in the profile toothing, the drive shaft can be turned by moving the power belt (4) on the outrigger arm.

• Installation of the Belt Guard on the Outrigger Arm

Pos: 78.20.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Die weitere Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge wie der Abbau @ 0\mod_1196764466359_78.docx @ 13038 @ 3 @ 1

15.4.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure.

Pos: 79 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution!

Clamping plates not removed. (When using clamping plates)

Effect: Damages to the machine

• After attaching the mowing units, make certain the clamping plates have been removed

After the mowing unit has been attached, lower the mowing unit down to the ground and remove the two clamping plates on the right and left side.

334

Pos: 80.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Motor @ 0\mod_1196765008937_78.docx @ 13058 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

16 Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196765298062_78.docx @ 13096 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• When working on the engine, always switch off the main battery switch!

• Store lubricants and fuels in suitable containers and make certain they are disposed of properly.

Pos: 80.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motor Übersicht MAN BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289297355812_78.docx @ 503031 @ 2 @ 1

• Exercise caution when draining hot oil or fluid - danger of burns!

16.1.1 Overview of motor

5

9

1

2 3 4 6 7

8

BM 420 0022

Fig.300

2

3

4

Oil dipstick

Fuel Service Centre (KSC)

Air compressor

6 Starter

7 Oil pan

8 Coolant compactor

9 Oil filter

Pos: 80.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungsübersicht (MAN) Auszug @ 52\mod_1289284826828_78.docx @ 502545 @ 3 @ 1

16.2 Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt

Pos: 80.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The purpose of this overview of maintenance is to provide quick orientation. Information is not considered binding. The information in the operating instructions and list of consumables is authoritative.

Only consumables approved in the MAN list of consumables may be used.

Engine maintenance schedule

• All maintenance work on the engine must be performed according to the intervals of the maintenance schedule in the MAN operating instructions.

Oil change intervals

• See maintenance schedule in accompanying document MAN.

335

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Allgemein Kühlflüssigkeit_Keilriemen_Sauberkeit @ 0\mod_1196765525515_78.docx @ 13115 @ @ 1

Cooling water and air intake hoses

Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air intake system every 2 years.

Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.

Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory. The coolant consists of 50 % anti-corrosion antifreeze and 50 % water.

Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately -37° C. See also the engine manufacturer's specifications.

Belts

All belts must be kept continuously under the proper tension.

For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3 operating hours. If necessary, retighten.

Cleanliness

To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine area and especially the exhaust system as well as the areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.

If the crop is very dry and there is a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if necessary.

Pos: 80.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

336

Pos: 80.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 1 BM 420 @ 80\mod_1315485013866_78.docx @ 706053 @ 2 @ 1

16.3 Maintenance Table – Engine

Maintenance interval

Maintenance – Engine

Engine

1 Clean the engine compartment, radiator and radiator screen

2 Engine - oil level check

3 Engine oil change

4 Replacing the engine oil filter

5 Ribbed V-belt

6 Inspection of seal and general condition

7 Check valve play, adjust as needed

8 Drain water separator

Fuel system

1 Replace fuel filter

2 Fuel filter insert

3 Fuel level

4 Add fuel

5 Vent the fuel system

Cooling system

1 Engine coolant - checks and controls

2 Change engine coolant

3 Air filter – main cartridge

4 Air filter – safety cartridge

5 Check the anti-freeze in the cooling system; top up with anti-freeze, if and when necessary.

Check hose connections

1 Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction and cooling system for tight fit.

2 Check the fuel injection pipe for loose connections.

3 Check the turbo charger screw connections and hose connections for tight fit.

Have the starter checked.

1 Have the three-phase generator checked.

Pos: 80.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

See MAN engine operating instructions

See MAN engine operating instructions

X

X

See MAN engine operating instructions

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

337

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.10 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 2 BM 420 / BM 500 @ 80\mod_1315485162066_78.docx @ 706081 @ @ 1

Maintenance interval

Compressed Air System

1 Check compressed air system for density and corrosion

2 Check / clean drain valve

3 Check compressed air reservoir 1)

4 Drain condensation water

5 Tighten the tightening straps

6 Replace air dryer 1)

1) Every two years

Pos: 80.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X X

X

X

X

338

Pos: 80.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schmutzablagerung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196766936875_78.docx @ 13173 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

16.4 Contamination in the engine compartment

Pos: 80.13 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung Schmutzablagerung im Motorraum (2012-08-10 08:26:39) @ 0\mod_1196769316921_78.docx @ 13154 @ @ 1

Caution! - Contamination in the engine compartment

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

Pos: 80.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Bild Motorraum Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320058149049_78.docx @ 740962 @ @ 1

Fig. 301

Pos: 80.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorraum mit Druckluft säubern @ 0\mod_1196769980062_78.docx @ 13192 @ 2 @ 1

16.5 Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air

Pos: 80.16 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Warnung - Reinigung mit Druckluft_alt @ 0\mod_1196770018125_78.docx @ 13211 @ @ 1

Warning! - Cleaning with compressed air!

Effect: Loss of eyesight!

Pos: 80.17 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Verschmutzungen mit Druckluft wegblasen @ 0\mod_1196770153625_78.docx @ 13230 @ @ 1

• Keep people well away from the working area.

• Wear suitable work clothes to perform cleaning jobs with compressed air (for example eye protection).

When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

Pos: 80.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

339

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorölstand @ 41\mod_1272372368436_78.docx @ 376890 @ 2 @ 1

16.6 Engine oil level

Pos: 80.20 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Motorölstand Achtung! - Ölstand zu niedrig (2012-08-22 09:27:58) @ 41\mod_1272372487467_78.docx @ 376965 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.21 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Bild BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289462193250_78.docx @ 504325 @ @ 1

Caution! - The oil level is too low.

Effect: Engine damage

• It is absolutely essential for the life of the engine that you observe this oil level.

• Check the oil level when the machine in at a horizontal position.

• Do not start the engine if the level is below the bottom mark of the oil dipstick.

Fig. 302

Pos: 80.22 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Text @ 40\mod_1270034947332_78.docx @ 365736 @ @ 1

• Before pulling out the oil dip stick, its environment must be thoroughly wiped clean.

• The oil level must be between the min. and max. marks.

• After the oil level has been checked, reinsert the oil dipstick.

Pos: 80.23 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Motoröl und Filterwechsel (2012-08-22 08:27:22) @ 40\mod_1270034903316_78.docx @ 365711 @ 2 @ 1

16.6.1 Engine oil and filter replacement

Pos: 80.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instruction included with delivery (chapter on Engine oil and Filter replacement)

340

Pos: 80.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider @ 41\mod_1272367873905_78.docx @ 376586 @ 2 @ 1

16.7 Fuel filter/water separator

Pos: 80.26 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Bild BM 420_MAN @ 181\mod_1377159448574_78.docx @ 1556204 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

3

4

2

1

5

6

BM 400 0143_1

Fig. 303

2) Flap

3) Fuel supply valve

5) Viewing glass

4)

6)

Filter pan

Drain plug

Pos: 80.27 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Anbringungsort Text @ 181\mod_1377159258528_78.docx @ 1556175 @ @ 1

The fuel pre-filter is located front right behind the flap over the front wheel.

Pos: 80.28 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Text_MAN @ 181\mod_1377162969471_78.docx @ 1556376 @ 23 @ 1

The fuel pre-filter cleans fuel. The fuel supply valve can be used to interrupt the fuel supply from the tank to the engine, e.g. for maintenance and repairs of the fuel system and for replacing the fuel pre-filter.

16.7.1 Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter

• Turn the fuel supply valve to the right to close the fuel supply.

• Unscrew the filter pan.

• Clean filter pan and filter insert.

Replace the filter insert if there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace it, if necessary.

• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it, if necessary.

• Wet the seal ring with diesel and set it in place.

• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan onto the filter housing.

• Turn the fuel supply valve to the left to open the fuel supply.

Emptying the Water Separator 16.7.2

Pos: 80.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The water that is present in the fuel is collected in the inspection glass. Check every day if water has accumulated in the viewing glass. Drain the collected water and collect it in a suitable container.

Collect draining water in a suitable container.

• Open the drain plug (4).

• Close the drain plug (4).

Dispose of the water according to the applicable provisions.

341

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen @ 57\mod_1295937605015_78.docx @ 547945 @ 2 @ 1

16.8 Replacing the fuel filter insert

Pos: 80.31 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen Bild BM 420 @ 271\mod_1402928480707_78.docx @ 2045857 @ @ 1

2

4

1

3

BM 420 0032_2

Fig. 304

Pos: 80.32 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz Text allgemein @ 271\mod_1402920673519_78.docx @ 2045596 @ @ 1

• Open tank cover to prevent excess pressure in the fuel tank.

• Close the fuel supply valve (2) at the preliminary fuel filter (1).

• Before opening the drain plug (3) on the diesel filter housing, place a suitable container under the outlet nozzle.

• Unscrew the screw cover (4) with filter insert and pull out a piece from the filter housing.

Allow the fuel to run out.

• Remove screw cover with filter insert. Replace filter insert and seal ring.

• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.

• Screw on the screw cover (4) with filter insert and tighten it. Tightening torque 25 Nm.

• Close drain plug at the bottom of the diesel filter housing.

• Open fuel supply valve (2) at the preliminary fuel filter.

• Vent the fuel system.

Pos: 80.33 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Hinweis Nähere Information siehe BA des Motorherstellers @ 57\mod_1295937787078_78.docx @ 547997 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

342

Pos: 80.35 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Filter in Handpumpe wechseln @ 57\mod_1295940657968_78.docx @ 548130 @ 3 @ 1

16.8.1 Replacing the filter in the hand pump

2

3

1

Maintenance – Engine

2

BM 420 0033

Pos: 80.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.305

• Screw on the handwheel for fuel supply (2)

• To block the fuel supply, pull the handwheel (2) all the way up

• Remove the filter pan (1).

• Clean the filter pan and filter insert. If there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the filter insert

• Check the sealing ring for the filter pan and replace it if necessary

• Wet the sealing ring with diesel fuel and set it in place

• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing

• Press the handwheel (2) down again to release the fuel supply

• To vent, perform pump movements with the handwheel (2)

• Screw handwheel (2) in again.

343

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.37.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Harnstoff-Filtereinsatz wechseln @ 60\mod_1297752166282_78.docx @ 560277 @ 2 @ 1

16.9 Replacing Urea Filter Inserts

Pos: 80.37.2 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis Bei Verwendung von Harnstofflösung kann Ammoniak entstehen @ 60\mod_1297763415497_78.docx @ 560539 @ @ 1

Note

Ammonia may be produced when urea solution is used. Therefore whenever changing filters, always wear globes and safety goggles and work in a well ventilated area. If the filters have been opened, all seals must be replaced.

Pos: 80.37.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoffilter Einführungstext @ 60\mod_1297763580418_78.docx @ 560565 @ @ 1

A total of three filters are installed: One main filter (1) and two pre-filters (in the feed module / supply line)

Note

The filter inserts must be replaced every time the engine oil is changed. The two pre-filters must also be replaced when necessary (if there are problems with clogging).

Pos: 80.37.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis mindestens 2 Minuten warten @ 60\mod_1297763173171_78.docx @ 560487 @ @ 1

Note

After the engine is shut off, wait at least 2 minutes to ensure that suction of the urea solution has stopped

Pos: 80.37.5 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis Gebrauchte Harnstofffilter sind Sondermüll @ 60\mod_1297762624204_78.docx @ 560356 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 80.37.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hauptfilter @ 60\mod_1297765689498_78.docx @ 560591 @ @ 1

Used urea filters are special waste.

Main filter

Pos: 80.37.7 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Filter Hauptfilter Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297763293529_78.docx @ 560513 @ @ 1

1

2

5

4

5

3

BM 420 0040

Fig. 306

Pos: 80.37.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Filter wechsel Hauptfilter Text @ 60\mod_1297762963438_78.docx @ 560434 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine and secure the machine from rolling away

• Loosen the drain screw (1), collect the urea solution as it runs out and dispose of it properly

• Unscrew the housing cover (2); replace the filter insert (3), half-moon seal (4), O-ring seals

(5) and the O-ring seal of the drain screw (1)

• Tighten the housing cover ( 25+5Nm )

• Tighten the drain screw ( 4+1Nm )

Pos: 80.37.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Check the system for leaks

344

Pos: 80.37.10 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter im Fördermodul @ 60\mod_1297765901759_78.docx @ 560644 @ @ 1

Pre-filter in the feed module

Pos: 80.37.11 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter im Fördermodul Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297765822832_78.docx @ 560617 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

2

3

BM 420 0041

Fig. 307

Pos: 80.37.12 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter im Fördermodul Text @ 60\mod_1297762778782_78.docx @ 560408 @ @ 1

The pre-filter (2) rests in the supply connection on the bottom of the feed module. It can be unscrewed with a screwdriver.

• Loosen the supply line at the in-connection of the feed module. To do this, press the white release key (3). (Make certain that no liquid runs out from the supply line.)

• Rinse the exposed opening with water to clean it

• Unscrew the old pre-filter anticlockwise with a screwdriver

• Insert a new pre-filter and tighten it with a screwdriver to 0.4 ±0.1 Nm

• Connect the supply line again

Pos: 80.37.13 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter in Versorgungsleitung wechseln @ 60\mod_1297766921822_78.docx @ 560698 @ @ 1

Changing the Pre-filter in the Supply Line

Pos: 80.37.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter in Versorgungsleitung wechseln Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297767076227_78.docx @ 560725 @ @ 1

3

4

BM 420 0042

Fig. 308

Pos: 80.37.15 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter wechseln (Versorgungsleitung) @ 60\mod_1297762687329_78.docx @ 560382 @ @ 1

The pre-filter (2) is located directly in front of the feed module in the supply line.

• To remove the filter, press the white release key (4) and take out the connection piece

• Remove and replace the prefilter insert

Pos: 80.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Before connecting, place a new O-ring seal in the connection piece

345

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.39 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Hinweis Nähere Information siehe BA des Motorherstellers @ 57\mod_1295937787078_78.docx @ 547997 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.40 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoff (2012-08-09 14:23:58) @ 0\mod_1196779500703_78.docx @ 14656 @ 3 @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

16.10 Fuel

Warning! - Danger of explosion!

• Never fill tank while the engine is running.

Pos: 80.41 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Zulässige Kraftstoffe @ 173\mod_1371110979826_78.docx @ 1486158 @ 3 @ 1

Handle fuel carefully. It is readily flammable. Do not smoke when adding fuel to the machine and make certain there are no open flames or sources of sparks in the vicinity.

Fuel must only be added outdoors. Prevent fires by keeping the machine free of dirt and grease residue. Always dispose of spilled fuel.

Quality and purity of fuel are very important for consistent performance and a long engine service life.

For temperatures under 10°C (50°F), always use winter fuel.

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on fuels)

• The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery

16.10.1 Permissible Fuels

Use commercial diesel fuels (DIN EN 590) only. An authorization is needed if you want to use other fuels.

CAUTION! High sulphur content (>0.5% ) in the diesel fuel (outside EU countries):

Damage to the engine due to high corrosion and a strong lifetime reduction.

• Fuels with sulphur content >0.5% are not permissible.

• If the sulphur content is greater than 0.2%, the oil change intervals must be halved. At the same time, the engine oil must only be used according to company standard M 3277.

• If you need any further information, please refer to document MAN consumables chapter

Fuel “ High Sulphur Content in the Diesel Fuel“.

Pos: 80.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

As the engines are filled with engine oil in the factory according to company standard M

3477, the oil must be changed before use.

346

Pos: 80.43 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Tanken @ 41\mod_1271676291625_78.docx @ 372060 @ 2 @ 1

16.11 Tanks

Pos: 80.44 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Kraftstoff tanken Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196779964656_78.docx @ 14675 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

Fig. 309

Pos: 80.45 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Tanken Text (2012-08-09 14:45:20) @ 41\mod_1271676476609_78.docx @ 372085 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1).

• Open the tank cover.

• Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter the fuel before adding it to the tank.)

• Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info Centre display.

• Seal the tank cover tightly.

• Dispose of spilled fuel.

Note

Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing operation to prevent condensation water from forming and freezing in cold weather.

Pos: 80.46 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 700 Liter @ 41\mod_1271832241976_78.docx @ 373233 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.47 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Capacity: about 700 litres

347

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.48 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Tanken von AdBlue Harnstofflösung @ 41\mod_1271679313562_78.docx @ 372210 @ 2 @ 1

16.12 Tanks of urea solution

Pos: 80.49 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Gefahr Ammoniakdämpfe durch Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1289999067218_78.docx @ 508455 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Ammonia vapours

Irritation of the skin, eyes and mucous membranes

Pos: 80.50 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Achtung Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1289999578671_78.docx @ 508501 @ @ 1

If the tank cover of the container for the urea solution is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may emerge. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate the skin, eyes and mucous membranes in particular. This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes. Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

CAUTION!

Make certain that

• children do not reach the area of urea solutions

• the urea solution does not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

In case of eye contact, rinse the eyes immediately with large amounts of clear water

In case of skin contact, rinse the places on the skin immediately with large amounts of clear water.

If urea solution is ingested, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink large amounts of water.

Seek medical attention if necessary.

Pos: 80.51 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis unsachgemäßergerauch von Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1290000893796_78.docx @ 508527 @ @ 1

Note

Improper handling of urea solutions causes hazards for the environment.

Do not allow the urea solution to reach the sewer system, bodies of surface water, the ground water or the soil in large quantities.

Pos: 80.52 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstofflösung (AdBlue) Informationstext @ 41\mod_1271739758758_78.docx @ 372315 @ @ 1

The machine is equipped with a MAN exhaust gas treatment system ( MAN SCR system). This is necessary to be able to observe the legally required exhaust gas limit values. In the MAN

SCR system, exhaust gas is cleaned with the aid of an injected urea solution in a downstream controlled diesel catalytic converter (CD-cat).

The urea solution is a synthetic solution of urea and water. (32.5% urea, 67.5% water in accordance with DIN V 70070). The urea solution is sold by the fuel dealer.

The urea solution is injected in a partial exhaust gas flow upstream from the mixer. It is converted into ammonia, mixes with the rest of the exhaust gas and then goes into the SCR catalytic converter (reduction catalytic converter) where the ammonia and the nitrogen oxides

(NOX) in the exhaust gas are converted into nitrogen and water vapour and are then expelled.

There is an additional tank on the machine for this synthetic urea water solution.

The filling level of the urea solution in the tank is indicated in the info centre display.

Pos: 80.53 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstofflösung Zusatztank Einfüllstutzen rechts @ 174\mod_1371458613539_78.docx @ 1487824 @ @ 1

The filler neck is located on the right-hand side of the machine. It is marked accordingly with a label.

Pos: 80.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

348

Pos: 80.55 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Tanken Bild AdBlue BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320059407403_78.docx @ 741019 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

Fig.310

Pos: 80.56 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Tanken Harnstofflösung (AdBlue) Text @ 41\mod_1271678707828_78.docx @ 372185 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1)

• Open the tank cover

• Fill with urea solution (DIN70070)

• Fill only until the fuelling nozzle shuts off!

• Seal the tank cover tightly

• Eliminate spilt urea solution

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on consumables).

Pos: 80.57 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 70 Liter @ 41\mod_1271831862695_78.docx @ 373209 @ @ 1

Pos: 80.58 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Capacity: about 70 litres

349

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.59 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffanlage entlüften @ 0\mod_1196780180531_78.docx @ 14694 @ 2 @ 1

16.13 Venting the fuel system

Note

For further information please refer to :

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on venting the fuel system).

Pos: 80.60 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel- Allgemein @ 186\mod_1380000935141_78.docx @ 1605955 @ 2 @ 1

The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a lengthy standstill.

Warning!

Cooling system density additives may not be used.

Pos: 80.61 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling system is filled ex works with a special coolant. This coolant protects against corrosion and provides frost protection up to –37° C. The cooling system must always be filled with engine coolant, independently of the season.

If no coolant is available, then - depending on the season -, you should use a mixture of 50 % ethylene glycol antifreeze/anticorrosion agent and 50 % clear, soft water. This mixture also provides corrosion and freezing protection up to –37 ° C.

Note

Follow the engine coolant regulations of the engine manufacturer. For further information please refer to:

• The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification.

350

Pos: 80.62 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorkühlmittel – Kontrolle @ 57\mod_1295938314140_78.docx @ 548023 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

16.15 Engine coolant – checks and controls

Pos: 80.63 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Warnung! - Heißer Verschlussdeckel (2012-08-10 07:46:51) @ 57\mod_1295938377734_78.docx @ 548049 @ @ 1

Warning! - Hot cover

Effect: Hand burns

• Never open the cover (1) while the engine is hot. Switch off the engine and wait until the engine has cooled down.

Pos: 80.64 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel Kontrolle Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1346853756868_78.docx @ 1157837 @ @ 1

1

2

BM 420 0031_1

Fig.311

Pos: 80.65 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel - Kontrolle Text allgemein @ 57\mod_1295882421968_78.docx @ 547854 @ @ 1

Check:

• Check the level of engine coolant every day.

• The engine coolant level must reach up to the middle of the control eye (2)

• If necessary, top up the engine coolant

Fill:

• Turn the cover (1) to the first notch and wait until the overpressure reduces

• Open the cover (1) completely and fill with engine coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).

• Close the cover (1) again.

Pos: 80.66 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel - Füllmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten „Betriebssstoffe“ @ 186\mod_1380002297744_78.docx @ 1606014 @ @ 1

Filling quantity: refer to chapter Technical Data “Consumables”.

Pos: 80.67 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

351

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 80.68 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Luftfilter @ 41\mod_1271407012930_78.docx @ 371355 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 80.69 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Bild BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320066795785_78.docx @ 741136 @ @ 1

1 3

3

2

BM 420 0064

Pos: 80.70 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Text mit Klammern @ 86\mod_1320066913243_78.docx @ 741164 @ @ 1

Fig. 312

Pos: 80.71 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Perform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least when the error message filter appears in the Info Centre Display. for a dirty air

Clean the air filter

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away

• Unlock the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1)

• Pull out the filter insert (3) carefully with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside

• Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years ago must also be replaced.

• Install the filter insert again

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps

352

Pos: 80.72 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Sicherheitspatrone @ 0\mod_1196781597406_78.docx @ 14812 @ 3 @ 1

16.16.1

Pos: 80.73 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatrone Bild BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359551968912_78.docx @ 1297174 @ @ 1

Safety cartridge

1

2

3

Maintenance – Engine

3

4

Pos: 80.74 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatrone Text BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359552426105_78.docx @ 1297203 @ @ 1

Fig. 313

Pos: 81 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Replace safety cartridge

Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and used again!

• Remove the filter insert (3)

• Pull out the safety cartridge (4) with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Install the new safety cartridge

• Install the cleaned or new filter insert (3)

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps (2)

4

BM 420 065

353

Maintenance – compressed air system

Pos: 82.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Druckluftanlage @ 52\mod_1289386214984_78.docx @ 503224 @ 2 @ 1

17 Maintenance – compressed air system

Pos: 82.2 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Gefahr Druckluftanlage steht unter Druck @ 52\mod_1289379943171_78.docx @ 503146 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Compressed air system is under high pressure.

Death or serious injuries.

Before maintenance work on the compressed air system:

Pos: 82.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Druckluftbehälter @ 12\mod_1224144256075_78.docx @ 150965 @ 2 @ 1

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Decrease the pressure in the compressed air system

17.1 Compressed-air reservoir

Pos: 82.4 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Druckluftbehälter Bild + Legende Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379922842747_78.docx @ 1601147 @ @ 1

1

5

4

3

2

2

BM 420 0038_1 BM 420 0051_1

Fig. 314

1) Compressed air reservoir 2) Drain valves

4) Nuts

Pos: 82.5 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Druck abbauen @ 83\mod_1317301940569_78.docx @ 728962 @ @ 1

Release pressure

• Set the vehicle securely down

• Activate the drain valve (2) on the compressed air reservoir (1) until excess pressure is built up

Pos: 82.6 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Druckluftbehälter kontrollieren (2014-04-22 11:21:17) @ 52\mod_1289380276328_78.docx @ 503276 @ 3 @ 1

17.1.1 Checking the compressed air reservoir

DANGER! – Compressed air reservoir corroded or damaged

Death or serious injuries

• Observe test intervals

Pos: 82.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Have damaged compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a specialist's workshop

Have the interior area of the compressed air reservoir (1) checked in accordance with national requirements. A check is recommended at intervals of 2 years.

354

Pos: 82.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Entwässerungsventil kontrollieren @ 52\mod_1289391310593_78.docx @ 503391 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – compressed air system

17.1.2 Checking the drain valve

Pos: 82.9 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Entwässerungsventil (2014-04-22 11:31:20) @ 83\mod_1317301026024_78.docx @ 728934 @ @ 1

Caution! - Water in the system

Damage due to corrosion

• Check and clean drain valve (according to Maintenance Table - Engine)

• Replace the defective drain valve immediately

• Switch off and secure the machine

• Open the drain valve and allow the condensation water to run out

Pos: 82.10 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Spannbänder nachziehen @ 52\mod_1289385925093_78.docx @ 503198 @ 2 @ 1

• Check the drain valve, clean it and screw it in again

17.1.3 Retighten tensioning belts

• Check the tensioning belts (3) of the compressed air reservoir to ensure they are properly seated

Pos: 82.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lufttrockner wechseln @ 186\mod_1379923903048_78.docx @ 1601354 @ 2 @ 1

• If necessary, retighten the tensioning belts with the nuts (4)

Pos: 82.12 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Lufttrockner wechseln Bild BM 420 @ 186\mod_1379925526440_78.docx @ 1601531 @ @ 1

1

BM 420 0050_2

Fig. 315

Pos: 82.13 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Lufttrockner wechseln Text BM 420 @ 130\mod_1346907659525_78.docx @ 1157995 @ @ 1

The container (1) must be replaced every 2 years. The container must be replaced earlier if the dirt rate of the compressed air is too high.

Note

The container (1) must be disposed correctly.

• Switch off and secure the machine

Pos: 83 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Loosen and unscrew the container by using the band key

• Clean the housing seat and the threaded journal of the air dryer and check for function

• Grease the seal of the container and the threaded journal slightly

• Unscrew the container manually onto the air dryer housing until the seal rests on the housing. Tighten manually with half a turn afterwards (max. 15 Nm)

• Vent the air dryer and check for density

• Tighten container, if necessary (vent them before tightening)

355

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196781956937_78.docx @ 14832 @ 2 @ 1

18

Pos: 84.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

18.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 84.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196782315875_78.docx @ 14851 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning.

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Pos: 84.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Bei unregelmäßiger Kontrolle der Messerklingen und Haltebolzen @ 0\mod_1196782406281_78.docx @ 14870 @ @ 1

Danger! - When checking the cutter blades and retaining bolts only sporadically

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Pos: 84.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

356

Pos: 84.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Probelauf @ 0\mod_1196833698843_78.docx @ 15023 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

18.1.1 Test run

Pos: 84.7 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Probelauf Mehrzahl @ 0\mod_1196782825187_78.docx @ 14889 @ @ 1

Danger! - Testing the machine after repair, maintenance or cleaning work and after technical intervention.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The mowing unit must be in working position

• Do not switch on the drives until the mowing units are resting on the ground and you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone.

• Start a trial run of the machine only from the driver’s seat.

Pos: 84.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1196782991234_78.docx @ 14927 @ 2 @ 1

18.2 Spare Parts

Pos: 84.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Verwendung von nicht zugelassenen Ersatzteilen @ 0\mod_1196783037140_78.docx @ 14946 @ @ 1

Danger! - Using non-approved spare parts.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or loss of warranty claims as well as exclusion of liability

• Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer.

The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 84.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Werkzeugkasten @ 0\mod_1196832731327_78.docx @ 14985 @ 2 @ 1

18.3

Pos: 84.11 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Werkzeugkasten Bild Big M 420 @ 87\mod_1320314522580_78.docx @ 744658 @ @ 1

Tool box

BM 420 028_1

Pos: 84.12 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Werkzeugkasten Text @ 87\mod_1320314730733_78.docx @ 744686 @ @ 1

Fig.316

Each one tool box is located behind the flaps (1) on the right and left machine side.

The on-board tool as well as the mounting parts for the first installation are located in the left tool box.

Pos: 84.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

357

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle- Mähwerke BIG M 420 @ 86\mod_1320145802321_78.docx @ 741583 @ 2 @ 1

18.4 Maintenance Table – Mowing Units

Maintenance interval

1

Main gearbox – CV lateral mowing units

Oil level check

2

Angular gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

3

Input gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

4

Front mower speed gearbox (CV)

Oil level check

5

Angular gearbox for front mower CR

Oil level check

6 Gearbox for top roller drive CRi (optional)

Oil level check

7

Front mower cutter bar CV + CRi

Oil level check

8

Cutter bar for lateral mowing units

Oil level check

Pos: 84.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

9

Cutter blades

Check screw

10

Mowing discs / mower drum

Check

Screw

11

Rotary hub

Check

Screw

12

Conditioner belt drive

Clean

Screw

13

V-shaped tines and retaining bolts

Check

Screw

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

358

Pos: 84.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Anzugsdrehmomente @ 45\mod_1277103093968_78.docx @ 410970 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.17 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugsmomente/Drehmomente @ 45\mod_1277102920578_78.docx @ 410945 @ @ 1

The tightening torque M

A

is stated in Nm

(unless otherwise indicated).

A = Thread size

(The stability class can be seen on the head of the screw.)

M 4

A

Ø

5.6 6.8 8.8 10.9

12.9

M

A

(Nm)

2.2 3 4.4 5.1

M 5

4.5 5.9 8.7 10

M 6 7.6 10 15 18

M 8 18 25 36 43

M 10

29 37 49 72 84

M12

42 64 85 125 145

M14 100 135 200 235

M14x1.5 145 215 255

M 16

160 210 310 365

M16x1.5

M30

225 330 390

M 20

M 27x2

425 610 710

M 24

M 27

730 1050 1220

M 24x1.5

350

M 24x2

800 1150 1350

1100 1550 1800

1150 1650 1950

1450 2100 2450

NOTE

Pos: 84.18 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Schrauben (50h) anziehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.docx @ 15293 @ @ 1

The table above does not apply to countersunk screws with a hexagonal socket head if the countersunk screw is tightened with the hexagonal socket head.

Note

Pos: 84.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

359

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Anzugsdrehmomente über Innensechskant @ 45\mod_1277106415765_78.docx @ 411230 @ 3 @ 1

18.6 Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws)

Pos: 84.21 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugsmomente/Drehmomente über Innensechskant @ 45\mod_1277106232328_78.docx @ 411205 @ @ 1

The tightening torque M

A

is stated in Nm

(unless otherwise indicated).

A = Thread size

(The stability class can be seen on the head of the screw.)

A

Ø

5.6 8.8 10.9

12.9

M

A

(Nm)

M 4

2.5 3.5 4.1

M 5

4.7 7 8

M 6 A

M 8

20 29 35

M 10

23 39 58 67

M 12

34 68 100 116

M 14

M 16

BM 400 0234

M 20

Pos: 84.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Abweichendes Drehmoment @ 0\mod_1196950054171_78.docx @ 15312 @ 3 @ 1

NOTE

The table above applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket heads and metric threading that are tightened by the hexagonal socket head.

Pos: 84.23 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugsmomente/Abweichendes Drehmoment Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196949184374_78.docx @ 15274 @ @ 1

Screws / nuts

Nut for shear protection (rotary hub)

MA [Nm]

300

Bearing housing for cutting disc 42

Bearing housing for blade drum 42

Pos: 84.24 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Schrauben (50h) anziehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.docx @ 15293 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

360

Pos: 84.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Frontschutz öffnen @ 40\mod_1270558849981_78.docx @ 367142 @ 3 @ 1

18.7

Pos: 84.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 2 @ 1

Opening the Front Guard

18.7.1 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 84.28 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Frontschutz öffnen an den Seitenmähwerken BiG M 420 @ 87\mod_1320316791589_78.docx @ 744802 @ @ 1

4

1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2

3

2

BM 400 0229

Pos: 84.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 317

The front guard (2) on the cutter bar can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

To do this:

• Use the special tool (1) (located in the tool box) to release the lock of the front guard (2).

• Push the front guard (2) as far forward as it will go and the swivel it up.

• Secure the front guard (2) against folding down with a tension spring (3).

Note

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (2) and push it in until the interlocks (4) have engaged (right and left).

361

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

18.7.2

Pos: 84.31 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Frontschutz öffnen Frontmähwerk @ 87\mod_1320315334038_78.docx @ 744714 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

1

BM 420 069

Fig. 318

The front guard (1) on the front mowing unit can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

A screw driver is used to open the front guard. Use the screw driver to push in the ratchet mechanism.

Pos: 84.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (1) again.

362

Pos: 84.33 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Zettergehäuse reinigen @ 182\mod_1377502069378_78.docx @ 1562430 @ 2 @ 1

18.8

Pos: 84.34 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Zettergehäuse reinigen Bild @ 182\mod_1377502729488_78.docx @ 1562518 @ @ 1

Cleaning the Tedder Housing

2

1

1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2

Pos: 84.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Zettergehäuse reinigen @ 182\mod_1377499400184_78.docx @ 1562402 @ @ 1

Fig. 319

For cleaning work in the inside of the tedder, folding ground flaps (1) are mounted on the lateral mowing units.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Loosen the screw connections (2).

• Open the ground flap.

• Clean the inside of the tedder (a).

• Close the ground flaps and tighten the screw connections (2).

Pos: 84.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

363

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Verstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226557103071_78.docx @ 166210 @ 2 @ 1

18.9 Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor

Pos: 84.38 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Inbetriebnahme/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme_2 @ 13\mod_1226501654990_78.docx @ 166160 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of the machine, moving parts of the machine and / or unexpected movement of the machine.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until machine parts that are still in motion have coasted down to a stop.

Pos: 84.39 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Verstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226500830396_78.docx @ 166140 @ @ 1

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by means of wheel chocks.

1

Pos.I

Pos.II

1

Pos: 84.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2 2

BM 400 0233

Fig. 320

The hydraulic auger hood (1) must be secured against folding down during maintenance, cleaning and repair work on the augers by means of the spring cotter pins (2).

To do this:

• Lower all mowing units to the ground.

• Open the hydraulic auger hoods (1).

• Secure the hydraulic auger hood (1) by moving the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) from pos. I to pos. II.

• After the fault is eliminated, move the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) back to their original positions (from pos. II to pos. I).

• Close the hydraulic auger hood.

364

Pos: 84.41 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Scherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264082884090_78.docx @ 341094 @ 2 @ 1

18.10

Pos: 84.42 /BA/Wartung/Scherbolzen/Scherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264062362856_78.docx @ 340785 @ @ 1

Shear pins on the conditioner

Maintenance – Mowing Units

BM 400 0257

Pos: 84.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 321

The conditioners of the front mowing units and lateral mowing units (right / left) on

BiG M 400 CRI / BiG M 420 CRI are each secured with a shear pin (1). The shear pin shears off as soon as an overload occurs.

The shear pin is located on the flange (2) between the gearbox tower and the conditioner rollers. The spare shear pins (3) and spare shear bushings (4) are located on the conditioner housing.

Replacement of shear pins

• Front mowing unit and lateral mowing units right / left must be placed on the ground

• Switch machine off, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key; wait until the machine parts which keep on rotating stopped completely; secure the machine with wheel chocks against rolling.

• If necessary, turn the cutter bar manually until the grooves of the flanges are positioned next to each other

• Take the spare shear pin (3) with the two bushings (4) and preassemble the bushings with a distance of 5mm

• Place the preassembled shear pins with bushings (3, 4) into the grooves of the flange

• Tighten the shear pins

365

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.44 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Füllmengen und Schmiermittelbezeichnungen der Getriebe @ 0\mod_1196951094046_78.docx @ 15335 @ 2 @ 1

18.11 Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes

Pos: 84.45 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 84.46 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Filling

Quantity

Filtered oils

[Litres] Brand name

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Pos: 84.47 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 84.48 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Filling

Quantity

SAE 90

Filtered oils

Bio-degradable lubricants

On request

** = lateral mowing units

Brand name

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name Brand name

Pos: 84.49 /BA/Wartung/Zeitintervalle an den Getrieben 200 h @ 0\mod_1196951919921_78.docx @ 15373 @ 3 @ 1

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Cutter bar

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

SAE 90 On request

18.11.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)

Note - Oil level check and oil change (gearboxes) and lubricating the machine

Effect: Long expected service life of machine

• First oil change on all gearboxes after 50 operating hours, then every 200 operating hours

(but at least once a year).

Pos: 84.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Before using the machine always check the oil level.

• With bio-degradable oils the changing intervals must be complied with absolutely because of ageing of the oils.

366

Pos: 84.51.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005740033_78.docx @ 15416 @ 3 @ 1

18.12

Pos: 84.51.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 2 @ 1

Main gearbox

18.12.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 84.51.1.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Hauptgetriebe seit. Mähwerke @ 272\mod_1403246305250_78.docx @ 2049365 @ @ 1

2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2 4

3

1

BM 420 0174

Fig. 322

Pos: 84.51.1.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1197006270283_78.docx @ 15473 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Pos: 84.51.1.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölkontrolle Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196952482749_78.docx @ 15393 @ @ 1

Changing the oil:

• Unscrew the measuring rod (2).

• Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

• Fit the oil screw plug with a new seal.

• Top up the oil from above (the dip stick hole); screw the dip stick (2) back in.

Pos: 84.51.1.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.1.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

367

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.3.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Winkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 84.51.3.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.docx @ 15609 @ 2 @ 1

18.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 84.51.3.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197008732315_78.docx @ 15629 @ @ 1

3

1

EC-152-0

Fig. 323:

Pos: 84.51.3.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.51.3.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Belüftungsfilter Öl absaugen @ 0\mod_1197009428424_78.docx @ 15668 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew venting filter (3) and extract the oil

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Top up oil from above (oil level up to bore hole (1)).

• Screw in the ventilation filter (3).

Pos: 84.51.3.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.3.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.51.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

368

Pos: 84.51.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Eingangsgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005979596_78.docx @ 15454 @ 3 @ 1

18.14

Pos: 84.51.5.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.docx @ 15609 @ 2 @ 1

Input gearbox

18.14.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 84.51.5.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Eingangsgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197009824221_78.docx @ 15727 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-0-040

Fig. 324:

Pos: 84.51.5.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.51.5.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel_ALT/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010026283_78.docx @ 15747 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 84.51.5.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.5.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

369

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schaltgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197010889455_78.docx @ 15766 @ 3 @ 1

18.15

Pos: 84.51.7.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 2 @ 1

Speed gearbox

18.15.1 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 84.51.7.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Schaltgetriebe CV-Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197012856815_78.docx @ 15805 @ @ 1

EC-1-041

Fig. 325:

Pos: 84.51.7.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.51.7.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel_ALT/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010026283_78.docx @ 15747 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 84.51.7.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.7.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

370

Pos: 84.51.9.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Winkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 84.51.9.2 /Abkürzungen /CR-Ausführung @ 194\mod_1383299073254_78.docx @ 1647987 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.51.9.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterteil @ 10\mod_1221640227712_78.docx @ 135712 @ 3 @ 1

CR design

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.9.4 /BA/Wartung/Hinweis Ölstandskontrolle in Arbeitsstellung und in waagerechter Stellung der Maschine vornehmen @ 194\mod_1383554973754_78.docx @ 1649577 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.9.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe CRI @ 0\mod_1197013688111_78.docx @ 15844 @ @ 1

Perform oil level check and oil change while the machine is in a horizontal position!

2

1

EC-189-0

Fig. 326:

Pos: 84.51.9.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel / Ölkontrolle:Legende zu Grafik Kontrollschraube / Ablassschraube @ 194\mod_1383299451132_78.docx @ 1648045 @ @ 1

1) Inspection screw / control hole 2) Drain plug

Pos: 84.51.9.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 84.51.9.8 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Intervall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 84.51.9.9 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle NEU über Kontrollschraube ohne Einfüllschraube @ 158\mod_1364483633589_78.docx @ 1391741 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Oil level up to control hole.

If the oil reaches the control hole:

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If the oil does not reach the control hole:

• Top up oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.51.9.10 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel NEU ohne Einfüllschraube @ 158\mod_1364483760090_78.docx @ 1391770 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 84.51.9.11 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.51.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

371

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.11.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Getriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 11\mod_1223618840051_78.docx @ 148283 @ 2 @ 1

18.17 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive

Pos: 84.51.11.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Getriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 0\mod_1197016558018_78.docx @ 15923 @ @ 1

1

EC-186-0

Fig. 327:

Pos: 84.51.11.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.docx @ 15649 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 84.51.11.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel_ALT/Ölwechsel Version2 @ 0\mod_1197016258486_78.docx @ 15884 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (1) (oil level up to hole (1))

Pos: 84.51.11.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.11.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

372

Pos: 84.51.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Ölstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 3 @ 1

18.18

Pos: 84.51.13.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 2 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

Maintenance – Mowing Units

18.18.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 84.51.13.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.51.13.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Mähholm ausrichten @ 0\mod_1197017956815_78.docx @ 16042 @ 3 @ 1

18.18.2 Aligning the Cutter Bar

Pos: 84.51.13.5 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Vorraussetzung Ausrichten Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018894471_78.docx @ 16061 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch

Pos: 84.51.13.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähholm ausrichten Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018990346_78.docx @ 16101 @ @ 1

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Fig. 328

Aligning the mowing units crosswise

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bars.

Standard design:

• Align the cutter bars horizontally (see Chapter "Setting for Cutting Height on the Front

Mowing Unit" and Setting for Cutting Height on the Lateral Mowing Unit").

With hydraulic cutting height option:

• Align the cutting bars horizontally (See Info Centre chapter "Aligning the Mowing Units").

Lengthwise

• Place manual spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

Pos: 84.51.13.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Use wedges to align the cutter bar horizontally.

373

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.13.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

18.18.3 Checking the oil level

Pos: 84.51.13.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 84.51.13.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.51.13.11 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197026101830_78.docx @ 16184 @ @ 1

Allow the machine to run briefly. Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

2

BMII-362

Fig. 329:

• Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar.

• The oil level must be up to the bore hole. If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

Pos: 84.51.13.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.

374

Pos: 84.51.13.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 84.51.13.14 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Mähholm Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379669854604_78.docx @ 1600701 @ @ 1

2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

1

BMII-363

Fig. 330

1) Inspection screw / oil filling hole 2) Cover

• To lower the cutter bar to the cover, slightly raise the front mowing unit and set a wood beam underneath on the opposite side of the cover.

• Lower the front mowing unit until the cutter bar rests on the wood beam and is lower in the direction of the cover.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away.

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Screw out one of the both inspection screws on the cutter bar and top up oil via oil filling hole.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• To check the oil level, align the cutter bar crosswise and lengthwise (refer to chapter

“Aligning the Cutter Bar”).

Note

Pos: 84.51.13.15 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.13.16 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 84.51.13.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

375

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.13.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Ölstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 3 @ 1

18.19

Pos: 84.51.13.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 2 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

18.19.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 84.51.13.20 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 84.51.13.21 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.51.13.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

18.19.2 Checking the oil level

Pos: 84.51.13.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186\mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Fig. 331

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 84.51.13.24 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Seitenmähwerke Big M 400 @ 186\mod_1379669908986_78.docx @ 1600730 @ @ 1

• Allow the lateral mowing units to run briefly in working position.

• Wait until cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it against rolling.

• Open the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

• Loosen the lower oil level inspection screw on the cutter bar slightly.

The oil level is OK if oil emerges from the hole.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If no oil leaks:

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• Close the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

Pos: 84.51.13.25 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.51.13.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

376

Pos: 84.51.13.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.51.13.28 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.51.13.29 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186\mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Fig. 332

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 84.51.13.30 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379669463327_78.docx @ 1600563 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The lateral mowing units are folded up.

– The machine is turned off and secured against rolling away.

– The ground flap is opened, for the cross conveyor design

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Note

Pos: 84.51.13.31 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Check the oil after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 84.51.13.32 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

377

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.53.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kontrolle der Mähklingen und Messerhalterung @ 0\mod_1197265641329_78.docx @ 16323 @ 2 @ 1

18.20 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder

Pos: 84.53.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Fehlende und beschädigte Mähklingen und Mähklingenhalterungen @ 0\mod_1197265722813_78.docx @ 16342 @ @ 1

Pos: 84.53.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1197265959110_78.docx @ 16361 @ 3 @ 1

Warning! - Missing and damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or damage to the machine

• Check cutter blades at least once per day and check retaining bolts every time you change the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

• Immediately replace missing or damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers

Pos: 84.53.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Die Bohrung der Mähklingen kann sich durch Verschleiß aufweiten. @ 10\mod_1221048982715_78.docx @ 131675 @ @ 1

The borehole on the cutter blades may spread due to wear.

Pos: 84.53.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Zu geringe Materialstärke an den Mähklingen_neu @ 3\mod_1204727167898_78.docx @ 72588 @ @ 1

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the cutter blades.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Pos: 84.53.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähklingen beidseitig verwenbar_neu @ 3\mod_1204728012601_78.docx @ 72608 @ @ 1

• The cutter blades must be replaced at the latest when the wear limit is reached (see mark

(1) on the cutter blade; dimension a less than or equal to 7 mm). a

1

EC 253 0

Pos: 84.53.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 333

Note - The cutter blades can be turned around and used on both sides.

• When cutter blades are missing or damaged, they must be replaced as a complete set.

This prevents dangerous unbalanced rotation

378

Pos: 84.53.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Messerschraubverschluss Haltebolzen 14 mm @ 0\mod_1197267907375_78.docx @ 16425 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 84.53.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 334 min. 14 mm EC-240-0

379

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.53.10 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Messerschnellverschluss Haltebolzen 14mm @ 0\mod_1197268087875_78.docx @ 16444 @ 2 @ 1

18.20.3 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

• The material thickness of the leaf spring must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 84.53.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 335 min. 14 mm EC-239-0

380

Pos: 84.53.12 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Blattfedern @ 0\mod_1197268274609_78.docx @ 16464 @ 2 @ 1

18.20.4 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Worn application seam on the leaf springs.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the leaf springs for damages at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

• The abrasion limit of the leaf springs will be achieved if the application seam (1) is worn on one point.

1 1

EC 225 0

Fig. 336

Note

Pos: 84.53.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Use only original Krone spare parts to replace the leaf springs.

381

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.53.14 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Messerteller bzw. -trommeln @ 0\mod_1197268487390_78.docx @ 16483 @ 3 @ 1

18.20.5 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Danger! - Deformed Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the cutting discs or blade drums for damages at least once per day or after contact with foreign objects.

• In case of deformed cuttings discs or drums, the dimension of A = 48 mm must never be exceeded.

1

A

EC-0-211

Fig. 337

Note

Pos: 84.53.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cutting discs or drums must be replaced by Original Krone spare parts only.

382

Pos: 84.53.16 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Verschleissgrenze für Auswaschungen @ 0\mod_1197268738875_78.docx @ 16502 @ 3 @ 1

18.20.6 Abrasion Limit

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Abrasion on the cutting discs / blade drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The abrasion limit (2) will be achieved if the min. material thickness of 3 mm is no longer given.

2

2

EC-226-0

Pos: 84.53.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 338

Note

If cutting discs or blade drums show deformations or wear in form of abrasions (2) or similar, these components have to be replaced by Original Krone spare parts .

383

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.53.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Messerwechsel an Messertellern @ 0\mod_1197269068562_78.docx @ 16521 @ 2 @ 1

18.21 Blade Changing on Cutting Discs

Pos: 84.53.19 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.53.20 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Sich lösende Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1197269483265_78.docx @ 16540 @ @ 1

Danger! - Cutter blades coming loose

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After changing the blades check that they fit perfectly and that they can move freely.

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

Pos: 84.53.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

384

Pos: 84.53.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Messerschraubverschluß @ 0\mod_1197270941296_78.docx @ 16578 @ 3 @ 1

18.21.1 Blade Screw Connection

Pos: 84.53.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschraubverschluss @ 47\mod_1285661949953_78.docx @ 456898 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-0-250

Pic. 339

• Fold up safety device

• Clean the area

• Remove damaged or worn blades

• To fit the blades, insert the blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1)

• Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid, the blade and the cutting disc

• Place the locknut (4) on the retaining bolt from above and tighten it firmly (tightening torque refer to chapter “Torques”)

• Repeat the process for all blades

• After fitting the blades, fold the safety device down again

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different to those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums

• The locknut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Pos: 84.53.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

385

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.53.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Messerschnellverschluß @ 0\mod_1197271019859_78.docx @ 16597 @ 3 @ 1

18.21.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Pos: 84.53.26 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197271100500_78.docx @ 16616 @ @ 1

2 3 4

5

EC-251-0

Fig. 340

• Clean the area.

• Remove damaged or worn blades.

• Push the special tool (1) {blade key} between the cutter disc (4) and leaf spring (3) and press down with one hand.

• Guide a new blade (2) onto the retaining bolt and allow the blade key to return upwards.

• After fitting the blades, fold the protective device down again.

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different than those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums.

• The hex nut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once.

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

Pos: 84.53.27 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Hinweis - Das Spezialwerkzeug befindet sich im Werkzeugkasten der Maschine. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

Pos: 84.53.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

386

Pos: 84.53.29 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Stoßkanten erneuern @ 0\mod_1197271320468_78.docx @ 16636 @ 2 @ 1

18.22 Replacing the linings

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Caution! - If the linings are checked irregularly.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged linings prior to start-up and replace linings, if necessary!

• Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutter bar material and to the lining or carry out a trial welding if necessary.•

EC-0-012

Fig. 341

• Open the welding seams of the old lining.

• Remove the lining

• Deburr the contact surface.

EC-252-0

Pos: 84.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 342

• Adapt the new lining (3).

• Weld short I seams on the upper surface of the cutter bar in the areas marked (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm).

• Do not weld the edges (2).

• On lower surface of the cutter bar, weld the lining (3) to the cutter bar along the whole length in area (5).

• Do not weld the edges (4).

387

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.55.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kreiselnabe mit Schersicherung @ 0\mod_1197272352468_78.docx @ 16655 @ 3 @ 1

18.23 Rotary hub with shear protection

Pos: 84.55.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 84.55.3 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschreibung Schersicherung Bild BM 400 @ 6\mod_1214562895570_78.docx @ 95092 @ @ 1

BiG M CV 4 b

2

3

1 a

20 030 790 0 20 030 789 0

BiG M CRI

2

3

1

20 030 788 0

4 b a

20 030 787 0

BM 400 0141

Fig. 343

Pos: 84.55.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschreibung Schersicherung Text BM 400/420/500 @ 71\mod_1306154580281_78.docx @ 643772 @ @ 1

For protection against overload on the mowing units, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts

(2) and shear pins (3).

If the machine strikes obstacles (for example stones), the 2 shear pins in the rotary hub will be sheared off. The rotary hub and nut turn upward on the pinion shaft.

• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (in direction of travel) have lefthanded threading.

• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the right (in direction of travel) have right-handed threading.

To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise) rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and pinion shaft (4) for left-hand rotation (LH) have a distinctive grove

(a, b).

• Left-handed (LH) nuts (2) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

• Left-handed (LH) pinion shafts (4) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

Pos: 84.55.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

388

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.55.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Hinweis Fortsetzen der Arbeit nach Ansprechen der Schersicherung BiG M 400 @ 4\mod_1211949254297_78.docx @ 84056 @ @ 1

Note - Continuation of work.

To be able to work again as quickly as possible after a shear fuse engages, you should order two left and two right bearing units from your dealer.

Bearing housing, left Bearing housing, right

BiG M CV

Pos: 84.55.7 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Nach dem Abscheren @ 4\mod_1211951454110_78.docx @ 84095 @ 2 @ 1

BiG M CRI

Order No. 20 030 789 0

Order No. 20 030 787 0

Order No. 20 030 790 0

Order No. 20 030 788 0

18.23.1 After Shearing Off

Caution! - Correct installation position of the bearing housing not observed.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Right-hand (RH) cutting discs and drums always have right-handed pinion shafts and nuts

(no groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

• Left-hand (LH) cutting discs and drums always have left-handed pinion shafts and nuts (with groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

• Remove the cutting disc or drum.

• Completely remove the sheared off bearing housing.

• Install the replacement bearing housing after the cutter disc (BM 400 0141) is set up

Pos: 84.55.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Install the cutting disc or mower drum.

389

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 84.55.9 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Reparatur der abgescherten Lagereinheit @ 4\mod_1211954689922_78.docx @ 84138 @ 2 @ 1

18.23.2 Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit

7

8 a

9

2

3

3

4 d b

1 c

10

BM 400 0170

Fig. 344

• Remove retaining ring (7).

• Unscrew the hexagon head bolt (8).

• Use the special key (10) included with delivery to remove the nut (2).

• Remove the hub (1).

• Remove the damaged shear pins (3).

• Check the nut and hub for damage.

• Fill the space above the taper roller bearing with grease (c).

• Place the hub on the pinion shaft.

• Drive the new shear pins (3) through the hub (1) and shaft (4).

Note - Note the position of the shear pins!

• Drive the shear pins (3) into the hole from outside until the end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).

• The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally (see detail

(I)).

• Install the nut (2) using the special key (10) included with delivery (tighten to a tightening torque of 300 Nm).

• Install and tighten the hexagon head bolts (8) with detent edges.

• Install the retaining ring (7).

Pos: 84.55.10 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Hinweis - Das Spezialwerkzeug befindet sich im Werkzeugkasten der Maschine. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

Pos: 85 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

390

Pos: 86.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Grundmaschine @ 0\mod_1197277779213_78.docx @ 16847 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

19 Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197278033978_78.docx @ 16866 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Maintenance and repair work on safety-related components such as steering or brakes must only be performed by authorised workshops.

Pos: 86.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bremsen @ 0\mod_1197278385463_78.docx @ 16886 @ 2 @ 1

19.1 Brakes

Pos: 86.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Bremsen/Gefahr - Bremsen nicht in Ordnung @ 0\mod_1197279276510_78.docx @ 17044 @ @ 1

Danger! - Problem with brakes

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly.

Pos: 86.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by professional workshops or recognised brake services!

391

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydraulikanlage @ 0\mod_1197278455041_78.docx @ 16905 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 86.7 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Flüssigkeiten unter Druck / Umgang mit Leckagen @ 273\mod_1403616315353_78.docx @ 2053221 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury as a result of incorrect handling of liquids under high pressure.

Effect: Escaping high-pressure liquids can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury.

Repair work on the hydraulic system may only be performed by authorised KRONE professional workshops.

• Depressurise the system before disconnecting lines.

• When searching for leaks, use suitable aids and wear protective goggles.

• High-pressure liquid that is escaping from a small opening is virtually invisible. Therefore, you should use a piece of cardboard or something similar when searching for leaks. Protect your hands and body.

• If liquid penetrates the skin, consult a doctor immediately. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible. Danger of infection! Physicians who are not familiar with this area must consult appropriate information from a competent medical source.

• Check hydraulic hoses regularly and replace if there are any signs of damage or ageing!

The replacement lines must comply with the requirements of the device manufacturer.

• Ensure that all line connections are tight before the pressure in the system builds up again.

Pos: 86.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

392

Pos: 86.9 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle - Grundmaschine BM 420 MAN und Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359647075822_78.docx @ 1301267 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance Interval

Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil level check

Change the hydraulic oil

Replace the hydraulic oil filter

High pressure filter steering hydraulics

High pressure filter work hydraulics

Checking pressure filter (every 1500 h)

Pressure filter, leakage oil pipe for wheel motors

Supply pump pressure filter

Transfer gearbox

Oil level check

Cabin

Replace fresh air filter

Clean fresh air filter

Replace circulation filter

Clean circulation filter

Windshield wiper system

Pilot lamp test

Light function test

Check the foot brake setting.

Readjust parking brake Bowden cable if necessary.

Air conditioning system / heating

Collector / dryer

Refrigerant condition and filling quantity

Checking capacitor

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

393

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance Interval

Belt drives

Fan wheel drive

Drive for outrigger arms

Drive for lateral mowing units

Cross conveyor drive

Tyres

Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks

Inspect tyre air pressure visually

Measure tyre air pressure with instrument: weekly

Tighten wheel nuts front wheel/rear wheel with 630

Nm

(466 lb-ft).

Tightening screws

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the rear axle.

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the wheel hubs.

Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod

Tighten fastening screws of the outriggers on the frame.

Battery

Check the acid density of the battery; charge the battery, if and when necessary, and top up with distilled water.

Pos: 86.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

394

Pos: 86.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Systemaufbau Arbeits- und Bremshydraulik Big M 420 @ 52\mod_1289463554046_78.docx @ 504352 @ 23 @ 1

19.3

19.3.1

Maintenance - hydraulic system

System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Hydraulics – open circuits

Steering hydraulics pump

16 cm 3 /rev

Brake Hydraulics Priority

Parking Brake Operating Brake

Work hydraulics pump

27 cm 3 /rev

Lifting mechanism

Belt tension

Implements

Suspension

Pos: 86.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Pumpen Big M 420 @ 57\mod_1295941050328_78.docx @ 548156 @ 3 @ 1

19.3.2 Pumps

2 1

Pos: 86.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.345

1. Brake and work hydraulics

2. Steering pump

BM 420 0034

395

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hauptblock @ 0\mod_1197292256400_78.docx @ 17161 @ 3 @ 1

19.3.3 Main block

3

Y26

Y19 Y27

1

2

Y25

Y23

Y16

Y21

Y9

Y10

Y8

Y7

Fig. 346

NO. Designation

Pos: 86.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2

3

Drive pressure control

Master control valve pressure control

Y6 Switching to front axle

Y7 Switching to rear axle

Y8 Front drive

Y9 Right drive

Y10 Left drive

Y11 Parking Brake

Y15 Lift suspension

Y16 Lower suspension

Y19 Main valve

Y20 Lift front

Y21 Lower front

Y22 Lift right

Y23 Lower right

Y24 Lift left

Y25 Lower left

Y26 Push off left

Y27 Push off right

396

Y6

BM 400 0221

Pos: 86.16 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Überdruckventile (2012-08-22 14:55:24) @ 0\mod_1197295754025_78.docx @ 17180 @ 3 @ 1

19.3.4 Over-pressure valves

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Note

Over-pressure valves set in the factory

Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out only by the customer service department.

Pos: 86.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellbare Drosseln @ 0\mod_1197295918463_78.docx @ 17218 @ 3 @ 1

The valve blocks have been equipped with pressure control valves. These valves were set at the factory and must not be changed.

Pos: 86.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frontmähwerk Zuschaltgeschwindigkeit @ 13\mod_1225784997962_78.docx @ 163013 @ @ 1

Speed of moving the front mowing unit into operating position

1

BMII-364_1

Pos: 86.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 347

The adjustable throttle (1) to set the speed to move the front mowing unit is located next to the hydraulic tank, on the left-hand side in direction of travel.

397

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydrauliköl @ 0\mod_1197296812478_78.docx @ 17265 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 86.21 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Niemals verschiedene Öle mischen (2012-08-22 15:01:55) @ 0\mod_1197297008369_78.docx @ 17285 @ @ 1

Caution!

Never mix different oils.

• Before changing types of oil please consult our Customer Service.

Never use engine oil.

Pos: 86.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Aufstellung von Mineralölen für die Hydraulikanlage @ 257\mod_1398240822712_78.docx @ 1970671 @ @ 1

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that decompose quickly.

Pos: 86.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Aufstellungs_Tabelle von Mineralölen @ 0\mod_1197297178806_78.docx @ 17304 @ @ 1

ISO viscosity class HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

AVIA

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

Aral Vitam GF 4

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46 Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

DEA Econa PG 46 Astron HLP 46

ELF ELFOLNA

ELFOLNA DS 46

ENGEN

ESSO Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

FINA

FUCHS

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

Renolin PGE 46

HYDRAN 46

FRAGOL Hydraulic

RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15, VG 46

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUIMOLY

Mobil

SHELL Fluid BD 46

Stuart

Theunissen

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

TOTAL

TRIBOL

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

WINTERSHALL

Ultrasyn PG 46

Q8 Haydn 46

Q8 Holst 46

Hydraulic S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

Shell Tellus Oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

Vesta HLP 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Pos: 86.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

398

Pos: 86.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydraulikölstand @ 0\mod_1197297631728_78.docx @ 17342 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

19.5 Hydraulic oil level

Pos: 86.26 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197297750885_78.docx @ 17361 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• When working on the hydraulic system, always switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 86.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydrauliköltank Kontrolle_Wechsel BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225787591212_78.docx @ 163063 @ @ 1

2

1

3

BM 400 0165_1

Fig. 348

Before checking oil level:

• Park the machine horizontally

• Lower all mowing units and switch off the engine.

Oil level check:

• Time interval: Daily

• The oil must be visible in the inspection window (1).

• Refill oil if necessary (2)

Oil change:

• Time intervals: every 500 hours or when the filter warning indicator lights, but at least once a year

• Drain oil with suitable hose via plug-in connection (3)

• Collect the used oil in a suitable collection vessel.

• Top up the oil (2)

• Oil level (oil must be visible in inspection window (1)).

Capacity: approx. 80 l (approx. 21 U.S. gal)

Pos: 86.28 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 86.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

399

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydraulikölfilter ersetzen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225788077446_78.docx @ 163114 @ 2 @ 1

19.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter

2

1

3

BM 400 0218_1

Pos: 86.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 349

Note

Ensure total cleanliness when changing the filter

Properly dispose of filter cartridge that was removed

• Replace the filter element (3) the first time after 50 operating hours, then every 500 operating hours or after each mowing season (at the same time as changing the hydraulic oil).

• Release the filter (2) and unscrew it from its holding.

• Replace the filter with a new filter.

Screw on new filter as follows:

• Moisten the sealing surface of the filter with oil.

• Once the filter seal touches the sealing surface of the filter housing, tighten the filter manually making a 3/4 to 1-1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.

• Check the filter for leaks while the engine is running and tighten if necessary.

400

Pos: 86.32.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hochdruckfilter @ 26\mod_1245836423991_78.docx @ 264126 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.32.2 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Mitteldruckfilter mit elektr. Verschmutzungsanzeige @ 91\mod_1326192916928_78.docx @ 777827 @ @ 1

The filter takes up depositions of solid particles of the hydraulic system. The filtering of the hydraulic circuit serves as a prevention of damages on components of the circuit. The filter is equipped with an electrical contamination indicator. If the degree of contamination is too high, an appropriate error message appears in the display.

Pos: 86.32.3 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Hinweis Fehlermeldung „1501 Druckfilter Lenkhydraulik 1502 Druckfilter Arbeitshydraulik @ 145\mod_1359645603295_78.docx @ 1301176 @ @ 1

Note

If the error message “1501 pressure filter steering hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter steering hydraulics must be replaced.

If the error message “1502 pressure filter work hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter work hydraulics must be replaced.

Pos: 86.32.4 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Hochdruckfilter bei Komfort_Hydraulik Bild_BM 420 @ 174\mod_1371630955909_78.docx @ 1491454 @ @ 1

2

5

1

3

4

Fig. 350

Pos: 86.32.5 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/6) Hochdruckfilter Lenkhydraulik / 7) Hochdruckfilter Arbeitshydraulik @ 145\mod_1359645719424_78.docx @ 1301239 @ @ 1

6) High pressure filter steering hydraulics 7) High pressure filter work hydraulics

Pos: 86.32.6 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Filterelement wechseln @ 26\mod_1245841608710_78.docx @ 264205 @ @ 1

Replacing the Filter Element

Pos: 86.32.7 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Ort Hochdruckfilter Arbeitshydraulik BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359644287555_78.docx @ 1300813 @ @ 1

The filter (6,7) of the hydraulic circuit is located on the left machine side on the engine.

Pos: 86.32.8 /BA/Wartung/Umwelt/Hinweis Entsorgen / Lagern von Öle und Ölfilter Umwelt @ 32\mod_1253101375171_78.docx @ 311770 @ @ 1

ENVIRONMENT! - Disposal and storage of used lubricants and oil filters

Effect: Environmental damage

Store or dispose used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

Pos: 86.32.9 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Mitteldruckfilterelement wechseln(mit Verschmutzungsanzeige) Text @ 175\mod_1372656347161_78.docx @ 1501445 @ @ 1

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Relieve all pressure from the hydraulic system.

• Unscrew the bottom part of the filter (4) from the top part of the filter (1), clean it and make certain that it is not damaged.•

• Remove the filter element (3) and replace it by a new one with identical properties.

• Push a new filter element (3) onto the valve sleeve (5).

• Check the O-ring seal (2) and, if necessary, replace it by a new one with identical properties.

Pos: 86.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw the bottom part of the filter (4) onto the top part of the filter until the stop is reached and turn it back one quarter of a revolution.

• Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and check it for leaks.

401

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.34.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Verteilergetriebe @ 2\mod_1202991526780_78.docx @ 64104 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 86.34.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Selbstfahrer/Verteilergetriebe Bild BM 420 Caterpuillar/MAN @ 181\mod_1376999399451_78.docx @ 1553125 @ @ 1

1

3

BMII-203

Fig. 351

1) Filler plug / filling hole 2) Inspection screw / control hole

Pos: 86.34.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölsorte PAO SHC Mobil 630 verwenden @ 142\mod_1357727534047_78.docx @ 1262085 @ @ 1

Note

Only use gearbox oil (PAO Mobil SHC 630).

Pos: 86.34.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 86.34.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Intervall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 86.34.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle NEU über Kontrollschraube @ 140\mod_1355141753680_78.docx @ 1244582 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Oil level up to control hole.

If the oil reaches the control hole:

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If the oil does not reach the control hole:

• Screw out filler plug.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until the control hole is reached.

Pos: 86.34.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel NEU @ 140\mod_1355142057277_78.docx @ 1244610 @ @ 1

• Screw in the inspection screw and the filler plug and tighten them securely.

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw and filler plug.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via oil filling hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and the filler plug and tighten them securely.

Pos: 86.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

402

Pos: 86.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Luftansaugung und -Verteilung @ 0\mod_1197299076041_78.docx @ 17457 @ 2 @ 1

19.9 Air intake and distribution

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-217

Fig. 352

Pos: 86.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 353

403

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frischluftfilter @ 52\mod_1289402342234_78.docx @ 504132 @ 3 @ 1

19.9.1 Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter

Pos: 86.39 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Frischluftfilter defekt oder falsch eingebaut WARNUNG (2012-08-23 13:28:27) @ 52\mod_1289402772703_78.docx @ 504186 @ @ 1

WARNING! – Fresh air filter faulty or incorrectly installed

Dust gets into the cab, is inhaled, and causes health damage.

• Make certain the filter is seated to form a seal.

• Replace faulty fresh air filters immediately.

Pos: 86.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter Bild BM420/500/BigX @ 134\mod_1351070195091_78.docx @ 1194065 @ @ 1

2 1

4

3

4

BM 420 0023_1

Pos: 86.41 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter text @ 134\mod_1351070370414_78.docx @ 1194152 @ @ 1

Fig. 354

A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Check the fresh air filter for soiling prior to any operation.

Note

If filters are not properly maintained they may become very soiled, no longer ensuring that sufficient fresh air is passed into the cab.

• Open the closing devices (1) by turning 90° clockwise.

• Reverse the locking lever (4) to the left in order to unlock the filter.

• Pull out the fresh air filter (3), check it for soiling and clean it, if necessary.

Pos: 86.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Clean the fresh air filter (3) by knocking it, never clean with compressed air. In case of severe soiling, the fresh air filter (3) must be replaced.

404

Pos: 86.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Umluftsieb @ 0\mod_1197299889400_78.docx @ 17546 @ 3 @ 1

19.9.2 Circulation filter

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX200550

Fig. 355

Note

If the circulating air filter (1) is very dirty, the output of the air conditioning system may be reduced and it may heat up.

• Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.

405

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.45 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Scheibenwaschanlage @ 0\mod_1197300179760_78.docx @ 17565 @ 2 @ 1

19.10 Windscreen washer system

Pos: 86.46 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage Bild Big M 420 @ 181\mod_1377170490274_78.docx @ 1557794 @ @ 1

2

1

3

BM 420 0029_2

Fig. 356

1) Reservoir for windscreen washer system

3) Cover

2) Flap

Pos: 86.47 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage auffüllen @ 126\mod_1345727954351_78.docx @ 1144110 @ @ 1

The reservoir for the windscreen washer system is located front right behind the flap over the front wheel. It is filled from above via the opening in the right platform.

Note

• To obtain a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add some screen cleaner/anti-freeze for the windscreen washer system to the water.

• In winter empty the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze agent.

Pos: 86.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Check the level of the windscreen washer system every day.

• Open the flap.

The liquid level is OK if the windscreen liquid in the reservoir can be seen.

• Close the flap.

The windscreen liquid must be refilled if there is no windscreen liquid in the reservoir.

• Close the flap.

• Put a ladder on the platform.

• To free the opening in the platform, push the protection cover to the side.

• Remove the cover of the reservoir.

• Make sure that the windscreen liquid does not escape from the reservoir when refilling it.

• Attach the cover to the reservoir to close the reservoir.

• Close the opening in the platform with the protection cover.

• Put away the ladder.

406

Pos: 86.49 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Reinigen des Vorabscheiders @ 74\mod_1308831609629_78.docx @ 658490 @ 2 @ 1

19.11

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator

Access to the pre-separator

Warning! – Steep ladder!

Danger of falling

• Always be directed towards the machine when climbing or descending

• Use the handle

• Do not step onto the engine cover of the machine

The pre-separator (1) for the intake air of the engine is maintenance-free. Under specific operating conditions, dirt accumulations on the adjustment plate (2) may arise. These have to be removed if necessary.

3

1

2

BM 420 0043

Fig. 357

The pre-separator (1) can be accessed via the auxiliary ladder (3) (left machine side).

Pos: 86.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Only effect the cleaning of the area around the pre-separator and the cleaning of the adjustment plate (2) of the pre-separator from the auxiliary ladder. Stepping on the machine

(engine cover) is not permitted.

407

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.51.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der Sensoren (linke Maschinenseite) @ 114\mod_1338796047381_78.docx @ 1004692 @ 2 @ 1

19.12 Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side)

Pos: 86.51.2 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren LH BM 420 @ 186\mod_1379912837093_78.docx @ 1600868 @ @ 1

16 20

6

1 2

9a 9b

10

Fig. 358

1

14

22

2

6

16

14 21

9a

22

9b 10

17

21

17

408

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.51.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pos.

1

Sensors

Air filter contamination

2

6

7

8

Moisture / temperature

Lateral mowing unit locking

Spring compensation

Temperature flush valve

9a Auger speed

9b Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

Sensor type

Negative pressure switch

Namur sensor

Optional Tightening torque

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

X

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

14 Position of the outrigger arm Namur sensor

16 Brake tank pressure Manometric switch

17 Manometric switch

20

21

Over pressure/negative pressure air conditioning system

Hydraulic oil tank level

Pressure sensor driving hydraulics

Filling level sensor

Pressure sensor

17 Nm

70 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

409

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.51.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der Sensoren (rechte Maschinenseite) @ 114\mod_1338795965308_78.docx @ 1004663 @ 2 @ 1

19.13 Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side)

Pos: 86.51.5 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren RH BM 420_MAN @ 186\mod_1379654891950_78.docx @ 1599481 @ @ 1

18 7

4

6

9a 9b

Fig. 359

3

23 24

8

14

10

4

7 8

3

5

11 12

19

15 13

5

9a

6

9b 10

BM 420 0060_2

410

12

11

13 14

Maintenance – Basic Machine

15

18

23 24

19

Pos. Sensor designation Sensor type

Pos: 86.51.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

3 Filling level, fuel

4 Suction return air filter

5 Service brake

6 Lateral mowing unit locking

7 Spring compensation

8 Temperature flush valve

9a Auger speed

9b Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

10 Cutting height lateral mowing units

11 Front mowing unit speed

12 Axle suspension position

13 Cutting height front mowing unit

14 Position of the outrigger arm

15 Service brake switch

18 Feedback - drive pumps

19

24

Urea filling level sensor

Temperature sensor exhaust gas

Dipstick sensor

Manometric switch

Pressure sensor

Namur sensor

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

Namur sensor

Rotation angle potentiometer

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Path measurement

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Captive washer potentiometer

(optional)

X)

Tightening torque

60 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

X

X

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a=2mm)

411

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.51.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellung der Sensoren @ 0\mod_1199962173428_78.docx @ 37635 @ 3 @ 1

19.13.1

Pos: 86.51.8 /BA/Wartung/Sensoren/Namursensor d = 12 mm BM 400 @ 35\mod_1258362555125_78.docx @ 335159 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Sensors

19.13.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm

3

1 a

2

BP-VFS-088-1

Fig. 360

The dimension “a” between the encoder (2) and the sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (see table “Position of the sensors”)

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor

• Turn the nuts until dimension "a" (see table “Position of the sensors”) is reached

Pos: 86.51.9 /BA/Wartung/Sensoren/Namursensor d = 30 mm BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380180316348_78.docx @ 1611365 @ 4 @ 1

• Tighten the nuts again

19.13.1.2 Namur Sensor d = 30 mm

3

1

2 a

Pos: 86.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BPXC0172

Fig. 361

The dimension “a” between transmitter (2) and sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (refer to table “Position of the Sensors”).

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor.

• Turn the nuts until the dimension "a" (refer to the table “Position of the sensors”) is reached.

• Tighten nuts again.

412

Pos: 86.53.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Wartung Klimaanlage und Heizung @ 0\mod_1197301016697_78.docx @ 17643 @ 2 @ 1

19.14

Pos: 86.53.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating

Maintenance – Basic Machine

19.15 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 86.53.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/WARNUNG! – Verletzungsgefahr durch Berührung von Kältemittel! @ 0\mod_1197301139072_78.docx @ 17682 @ @ 1

Warning! - Contact with refrigerant

Effect: Injuries

• In case of repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant emissions may occur; these emissions may be liquid or gaseous and are a hazard for man and the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

• Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorised specialists.

• In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet to present to a physician (see Chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).

• Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.

• During refill and repair do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

• Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.

• Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system

Pos: 86.53.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Komponenten der Klimaanlage @ 0\mod_1197301531697_78.docx @ 17701 @ 3 @ 1

19.15.1 Air conditioning components

A Compressor on engine at the left-hand side of the vehicle, driven via V-belt

B Capacitor behind the radiator unit, accessible from the left and right

C Dryer/collector behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

D Evaporator

Pos: 86.53.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 in the cab roof

E Manometric switch on drier, behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

F Expansion valve at the evaporator inlet

G Air conditioning system/heating rotary switch in cab, roof panel

413

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.53.6 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Kältemittel BM 400 @ 126\mod_1345723465211_78.docx @ 1143781 @ 3 @ 1

19.15.2 Refrigerant

CAUTION

Environmental damage due to chemicals!

The air conditioning system is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. However, the refrigerant shall not simply be discharged as the environment will be damaged if refrigerant gets into it.

• Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

• Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

• Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning system carried out only by your Krone dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

Pos: 86.53.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Druckschalter @ 130\mod_1347276640139_78.docx @ 1161115 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 362

NOTE

When the fan speed is at the highest still pleasant performance, set the cooling performance of the air conditioning system to an average value. Let the air conditioning system not operate at the lowest fan speed and highest cooling performance.

Pos: 86.53.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The air conditioning system has been fitted with a manometric switch (1) which shuts down the system in case of excess pressure or negative pressure (on the dryer behind the combined radiator on the left hand side in direction of travel).

414

Pos: 86.53.9 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Sammler / Trockner (2012-09-10 13:37:24) @ 0\mod_1197352605245_78.docx @ 17844 @ 3 @ 1

19.15.4 Collector/drier

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-134

Fig. 363:

Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing.

According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination with the inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.

Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

Note

Pos: 86.53.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°

Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

415

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.53.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kältemittelzustand und die Füllmenge prüfen @ 131\mod_1347277627360_78.docx @ 1161370 @ 3 @ 1

19.15.5 Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity

Fig. 364

Checking the filling quantity

The refrigerant quantity is checked on the viewing glass (2) via the white float ball (5).

Interval for refrigerant level check : refer to chapter Maintenance - Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

Start the engine.

Switch on the air conditioning system and set it to the highest action.

If the white float ball (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is OK.

If the white float ball (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be filled by a specialist workshop.

Checking the refrigerant condition

The refrigerant condition (moisture saturation) is checked on the viewing glass (2) by the orange indicator pearl (3)

Check the interval for refrigerant condition: refer to chapter Maintenance-Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer-receiver-unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

Note

Pos: 86.53.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

416

Pos: 86.53.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kühler und Kühlerraum reinigen @ 182\mod_1377244557397_78.docx @ 1561485 @ 2 @ 1

19.16 Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment

Pos: 86.53.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kondensator prüfen Bild BM 420 @ 182\mod_1377495042110_78.docx @ 1562254 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

2

5

1 6

7

BM 420 0030_2

Fig. 365

Pos: 86.53.15 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kondensator prüfen BM 420 @ 182\mod_1377246091200_78.docx @ 1561573 @ @ 1

Always keep the radiator, the radiator compartment, the condensator block, the sieve drum and the area in front of the sieve drum clean. The named components must be cleaned depending on the degree of soiling, however, at least once a day.

Cleaning the sieve drum

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Fold down the ladder (1).

• Open the tailgate (2).

• Clean the sieve drum (3) and the area in front of the sieve drum.

Cleaning the radiator and the radiator compartment

• Open the radiator guards (4), right and left machine side.

• Release the lockings (5) on the radiator frame and swing up the sieve drum.

• Release the locking on the condenser block (6) and swing the condenser block to the side.

• Clean the radiator (7) and the radiator compartment.

• Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside, making sure that the fins are not damaged.

• Swing back the condenser block and secure it.

• Swivel the sieve drum down and close the locking on the radiator frame.

• Close the radiator guards.

• Close the tailgate.

• Swing up the ladder.

Pos: 86.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

417

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.55.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Riementriebe @ 0\mod_1197276279135_78.docx @ 16733 @ 2 @ 1

19.17 Belt drives

Pos: 86.55.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_3 @ 0\mod_1197353885870_78.docx @ 17920 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

Pos: 86.55.3 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Durchrutschende Riementriebe (2012-08-23 10:45:39) @ 0\mod_1197354754964_78.docx @ 17940 @ @ 1

Caution! - Slipping belt drives

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

• Retighten or replace slipping belt drives immediately.

Pos: 86.55.4 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Riemen allgemein (2012-08-23 11:11:31) @ 13\mod_1226488106287_78.docx @ 165850 @ @ 1

Note

• Keep all belts at good tension constantly.

• Clean dirty belts with caustic cleaning fluid. Do not use petrol or similar products for cleaning.

• Check the tension of new belts after the first 10 operating hours and retension if necessary.

Pos: 86.55.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

418

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.55.6 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis Prüfen nach den ersten 10,50 danach 250 Stunden @ 131\mod_1348120214097_78.docx @ 1164543 @ @ 1

Note

Check the V-belt tension and condition of all belt drives after the first 10, 50 hours of operation and thereafter every 250 operating hours.

• Replace damaged or worn V-belts.

Pos: 86.55.7 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Voraussetzung schaffen Riementriebe prüfen @ 131\mod_1348118753307_78.docx @ 1164485 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Lower the mowing unit into working position

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 86.55.8 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrieb Lüfterrad BM 420_MAN @ 86\mod_1320151714955_78.docx @ 741725 @ 3 @ 1

1

2 a 3

BM 420 0037

Fig. 366:

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 132 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 132 mm is set.

To replace belt (1):

• Relieve the spring (2) in the tension roller (3).

• Remove belt (1).

• The belt pulley (4) must be exactly aligned.

• If necessary, adjust the belt pulleys (4) with the screws (5).

• Set a new belt in place and tension the spring in the tension roller a = 132 mm

Pos: 86.55.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Make sure the fan blade is in a central position in the radiator cover.

419

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.55.10 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Auslegerarme @ 12\mod_1225198179100_78.docx @ 154214 @ 3 @ 1

19.17.2 Outrigger arms a a

SFM1-450

SFM1-460

Abb. 367

Outrigger right / left

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 87 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a= about 87 mm is set.

Note

Pos: 86.55.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Tighten the left and right tensioning system only until the distance tube makes contact in the spring. (Do not overstretch!)

420

Pos: 86.55.12 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemen der Auslegerarme ersetzen BM 420 @ 149\mod_1361776454327_78.docx @ 1334736 @ @ 1

Replace the belt on the outrigger.

1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

4

3

2

BM 400 0167

Fig. 368

• Remove the belt covers.

• Relieve the springs (1) in the tension rollers.

Note

Remove the cover plate (3) on the right side.

• Loosen the lubrication lines (2).

• Replace the belt (4) and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Tighten the springs (1) to a length of 87 mm.

• Install the cover plate (3) on the right side.

Pos: 86.55.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Install the belt covers.

421

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.55.14 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antriebsriemen Mähwerk @ 0\mod_1197357675011_78.docx @ 18056 @ 3 @ 1

19.17.3 Drive of mowing unit

BMII-218

Fig. 369

• The belt tension is produced using the hydraulic cylinder (pressure 50 bar). Reset the single-acting cylinder using the springs.

Replace the lateral mowing unit V-belt

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

BM202340

Fig. 370

• Remove the attachment bolts (1) of the belt covers (2) on both sides.

• Remove the belt covers (2).

• Replace the belt and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Install the belt covers (2) again.

Pos: 86.55.15 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrrieb Querförderer 80mm BM 400/420 @ 13\mod_1226401985570_78.docx @ 165677 @ 3 @ 1

422

19.17.4 Cross Conveyor Drive

8

Maintenance – Basic Machine

1

2

6 7 3 5 4 6

BM 400 0230

Fig. 371

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 80 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Remove the guard (1)

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 80 mm is set.

• Install the guard (1)

To replace belt (3):

• Remove the guard (1)

• Remove the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

• Use the mounting lever (4) to raise the idler pulley (5).

• Remove the old belt (3).

• Place the new belt (3) onto the pulleys (6).

• Lower the idler pulley (5) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (4).

With the V-belt under tension, dimension a must be equal to approx. 80 mm. Correct the belt tension as necessary

• Install the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

Pos: 86.55.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Install the guard (1)

423

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.55.17 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemenantrieb für Aufbereiter prüfen/ spannen/ ersetzen BM 400/420 @ 294\mod_1411481473270_78.docx @ 2308241 @ 3 @ 1

19.17.5 Checking/ tensioning/ replacing belt drive for conditioner

3 2 7

8

6

5

1

4 a= 230

4

Fig. 372

1) Guard

3) Belt/kraftband

6) Pulley

8) Screws

Prerequisite:

– The machine is switched off and secured against rolling away.

– The ignition key is removed and you carry it with you.

– The cross conveyor is removed.

Checking the belt tension

2

BM 420 0176

• Measure dimension a.

– If the dimension a is 230 mm, the belt tension is sufficient.

– If the dimension a is not 230 mm, the belt tension must be corrected.

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce dimension a until the distance a is approx. 230 mm.

Replacing belt

Pos: 86.56 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Dismount ring screw.

• Dismount housing cover.

• Loosen the eight connecting screws of the pulleys.

• Unscrew hexagon socket-head screw and remove the first pulley from the shaft.

• Remove the old belt.

• Place the new belt over the V-belt pulleys.

• Push pulley onto the shaft and secure with eight connecting screws.

• Mount hexagon socket-head screw and washer.

• Tighten ring screw until the dimension a is 230mm.

• Remove guard and housing cover.

424

Pos: 86.57.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

19.18 Tyres

Pos: 86.57.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Warnung - Falsche Reifenmontage @ 0\mod_1197358162433_78.docx @ 18132 @ @ 1

Warning! - Tyre fitting incorrect

Effect: Injuries or damage to the machine

• Fitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

• If tyres are not correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the

KRONE dealer or a qualified tyre specialist.

• When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, the maximum pressure given by the tyre manufacturer must not be exceeded. The tyre or even the wheel rim could explode and/or burst.

• If the tyre heels do not fit properly when the maximum permitted pressure is reached, let out the air, align tyres, lubricate the tyre heels and pump up the tyre again.

• Detailed information about how to fit tyres onto agricultural machinery can be obtained from the tyre manufacturers.

Pos: 86.57.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifengröße wechseln @ 182\mod_1377182698177_78.docx @ 1559803 @ 2 @ 1

19.19

Pos: 86.57.4 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifengröße wechseln @ 182\mod_1377181411119_78.docx @ 1559775 @ @ 1

Changing the Tyre Size

CAUTION!

If it is intended to change the tyre size, please ask KRONE customer service as the software parameter must be adapted by the traction drive, if necessary.

Pos: 86.57.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

425

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 86.57.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Reifen prüfen und pflegen @ 0\mod_1197358037214_78.docx @ 18094 @ 3 @ 1

19.19.1

Pos: 86.57.7 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Bild Big M 420 @ 87\mod_1320329410237_78.docx @ 745224 @ @ 1

Checking and maintaining tyres

Fig. 373

Pos: 86.57.8 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Big M 400 Text (2012-08-27 16:36:49) @ 0\mod_1197358379792_78.docx @ 18172 @ @ 1

Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.

• Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as possible or change the tyres.

• Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the sunlight for long periods.

• Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.

• Use a precisely working tyre gauge to check the tyre pressure at least once a week (see chapter entitled "Technical Data").

Note

Pos: 86.57.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Never operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transport of the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on the valves to keep dirt out. Check the tyre pressure frequently!

426

Pos: 86.57.10 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Radbefestigung 630 Nm @ 0\mod_1197359014933_78.docx @ 18210 @ 3 @ 1

19.19.2 Wheel mounting

630 Nm

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BM 400 0256

Fig. 374:

Tighten the wheel nuts after the first and then every 20 to 25 operating hours to a torque of 630

Nm.

Pos: 86.58 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Befestigungsschrauben am Ausleger nachziehen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197386860573_78.docx @ 20209 @ 3 @ 1

19.19.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger

1

BMII-365

Pos: 87 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 375:

• Retighten (annually) the four fastening bolts (1) on the frame arms to a tightening torque of

640 Nm.

427

Maintenance – lubrication chart

Pos: 88.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Schmierplan @ 0\mod_1197359304198_78.docx @ 18232 @ 2 @ 1

20

Pos: 88.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abschmieren der Gelenkwelle @ 0\mod_1197359496183_78.docx @ 18251 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – lubrication chart

20.1 Lubricating the PTO shaft

Pos: 88.3 /BA/Wartung/Gelenkwelle schmieren/Abschmieren Gelenkwelle BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197359557776_78.docx @ 18392 @ @ 1

50h

50h 50h

50h

20h

BM 400 0211

Fig. 376

All other grease nipples on the PTO shafts must be lubricated as shown in the illustration.

Pos: 88.4 /BA/Wartung/Gelenkwelle schmieren/Abschmieren Doppelgelenke am Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197360015073_78.docx @ 18473 @ 2 @ 1

20.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox

2x

30h

BMII-328

Pos: 88.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 377:

All other grease nipples on the double joints must be lubricated as shown in the illustration to the side.

Note

The lateral mowing units must be moved into the transport position first when using hydraulic auger hoods.

428

Pos: 88.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schmierplan @ 0\mod_1197361829026_78.docx @ 18495 @ 1 @ 1

20.3 Lubrication Chart

Pos: 88.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierplan BM 420 Bild @ 184\mod_1379057385217_78.docx @ 1588096 @ @ 1

1 16 3

1

12

2

8

9

Maintenance – lubrication chart

6 5x

8

1

12

1

3 16

1

10

5

5

13

11

4 2x

4 2x

11

14 7

15

15

Fig. 378

Pos: 88.8 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierplan BM 420 CV Tabelle @ 184\mod_1379057410830_78.docx @ 1588125 @ @ 1

Position Number Operating hours Note

10 25 50 100 250

1 5 X

2 1

3

4

2

4

X

X

Crank for conditioner plate (CV)

Double joint (universal joint bracket)

Double joint (main gearbox) (CV)

5 4 X Hydraulic cutting height adjustment

6 5 Horizontal universal shaft (front mowing

X unit)

7 1 X Full floating axle

X levelling system cylinder

Pos: 89 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

10

11

12

13

4

2

2

4

14

15

1

2

16 4

Total =41

X mowing unit)

X

X

Cylinder spring compensation

Belt tensioner auger

X

X

X

X

X

Storage tensioning arm V-belt

Lifting cylinder lateral mowing unit

Sieve drum bearing

Bearing tension roller support

Ball joint eye top link

429

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Elektrik @ 0\mod_1197362427261_78.docx @ 18572 @ 1 @ 1

21 Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_4 @ 0\mod_1197365392761_78.docx @ 18610 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• During repair work (welding) always switch off the engine, set main battery switch (1) to pos. II (circuit interrupted) and remove the cable plug from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

Pos: 90.3 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Technische Daten der elektrischen Anlage @ 0\mod_1197365664870_78.docx @ 18629 @ 2 @ 1

21.1 Electrical equipment - technical data

Generator power

Number of batteries

14V /150 A

2

Pos: 90.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Battery voltage 12V

Battery capacity (2x) 135 Ah

430

Pos: 90.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Batterie @ 0\mod_1197366520558_78.docx @ 18648 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

21.2 Battery

Pos: 90.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batteriegase sind hochexplosiv Version 1 @ 0\mod_1197366598276_78.docx @ 18667 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery gases are highly explosive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Batteries develop a highly explosive electrolytic gas. Do not allow sparks or naked flames anywhere near the battery.

• During repair work (welding work) on the electrical system or engine, always switch the engine off.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• Disconnect the cable plug (2) from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

• When jump-starting the battery, make certain that only a voltage of 12 V is connected to each battery!

Pos: 90.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterien Big M 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1271913925381_78.docx @ 373655 @ @ 1

Fig. 379

Pos: 90.8 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterien Big M 400/500 Text @ 0\mod_1197367396698_78.docx @ 18749 @ @ 1

The Big M is equipped with two batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each, which are connected in series (24 V) for starting.

A switching relay (2) is used to switch.

The operating voltage is only 12 V!

Pos: 90.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Keep the battery clean of dust and chaff.

431

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie-Hauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

21.2.1 Main battery switch

Pos: 90.11 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Vorsicht – Stromkreis durch den Batterie-Hauptschalter zu früh unterbrochen (2012-07-26 10:39:47) @ 86\mod_1319548789688_78.docx @ 739190 @ @ 1

Caution! - The electrical power circuit is interrupted too early by the battery master switch!

Effect: Exhaust gas after treatment system (SCR system MAN) can jam

Activate the battery master switch 2 minutes after switching off the engine at the earliest, as the

SCR system is blown off with compressed air in this time period.

Pos: 90.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Bild @ 49\mod_1287041480828_78.docx @ 464450 @ @ 1

Fig. 380

Pos: 90.13 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Text (2013-08-19 16:35:27) @ 49\mod_1287041651562_78.docx @ 464476 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine ’s power supply

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel

I – Electrical power circuit turned on

II – Electrical power circuit interrupted

Pos: 90.14 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Batterie-Hauptschalter Hinweis (2012-08-16 08:29:46) @ 49\mod_1287041037031_78.docx @ 464424 @ @ 1

Pos: 90.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Ignition to level 1 or 2

Effect: Battery discharges

• The battery is discharging even when the main battery switch interrupts the electrical power circuit. (Position II)).

• Before extended times with no usage, disconnect the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch (position II).

• Disconnect cables from battery terminal for winter storage (you may wish to charge or discharge the battery).

432

Pos: 90.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie aufladen @ 0\mod_1197368701995_78.docx @ 18795 @ 3 @ 1

21.2.3 Quick charge

Maintenance – electrical system

21.2.2 Charging Batteries

Pos: 90.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batteriegase, Batteriesäure @ 0\mod_1197369332058_78.docx @ 18853 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery gases, battery acid

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Remove the plastic covers of the battery in order to prevent highly explosive gas from gathering.

• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

Pos: 90.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Schnellladung @ 0\mod_1197369592011_78.docx @ 18915 @ 3 @ 1

• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

Fig. 381:

When quick charging the battery, disconnect the battery negative cable and open all battery cells to avoid damage to the electrical system.

Removing the battery:

Always disconnect the earth cable first and then the positive cable before removing the battery.

Pos: 90.19 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie reinigen @ 0\mod_1197369802542_78.docx @ 18934 @ 3 @ 1

21.2.4 Cleaning the battery

Pos: 90.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.

• Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole terminals.

• Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole terminals.

• Keep the venting holes of the plugs open.

433

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie prüfen @ 0\mod_1197368742605_78.docx @ 18814 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 90.22 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Gefahr - Batteriesäuren @ 0\mod_1197368825761_78.docx @ 18833 @ @ 1

Danger! - Battery acids

Effect: Chemical burns

• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

• If you top up the distilled water during the winter, allow the engine to run for about 30 minutes to ensure a better mixture of water and acid.

Pos: 90.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Säurestand prüfen @ 0\mod_1197369919339_78.docx @ 18953 @ 2 @ 1

• Use distilled water only.

21.2.6 Check acid level

Pos: 90.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 382:

Check the acid level every 250 operating hours.

• The acid level should be at the mark above the upper plate edge.

Note

Use only properly filled and maintained batteries.

Coat the battery terminals with acid protection grease (terminal grease).

434

Pos: 90.25 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Messen der Säuredichte @ 0\mod_1197370272823_78.docx @ 18972 @ 3 @ 1

21.2.7 Measuring Acid Density

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 383:

• Use an acid tester to measure the acid density of each battery cell.

A fully charged battery should have an acid density of 1.28 in normal climatic conditions.

• Recharge the battery, if the density drops below 1.20.

435

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterien einbauen und polrichtig anschließen @ 0\mod_1197370412776_78.docx @ 19054 @ 2 @ 1

21.3 Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly

Caution! - Installation of Batteries

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Always connect batteries with the correct polarity

3

1

4

2

Pos: 90.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 384:

To do this:

• Connect the positive cable from the starter (3) to the positive pole of the battery (1).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery (1) with the positive pole (30a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the negative cable of the battery (1) with the negative pole (31a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the negative cable from the starter (3) to the negative pole of the battery (2).

• Connect the negative cable of the battery (2) with the negative pole (31) of the battery changeover relay (4).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery (2) with the positive pole (30) of the battery changeover relay (4).

436

Pos: 90.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Drehstromgenerator @ 0\mod_1197370865698_78.docx @ 19073 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.30 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anlage @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.docx @ 19111 @ @ 1

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

Pos: 90.31 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator Big M 420 Bild @ 86\mod_1320155361999_78.docx @ 741871 @ @ 1

BM 420 0066

Fig.

Pos: 90.32 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator Text @ 0\mod_1197371243636_78.docx @ 19130 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter "Fitting and Dismantling V-Ribs")

Have the three-phase generator checked once a year at a specialist workshop.

Pos: 90.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

437

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.34 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Starter @ 0\mod_1197370892620_78.docx @ 19092 @ 2 @ 1

21.5 Starter

Pos: 90.35 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anlage @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.docx @ 19111 @ @ 1

Pos: 90.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Bild Big M 420 @ 86\mod_1320156232769_78.docx @ 741929 @ @ 1

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

BM 420 0067

Pos: 90.37 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Text @ 0\mod_1197371466761_78.docx @ 19149 @ @ 1

Fig. 385

Note

If the electrical power circuit is interrupted by the main battery switch, 12 V is still present on the starter.

If the starter fails or does not work properly, investigate the cause of the problem. If the suggestions listed below do not remove the damage, please seek the advice of your KRONE dealer. Have the starter checked thoroughly once a year at a specialist workshop.

Loose, soiled or corroded cable connections:

• Clean the cable connections on the starter and tighten the connections.

• Clean the earth cable on the engine and tighten the connection to the engine.

Battery performance too low:

• Check the electrolyte as well as acid density, and recharge the battery, if and when necessary.

Discharged battery:

• Charge the battery.

Use of a wrong engine oil viscosity:

• Always use the right engine oil according to the specification.

Starter safety relay is defective:

• Replace the relay.

Pos: 90.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

438

Pos: 90.39 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Steuereinheiten und Sicherungen Big M 420/500 @ 83\mod_1317362329696_78.docx @ 729087 @ 3 @ 1

21.6 Control units and fuses

Maintenance – electrical system

8 4 1 6

A

5

7

3

2

BM 420 0052

Pos: 90.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 386

Note

Have work on the electronic system carried out by KRONE after-sales service or KRONE dealer only!

The control units listed below are located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab.

1.

CU control unit console

2.

MFR engine control

3.

SmartDrive (travelling gear)

4.

KMC1 Krone machine controller

5.

DIOM output module

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the control units listed above are located on the console circuit board. The console circuit board is located behind the cover (A) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled

"Console Circuit Board"

439

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.41 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/EDC Electronic-Diesel-Control M 420 @ 87\mod_1320321684421_78.docx @ 744942 @ 3 @ 1

1

BM 420 0070

Fig. 387

The Electronic-Diesel-Control EDC (1) is located in direction of travel right on the engine. For more information, please refer to the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer.

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the Electronic-Diesel-Control EDC (1) are located on the console circuit board.

The console circuit board is located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the Chapter entitled "Console Circuit

Board"

Pos: 90.42 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Kabinen-Relaisplatine BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197374727073_78.docx @ 19290 @ 3 @ 1

21.6.2 Cab relay PCB

1

BX500088

Pos: 90.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 388:

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the cab are located on the cab relay circuit board.

The cab relay circuit board is located behind the cover (1) on the rear wall of the cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Cab Circuit Board"

440

Pos: 90.44 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Konsole BM 420 (2012-06-21 13:14:16) @ 87\mod_1320328949399_78.docx @ 745168 @ 3 @ 1

21.6.3 Console Circuit Board

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 389

441

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 90.46 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Kabine BM 420 (2012-06-21 13:34:59) @ 87\mod_1320329187178_78.docx @ 745196 @ 3 @ 1

21.6.4 Cabin Circuit Board

Pos: 90.47 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 390

442

Pos: 90.48 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Krone-Maschinen-Contoller (KMC1) BM 400/420 @ 14\mod_1228745762224_78.docx @ 170867 @ 1 @ 1

21.6.5 Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)

Maintenance – electrical system

Fig. 391

443

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 92 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

Pos: 94.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Zentralschmierung @ 0\mod_1197378235308_78.docx @ 19471 @ 2 @ 1

22 Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.2 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/BEKA MAX @ 51\mod_1288863746156_78.docx @ 497745 @ @ 1

BEKA MAX

Pos: 94.3 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Betrieb der Maschine mit nicht zulässigen oder verunreinigten Schmierstoffen @ 51\mod_1288876736250_78.docx @ 497991 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

The machine must not be operated with non-permitted or uncleaned lubricants.

Machine damage.

Check the surrounding area to ensure it is clean.

• Use suitable and clean tools.

• Use permitted lubricants.

• Lubricants must be free of impurities.

Pos: 94.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Übersicht @ 53\mod_1289900374656_78.docx @ 506510 @ 2 @ 1

22.1 Overview

Pos: 94.5 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 94.6 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Übersichts BIG M 420 CV Bild @ 292\mod_1411102988151_78.docx @ 2303455 @ @ 1

1

2

6

7

5 3 4

444

Fig. 392

Pos: 94.7 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Schmierplan BIG M 420 CV Text @ 292\mod_1411375634385_78.docx @ 2304465 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 393

BM 420 0173

445

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.9 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 94.10 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Übersicht BIG M 420 CRI Bild @ 292\mod_1411103029896_78.docx @ 2303486 @ @ 1

1

2

6

7

5 3 4

8

Fig. 394

Pos: 94.11 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Schmierplan BIG M 420 CRI Text @ 293\mod_1411378606073_78.docx @ 2304505 @ @ 1

446

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 395

BM 420 0172

447

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.13 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierstoffbefüllung @ 51\mod_1288863995000_78.docx @ 497771 @ 2 @ 1

22.2 Lubricant filling

USA

1

2

ZTS 000 0001

Fig.396

Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple

The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially available grease gun.

Pos: 94.14 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Abfüllkupplung @ 51\mod_1288867617671_78.docx @ 497827 @ 2 @ 1

2. Additional mounting connection

3

4

1

2

Pos: 94.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX110008

Fig.397

• Remove the lubrication nipple (3) and replace by filler neck 995-000-705 (4)

• The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to the filling pump (1).

448

Pos: 94.16 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Befüllzylinder @ 51\mod_1288868166031_78.docx @ 497854 @ @ 1

Filling cylinder

M20x 1,5

3

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

2

1

BX110009

Fig. 398

• Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace by filler socket 940 392 0 (2)

Pos: 94.17 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierstoff @ 186\mod_1380004894079_78.docx @ 1606288 @ 2 @ 1

• For filling remove the protective cap on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0 (1)

22.4 Lubricant

To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommend using the adjacent greases that we have tested (greases with sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or off-road area because they are soluble in water.)

Note

To ensure the system works properly, be careful no impurities enter the system when refilling lubricant. Dirt will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication system and will damage or destroy parts at friction points.

Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.

Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or grease should be used as lubricants . Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).

They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since this can result in blockages during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can be distributed and pumped with progressive pumps.

Pos: 94.18 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Verwenden von falschen Schmierstoffen @ 11\mod_1222685784023_78.docx @ 142396 @ @ 1

Pos: 94.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Warning - Use of incorrect lubricants

Effect: Bearing damage to the machine

Use only the lubricants listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid grease.

449

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.20 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Fettsorten der Zentralschmierung @ 0\mod_1197382597474_78.docx @ 19894 @ 2 @ 1

22.4.1 Grease types, NLGIClass 2

Manufacturer Type designation

AGIP

ARAL

BP

Autol Top 2000

Long-term grease H

Energrease LS EP 9346

With soap

Minimum pumping

Spec. Ca –10

Li –25

Li –20

Li –25

CASTROL

ESSO

ELF

FINA

Spheerol EP L2 Li

Exxon multi-purpose grease Li

ELF Multi 2 Li

EP multi-purpose grease Li

–20

–20

–20

–20

Li –25

KROON OIL Lithep Grease

MOBIL Mobilux EP 2

Li

Li

Li

–10

–15

–20

MOGUL

ÖMV

OPTIMOL

SHELL

LV 1 EP

ÖMV Signum M283

Olit EP 2

Retinax EP L2

Li

Li/Ca

Li

–25

–25

–25

Li –20

Li –15

Li –20

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li –20

Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable times

ARAL BAB EP 2

AVIA Syntogrease

BECHEM

DEA

FINA

UWS VE 42

Dolon E EP2

Biolical EP S2

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

–20

Li –25

–25

–20

–25

Pos: 94.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

LUBRITECH Stabyl Eco EP2

Li –25

Li/Ca –20

ÖMV ÖMV –25

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol E2

Ca –20

Li –25

450

Pos: 94.22 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Füllstandskontrolle @ 86\mod_1320160327245_78.docx @ 742075 @ 2 @ 1

22.5 Checking the fill level

USA

1 min

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.399

Visual

The transparent lubricant tank (1) permits a visual inspection of the fill.

2

ZTS 000 0002

451

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 94.24 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Zeiten des Schmierintervalls ändern @ 86\mod_1320160656490_78.docx @ 742103 @ 2 @ 1

22.6 Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval

The lubrication intervals of the system have been pre-adjusted ex works.

Default setting upon delivery:

Cycle time: 1h

Lubrication period: 8 min

Change setting:

9

7

8

ZTS 000 0003

Fig. 400

• Use a flat screw driver to remove the red frame (7) on the protective motor housing of the pump

• Unscrew the four cross-head screws and lift off the transparent protective cover

• Use a flat screwdriver to set the cycle time (8) / lubrication duration (9)

• Reposition the transparent protective cover and secure it with the four cross-head screws

• Securely attach the red frame (7) again

CAUTION!

If the cover is not properly closed, water can penetrate the system, which then may be destroyed. In this case, the warranty will be void.

Pos: 94.25 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Fehlersuche und Beseitigung @ 51\mod_1288879023093_78.docx @ 498017 @ 2 @ 1

22.7 Troubleshooting

Pos: 94.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point.

• Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean the main distributor or replace it.

• Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

• Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean the blocked subdistributor and replace it if required.

• Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

452

Pos: 94.27 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Signalanzeigen @ 51\mod_1288879531062_78.docx @ 498044 @ @ 1

Signal displays

6

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

5

4

ZTS 000 0004

Fig.401

Note

The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence.

The function of the pump is displayed via two control LEDs (green (4)/red (5)) in the viewing window (6) on the protective motor housing of the pump. The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence. red on off

Ready for operation: 1.5 sec green on off red on off

Pos: 95 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 off red on 1 sec off

1 sec. green on off red on Until the lubricant reservoir is re-filled red off green on off on 1 sec

1 sec. green on off red off on 0.5 sec off

0.5 sec. green on off

Display of functional readiness

Program run of a lubrication process

Cycle error on the progressive distributor

Error grease level

Grease level too low

Error pump motor speed

Error CPU / memory

453

Placing in Storage

Pos: 96.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einlagerung @ 0\mod_1197385459120_78.docx @ 19966 @ 1 @ 1

23

Pos: 96.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Am Ende der Erntesaison @ 0\mod_1197385501276_78.docx @ 19985 @ 2 @ 1

Placing in Storage

23.1

Pos: 96.3 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Einlagerung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197385531370_78.docx @ 20004 @ @ 1

At the End of the Harvest Season

Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to preserve the machine.

• Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercial fertilisers are stored.

• Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.

• Clean the machine thoroughly through the maintenance openings inside and out. Chaff and dirt attract moisture, which causes steel parts to begin rusting.

Note

If a high pressure washing device is used for cleaning, do not point the water jet at the bearing or electrical system/electronic components.

• Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of setting screws and similar items; relieve springs.

• Transport interlock ratchet mechanism for side mowers: grease the bolt.

• Lubricate the plunger rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as possible.

• Moisten with oil all lever joints, cutter bars, and bearing points that cannot be lubricated.

Write down all repair jobs that must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance service and any required repairs outside of harvest season.

Pos: 96.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorbereich @ 0\mod_1197385875776_78.docx @ 20043 @ 1 @ 1

Pos: 96.5 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis auf Motorhersteller @ 0\mod_1197385918276_78.docx @ 20062 @ @ 1

Pos: 96.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on cleaning and preservation)

454

Pos: 96.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Vor Beginn der neuen Saison @ 0\mod_1197386024448_78.docx @ 20081 @ 2 @ 1

Placing in Storage

23.3 Before the Start of the New Season

Pos: 96.8 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Text vor Beginn der Saison Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197386062214_78.docx @ 20100 @ @ 1

Before the start of the new harvest season, conduct a thorough inspection of the machine.

Keeping the machine in flawless condition will rule out the possibility of costly malfunctions during harvest time.

If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleaned inside and out.

• Refit any belts and V-belts that were removed and check belt tensions.

• Remove the covers from the engine openings.

• Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.

• Check to make certain all bolts are tightened and all cotter pins are in place.

• Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosion agent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protect the system against corrosion.

• Check the batteries. Check the charge state and height of the battery acid. If necessary, charge the batteries.

• Check the tyre pressures.

• Retighten the four attachment bolts on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm

(annually).

• After these tasks are complete, let the machine run about one hour at half speed. Then check all bearings for overheating.

Pos: 96.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

455

Placing in Storage

Pos: 96.10 /BA/Einlagerung/Reibkupplung/Reibkupplung BYPY entlüften @ 0\mod_1197387210183_78.docx @ 20228 @ 23 @ 1

23.4 Friction clutch –ByPy

23.4.1

1

KR305450

Fig. 402:

Completely loosen the four hexagonal socket head screws (2). These screws are not entirely threaded. Therefore they cannot be screwed out of the coupling.

The coupling is now ready for use.

Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft

2

Pos: 97 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

KR305460 KR305470

Fig. 403

Tighten the hexagonal socket head screws (2) on the friction clutch at the beginning of the storage period. This will relieve the disc springs' pressure on the friction lining and prevent the tendency to adhere. The flange coupling is vented.

To place the machine in service again, follow the instructions in chapter "Friction Clutch".

456

Pos: 98 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Entsorgung der Maschine @ 274\mod_1404207309028_78.docx @ 2060455 @ 1 @ 1

25 Appendix

Pos: 101 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Fehlermeldungen @ 13\mod_1226558727524_78.docx @ 166264 @ 2 @ 1

Disposal of the machine

24

Pos: 99 /BA/Entsorgung der Maschine/Die Maschine entsorgen @ 274\mod_1404207434449_78.docx @ 2060544 @ 2 @ 1

Disposal of the machine

24.1 Disposal of the machine

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The applicable country-specific, current waste disposal guidelines and the legal laws must be observed.

Metal parts

All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

The components must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

Electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

Pos: 100 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Anhang @ 1\mod_1202278612285_78.docx @ 58360 @ 1 @ 1

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Inhalt ===

457

A  

Abrasion Limit ................................................... 383

Activating fast reversing.................................... 289

Actuating release switches ................................. 71

Adjust all mowing units to 0°. ............................ 139

Adjustable Fan Nozzles ...................................... 92

Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............... 297

Adjusting the conditioner plate ......................... 302

Adjusting the cutting height ...................... 293, 295

Adjusting the Lifting Height ............................... 294

Adjusting the mowing units ............................... 292

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra) 303

Adjusting the Sensors ....................................... 412

Adjusting the swath width ................................. 306

Adjusting the Tedder Speed ............................. 300

Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units ................................................. 308

Adjusting the Warning Panel ............................ 247

After Shearing Off ............................................. 389

Air comfort seat ................................................... 45

Air Conditioning System ..................................... 40

Air filter .............................................................. 352

Air intake and distribution ................................. 403

Aligning the Cutter Bar ...................................... 373

Allround lights (optional) ..................................... 63

Angular gearbox ....................................... 368, 371

Appendix ........................................................... 458

At the End of the Harvest Season .................... 455

Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ...................... 326

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .................... 332

Autopilot .............................................................. 21

Autopilot release switch / - optional .................... 73

Axle separation key ............................................ 76

B  

Basic screen field mode...................................... 96

Basic screen road travel ..................................... 96

Battery ........................................................ 23, 431

Before the Start of the New Season ................. 456

BEKA - MAX central lubrication ........................ 445

Beka Max .......................................................... 445

Belt drives ......................................................... 418

Blade Changing on Cutting Discs ..................... 384

Blade Quick-Fit Device ............................. 380, 386

Blade screw connection .................................... 379

Blade Screw Connection .................................. 385

Brake light ........................................................... 58

458

Brakes .............................................................. 391

Bringing up a Menu Level ................................ 117

C  

Cab relay PCB ................................................. 440

Cabin .................................................................. 42

Cabin Circuit Board .......................................... 442

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System .............. 141

Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor ................... 142

Calibrating Steering Automatically ................... 143

Calibrating Steering Manually .......................... 147

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval .. 453

Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ............. 404

Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................... 106

Changing the Tyre Size ................................... 425

Charge Indicator Lamp ...................................... 77

Charging Batteries ........................................... 433

Check battery ................................................... 434

Check before Start-up ...................................... 249

Checking and maintaining tyres ....................... 426

Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling

Quantity ........................................................ 416

Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder 378

Checking/tensioning/replacing belt drive for conditioner ................................................... 424

Circulation filter ................................................ 405

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the preseparator ...................................................... 407

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with

Compressed Air ........................................... 339

Cleaning the Radiator ...................................... 417

Cleaning the Radiator Compartment ............... 417

Cleaning the Sieve Drum ................................. 417

Cleaning the Tedder Housing .......................... 363

Collector/drier ................................................... 415

Commissioning ................................................ 243

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 354

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 354

Console Circuit Board ...................................... 441

Consumables ..................................................... 41

Contact ............................................................... 28

Contamination in the engine compartment ...... 339

Control units and fuses .................................... 439

Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an

Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ....................... 310

Cooler ................................................................ 49

Cooling system .................................................. 23

Cross Conveyor Drive ...................................... 423

Cruise Control ................................................... 264

Cutter Blades .................................................... 378

D  

Daily checks ...................................................... 249

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the

Safety Instructions .......................................... 18

Deactivating the axle suspension ..................... 309

Deflector Plates ................................................ 308

Deleting Area .................................................... 108

Description of Installation ................................. 245

Deviating Torque .............................................. 360

Diagnostics ....................................................... 155

Diagnostics ISOBUS Steering System ............. 192

Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) ............................ 79

Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ............... 80

Diesel engine error storage .............................. 231

Direction Information ........................................... 15

Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

...................................................................... 255

Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics . 158

Disposal of the machine ................................... 458

Drain valve ........................................................ 355

Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ...... 48

Drive of mowing unit ......................................... 422

Driving and Transport ....................................... 251

Driving Forwards ............................................... 262

E  

Electronic-Diesel-Control (EDC) ....................... 440

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor 364

Emergency exit ................................................... 23

Emergency Exit ................................................... 50

Emergency steering forces ............................... 260

Emptying the Water Separator ......................... 341

Engine area ...................................................... 455

Engine coolant .................................................. 351

Engine Coolant ................................................. 350

Engine oil and filter replacement ...................... 340

Engine oil level .................................................. 340

Entering parameters ......................................... 120

Error Message 1414 ......................................... 254

Error Message 1415 ......................................... 254

Error Messages ........................................ 241, 458

F  

Fan wheel drive ................................................ 419

Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) .......... 289

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for

Gearboxes .................................................... 366

Fire preventions .................................................. 24

Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ....................................................... 436

Fitting the guard cloths .................................... 243

Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit to

Headland Position ........................................ 274

Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ................ 243

Folding down Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously ............................................. 274

Folding Down the Mowing Units ...................... 273

Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to Transport Position .................................... 285

Folding Up the Guards ..................................... 252

Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously to Transport Position .......... 285

Folding up the Mowing Units ........................... 284

Friction clutch ................................................... 457

Front mowing unit ..... 36, 293, 298, 306, 308, 322,

362, 373

Fuel .................................................................. 346

Fuel filter/water separator ................................ 341

Full Beam ........................................................... 54

G  

Game animal protection ................................... 287

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ........................... 372

Grease types, NLGIClass 2 ............................. 451

Guide's seat ....................................................... 49

H  

Hand pump ...................................................... 343

Headlamp Flasher .............................................. 54

High-pressure filter ........................................... 401

Horn ................................................................... 53

Hydraulic system .............................................. 392

I  

Identification Plate .............................................. 28

Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions

....................................................................... 15

Ignition lock ........................................................ 78

Implements ........................................................ 22

Indicator Switches .............................................. 53

Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

....................................................................... 58

Info centre EasyTouch ....................................... 94

Information message ....................................... 242

Information Required for Questions and Orders 28

Information Section ............................................ 96

Information Section Drive Information (VI) ...... 100

Information section of settings (IV and V) ........ 100

Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

....................................................................... 99

Input gearbox ................................................... 369

459

Inside mirror ........................................................ 68

Installation of Cutter Blades .............................. 247

Installing the auger-type cross conveyor .......... 314

Intended use ............................................... 16, 271

Interior lighting .................................................... 64

Interior Room Lighting ........................................ 65

ISOBUS Steering System Diagnostics ............. 192

K  

Killing the engine .............................................. 259

-Klimatronik / heating .......................................... 84

Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)

...................................................................... 443

L  

Ladder to driver's cabin ...................................... 42

Lateral Mowing Unit ......... 299, 300, 307, 367, 376

Left Outside Mirror .............................................. 66

Lifting All Mowing Units to Headland Position .. 283

Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Headland Position ......................................... 283

Lifting Front Mowing Unit into Headland Position

...................................................................... 282

Lifting the Mowing Units ................................... 282

Lighting ............................................................... 57

Lowering all Mowing Units to Working Position 276

Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Working Position ........................................... 275

Lowering Front Mowing Unit to Working Position

...................................................................... 275

Lowering Mowing Units..................................... 275

Lubricant ........................................................... 450

Lubricant filling .................................................. 449

Lubricants ........................................................... 41

Lubricating the PTO shaft ................................. 428

Lubrication Chart .............................................. 429

M  

Machine Data Counter ...................................... 136

Machine overview ............................................... 27

Main battery switch ..................................... 26, 432

Main block ......................................................... 396

Main gearbox .................................................... 367

Main menu 1 Settings ....................................... 118

Main Menu 2 Counters ..................................... 136

Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................... 138

Main Menu 4 Service ........................................ 154

Maintenance ....................................................... 25

Maintenance – Basic Machine .......................... 391

Maintenance – Central Lubrication ................... 445

Maintenance – compressed air system ............ 354

Maintenance – electrical system ...................... 430

460

Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 335

Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................... 428

Maintenance – Mowing Units ........................... 356

Maintenance Table – Engine ........................... 337

Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ................. 358

Manometric Switch ........................................... 414

Manual Mode ................................................... 149

Measuring Acid Density ................................... 435

Menu 1-1 Parameters ...................................... 119

Menu 1-2 Machine Setting ............................... 121

Menu 1-3 Units ................................................. 126

Menu 1-4 Language ......................................... 127

Menu 1-5 Display ............................................. 128

Menu 1-5-1 Contrast ........................................ 129

Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .......................................... 130

Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ..................... 132

Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ..................... 133

Menu 1-6 Date/time ......................................... 134

Menu 1-9 Owner's address .............................. 135

Menu 3-5 Manual Mode ................................... 149

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ...................................... 155

Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .... 159

Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ....................... 195

Menu 4-1-11 CAN Bus ..................................... 206

Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ............................ 207

Menu 4-1-13 Electronics .................................. 218

Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine ............................. 219

Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ....................................... 222

Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console .................... 224

Menu 4-1-17 Display ........................................ 227

Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

..................................................................... 162

Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ........ 168

Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood

..................................................................... 176

Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics ..................... 182

Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps ........ 187

Menu 4-2 Error list ........................................... 228

Menu 4-3 Service level .................................... 233

Menu 4-4 Information ....................................... 234

Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ......................................... 235

Menu 4-4-2 Software ....................................... 236

Menu 4-4-3 Machine ........................................ 238

Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages.......... 239

Menu 5 Basic Screen ....................................... 240

Menu Level ...................................................... 113

Menu Level Short Overview ............................. 113

Motor Data (II) Information Section .................... 98

Moving the Front Mowing Unit to Central Position.

..................................................................... 253

Moving the guards into the working position .... 288

Mowing ............................................................. 286

Mowing Unit Drive ............................................. 277

Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ............... 288

Multi-Function Lever ........................................... 81

Multi-Function Lever Driving ............................... 83

N  

Namur sensor ................................................... 412

O  

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals

(Gearboxes) .................................................. 366

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

.............................................................. 373, 376

Opening the cabin door ...................................... 43

Opening the Front Guard .................................. 361

Operation – Mowing Units ................................ 271

Operation of Mowing Units ............................... 272

Operators controls .............................................. 44

Outrigger arms .................................................. 420

Outside mirrors ................................................... 66

Over-pressure valves ........................................ 397

Overview of motor ............................................. 335

P  

Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ........................ 71

Parking Brake ................................................... 268

Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade

Drums ........................................................... 382

Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ......... 381

Permissible Fuels ............................................. 346

Personnel Qualification and Training .................. 18

Pilot Lamp Cooling Water Temperature ............. 77

Pilot Lamp Engine Oil Pressure .......................... 77

Placing in Storage ............................................. 455

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the

Machine .......................................................... 30

Position of the Sensors ............................. 408, 410

Precondition for mowing ................................... 287

Pumps ............................................................... 395

Q  

Quick Access Customer Data Counter ............. 105

Quick access Hydraulic axle suspension ......... 110

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable cutting height (optional) ............................................ 101

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure)

(optional) ....................................................... 103

Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........... 101

Quick access Machine settings ........................ 112

Quick charge ..................................................... 433

Quick Stop ....................................................... 289

R  

Radio .................................................................. 93

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ................ 17, 271

Refrigerant ....................................................... 414

Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ........... 40

Release switch - holding brake .......................... 74

Release switch – road/field ........................ 72, 255

Release switch travelling gear ................... 75, 256

Releasing the holding brake manually ............. 270

Remove the Weiste Triangle ........................... 325

Removing Mowing Units .................................. 322

Removing of the compensation springs........... 323

Removing the Ground Flaps ............................ 291

Removing the Side Mowing Unit ...................... 327

Removing the tedder deflector plate ................ 311

Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit .......... 390

Replace Air Dryer ............................................. 355

Replacing the fuel filter insert .......................... 342

Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter ........................... 341

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ....................... 400

Replacing the linings ........................................ 387

Replacing Urea Filter Inserts ........................... 344

Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the

Outrigger ...................................................... 427

Reversing ......................................................... 263

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ..... 67

S  

Safety ........................................................... 16, 29

Safety cartridge ................................................ 353

Safety-conscious work practices ....................... 18

Selecting Area .................................................. 108

Self-propelled working machine ......................... 20

Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor

(Optional) ..................................................... 305

Setting the Acceleration Behaviour .................. 260

Setting the anti-collision mirror .......................... 67

Setting the right outside mirror ........................... 67

Setting the Steering Radius ............................. 148

Shear pins ........................................................ 365

Short Overview Menu Level ............................. 113

Side light/dipped beam ...................................... 59

Spare Parts ...................................................... 357

Special Equipment – Mowing Units ................. 310

Speed gearbox ................................................. 370

Spotlight ....................................................... 64, 65

Starter .............................................................. 438

Starting the engine ........................................... 257

Starting to Drive ............................................... 259

461

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ...................... 259

Start-up ............................................................. 249

Status line (I) ....................................................... 97

Steering Column Adjustment .............................. 52

Steering Column and Foot Pedals ...................... 51

Stopping ............................................................ 266

Stopping with Foot Brakes ................................ 267

Sun blind ............................................................. 68

Switch Group Roof Panel ................................... 56

Switch off the machine ...................................... 269

Switch panel ....................................................... 70

Switching Axle Separation On and Off ............. 290

Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives .................... 278

Switching Off the Engine .................................. 269

Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit

Drives ............................................................ 281

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

.............................................................. 278, 279

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Front .............................................................. 280

Switching On Mowing Unit Drives .................... 278

Switching on the dipped beam ........................... 59

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ............ 58

Switching on the indicator ................................... 58

Switching on the parking light ............................. 59

Switching the counter on or off ......................... 107

System Description Operating and Brake

Hydraulics ..................................................... 395

T  

Tanks ................................................................ 347

Tanks of urea solution ...................................... 348

Technical data .................................................... 38

Technical Data Air Conditioning System ............ 40

Technical Data of the Machine ........................... 38

Telephone and radio sets .................................. 25

Tensioning belts ............................................... 355

Tensioning the V-belts ..................................... 315

Test run ............................................................ 357

Three-phase generator .................................... 437

Tightening Torques .......................................... 359

Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ..... 360

Tool box ........................................................... 357

Towing ............................................................. 270

Transfer gearbox .............................................. 402

Transport / Road Travel ................................... 251

Troubleshooting ............................................... 453

Tyre Pressure .................................................. 248

Tyres .......................................................... 23, 425

U  

Using the operating brake .................................. 55

V  

Venting the fuel system ................................... 350

W  

Washer system .................................................. 69

Wheel chocks ..................................................... 25

Wheel mounting ............................................... 427

Windscreen washer system ............................. 406

Windshield wipers .............................................. 69

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................... 61

Working floodlight rear ....................................... 62

Working floodlights ............................................. 60

Working floodlights ............................................. 62

Working floodlights Cab ..................................... 61

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

....................................................................... 24

462

463

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle

Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle

Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Fax +49 (0) 59 77/935-339

Internet: http://www.krone.de

eMail: [email protected]

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Key Features

  • Self-propelled design for efficient and flexible operation
  • Wide cutting width for increased productivity
  • Innovative conditioning system for optimal forage quality
  • Powerful engine for reliable performance in demanding conditions
  • Comfortable and ergonomic cab for operator comfort and productivity
  • Advanced hydraulic system for precise and responsive implement control
  • Durable construction for longevity and reliability in tough operating conditions
  • Easy maintenance and serviceability for reduced downtime and increased uptime

Related manuals

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the cutting width of the Krone BiG M 420?
The Krone BiG M 420 has a cutting width of 4.2 meters, providing efficient and wide-area coverage for increased productivity.
What type of conditioning system does the Krone BiG M 420 use?
The Krone BiG M 420 utilizes an innovative conditioning system that gently conditions the crop to promote faster drying and improved fermentation, resulting in high-quality forage.
How powerful is the engine of the Krone BiG M 420?
The Krone BiG M 420 is equipped with a powerful engine that delivers reliable performance in demanding conditions, ensuring efficient operation and high productivity.
Is the Krone BiG M 420 easy to maintain?
The Krone BiG M 420 is designed for easy maintenance and serviceability, featuring convenient access points and продуманные конструкции, which reduces downtime and increases uptime.

advertisement

Table of contents